HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D08-363 - SEGMENT 3 - BANK OF AMERICA - BUILDINGD08-363
Bank of America
320 Strander Boulevard
Due to the file size, this record has been broken down into 4 segments for
easier download. Click on the following links to review the permit
segments:
Segment 1 - Bank of America — Building D08-363
Segment 2 - Bank of America — Building D08-363
Segment 3 - Bank of America — Building D08-363
Segment 4 - Plans - Bank of America — Building D08-363
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If
control rods are used, they must have 1/2" thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough
in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall
be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two
test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in
vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage
frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints
shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Manufacturer: Mason
Industries #SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR, SFU and CR.
D. Rigidly Mounted Equipment: Floor mounted equipment weighing over 400 lbs. and vessels of
any weight shall be protected by properly sized anchor bolts or hanger rods and bracing and, if
required, by additional seismic restraints as described above for isolated equipment.
E. Isolator Types: Where equipment isolators are not provided by other sections of the
specification or shown on Drawings, provide factory fabricated isolator types sized by the
manufacturer for the appropriate loading. Model numbers of Mason Industries products are
listed below. Products of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with all
of the requirements of this specification and the Drawings. Manufacturers: Mason Industries,
M.W. Sausse, Kinetics or approved equal.
1. Floor Mounted Pumps: 2" free-standing type housed single coil spring with separate
seismic snubbers. Mount on concrete filled inertia base with weight not less than that
equaling the equipment weight. Mason Industries #BMK base with #SLF springs and
#Z-1225 snubbers.
F. Submittals:
1. Confirmation of responsible design party (Shop Drawings received without this
information will be rejected without review. Architect will be informed of potential
delay of project.)
a. The seismic manufacturer's representative or engineer responsible for preparing the
specified seismic submittal package shall send the following documentation of
qualification:
1) The name and professional engineer's license number of the structural engineer
who will be responsible for preparing, designing, and stamping the seismic shop
drawing information.
2. Shop Drawings submittal
a. Stamped seismic restraint calculations.
b. The type, size and deflection of each isolator proposed.
c. Details for all the isolators with snubbers proposed and seismic bracing.
d. Details for steel frames to be used in conjunction with the isolation and seismic
restraint of the items.
e. Clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators, seismic
restraints and snubbers.
2.4 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide all access doors and panels to serve equipment under this work, including those which
must be installed, in finished architectural surfaces. Frame of 16 -gauge steel, door of 20 gauge
steel. 1" flange width, continuous piano hinge, key operated, prime coated. Refer to
Architectural Specifications for the required product Specification for each surface. Contractor
is to submit schedule of access panels for approval. Exact size, number and location of access
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 13
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
panels is not shown on Plans. Access doors shall be of a size to permit removal of equipment
for servicing. Access door shall have same rating as the wall or ceiling in which it is mounted.
Provide access panel for each concealed valve. Use no panel smaller than 12" x 12" for simple
manual access, or smaller than 24" x 24" where personnel must pass through. Provide cylinder
lock for access door serving mixing or critical valves in public areas.
B. Included under this work is the responsibility for verifying the exact location and type of each
access panel or door required to serve equipment under this work and in the proper sequence to
keep in tune with construction and with prior approval of the Architect. Access doors in fire
rated partitions and ceilings shall carry all label ratings as required to maintain the rating of the
rated assembly.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor, Karp, Nystrom, or Elmdor/Stoneman.
D. Submit markup of architectural plans showing size and location of access panels required for
equipment access for approval by Architect.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. Mechanical Identification Materials: Provide products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 21 Sections. Where more than single type is
specified for application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each
product category. Stencils are not acceptable.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers:
1. Snap-On Type: Provide pre-printed, semi-rigid snap -on, color coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI A13.1.
2. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure
sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. Secure both ends of markers
with color coded adhesive vinyl tape.
3. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit
of plastic.
C. Underground -Type Plastic Line Markers: Provide 6" wide x 4 mils thick multi -ply tape,
consisting of solid metallic foil core between 2 layers of plastic tape. Markers to be permanent,
bright colored, continuous printed, intended for direct burial service.
D. Valve Tags:
1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 1 1/2" diameter 19 -gauge polished brass valve tags with
stamp -engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve
numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Fill tag engraving with black
enamel.
2. Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide 3/32" thick engraved plastic laminate valve tags,
with piping system abbreviations in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2"
high, and with 5/32" hole for fasteners.
3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass
S -hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured
specifically for that purpose.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 14
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
4. Access Panel Markers: Provide 1/16" thick engraved plastic laminate access panel
markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include 1/8"
center hole to allow attachment.
E. Plastic Equipment Signs:
1. Provide 4-1/2" x 6" plastic laminate sign, ANSI A.13 color coded with engraved white
core lettering.
2. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive
where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
3. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as
possible:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters, such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm,
etc.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Craftmark, Seton, Brady, or Brimar.
2.6 ELECTRICAL
A. General:
1. All electrical material, equipment, and apparatus specified herein shall conform to the
requirements of Division 26.
2. Provide all motors for equipment specified herein. Provide motor starters, controllers,
transfer switches, and other electrical apparatus and wiring which are required for the
operation of the equipment specified herein.
3. Set and align all motors and drives in equipment specified herein.
4. Provide expanded metal or solid sheet metal guards on all V -belt drives to totally enclose
the drive on all sides. Provide holes for tachometer readings. Support guards separately
from rotating equipment.
5. Provide for all rotating shafts, couplings, etc., a solid sheet metal, inverted "U" cover
over the entire length of the exposed shaft and support separately from rotating
equipment. Cover shall extend to below the bottom of the shaft and coupling, and shall
meet the requirements of the State Industrial Safety Regulations.
6. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for
mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL listed/labeled as suitable for
location and use - no exceptions.
C. Low Voltage Control Wiring:
1. General: 14 gauge, Type THHN, color coded, installed in conduit.
2. Manufacturer: General Cable Corp., Alcan Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp.,
Senator Wire and Cable Co., or Southwire Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 15
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master fitter and shall result in an
installation consistent with the best practices of trades.
B. Install work uniform, level and plumb, in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any
diagonal, or otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by
Architect.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of
articles used on this Contract fumish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or
covered in these Specifications.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the work between the various Fire Protection Sections and with the work specified
under other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper
supervision or failure to make proper and timely provisions, the alternations shall be made to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and at the Contractor's cost. Coordinate wall and ceiling work
with the General Contractor, and his subcontractors in locating ceiling air outlets, wall registers,
etc.
B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or
defected materials.
3.4 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
A. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors, and associated work, installer shall meet at
project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and
testing agency representatives, (if any), installers of other work with requirements specified.
B. Installation of Building Attachments: Install building attachments at required locations within
concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Install additional building attachments
where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed. Fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength
less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through opening at top of inserts.
C. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports, and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including, but not limited to, proper placement of inserts, anchors, and other
building structural attachments.
D. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on
trapeze type hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together
by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for
smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not
support piping from other piping.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 16
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Install hangers within 12 inches of every change in piping direction, end of pipe run or
concentrated Load, and within 36 inches of every major piece of equipment. Hangers shall be
installed on both sides of flexible connections. Where flexible connection connects directly to a
piece of equipment only one hanger is required.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install
hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
G. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
H. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are
copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
I. Hanger Spacing in accordance with following minimum schedules (other spacings and rod sizes
may be used in accordance with NFPA):
1. Steel Pipe:
Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing Rod Size
1/2" to 1 1/4" 5 feet 3/8"
1 '/2" to 2" 7 feet 3/8"
2'/2" to 3" 10 feet 1/2"
4" and larger 12 feet 5/8"
2. Copper Pipe:
Pipe Size
1/2" to 2"
2 '/2" and larger
3. Plastic Pipe:
Pipe Size
1/2" to 2"
2 V2" and larger
Max. Hanger Spacing
6 feet
8 feet
Max. Hanger Spacing
4 feet
6 feet
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
J. Sloping, Air Venting, and Draining:
1. Slope all piping as specified and as indicated, true to line and grade, and free of traps and
air pockets. Unless indicated otherwise, slope piping in the direction of flow as follows:
Service Inclination Slope
Dry Sprinkler Piping Down 1" per 100'
Preaction System Piping Up 1" per 100'
K. Provisions for Movement:
1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connecting equipment.
3. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements:
a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers, (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation.
b. Shields: Where low compressive strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated
on cold or chilled water piping, install shields or inserts.
c. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated install protection
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 17
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
saddles.
L. Installation of Anchors:
1. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent excessive stresses and to prevent transfer of
loading and stresses to connected equipment.
2. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to
structure.
3. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and
forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.
4. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal
pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends.
M. Equipment Supports:
1. Provide all concrete bases, unless otherwise furnished as work of Division 03. Furnish to
Division 03 Contractor scaled layouts of all required bases, with dimensions of bases, and
location to column centerlines. Furnish templates, anchor bolts, and accessories
necessary for base construction.
2. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from
structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide
factory -fabricated tank saddles for tanks.
N. Adjusting:
1. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
2. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment
to proper level and elevations.
3. Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 PIPE PORTALS
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with other trades so units are installed when roofing is being installed.
C. Verify roof insulation thickness and adjust raise of cant to match.
3.6 VIBRATION CONTROL ISOLATORS
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration
isolation materials and units except as otherwise indicated. Comply with minimum static
deflections recommended by ASHRAE, of vibration isolation materials and units where not
otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration
control materials and units except as otherwise indicated. Adjust to ensure that units have equal
deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or
bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support
during installation.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 18
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
D. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as
required where substrate is not level.
E. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves.
F. Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured equipment
deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated. Clean each vibration control unit,
and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of
unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
3.7 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Protection Contractor shall coordinate with Division 26 work to provide complete systems
as required to operate all devices installed under this Division of work.
B. Installation of Electrical Connections: Furnish, install, and wire (except as may be otherwise
indicated) all fire protection motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule and
in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry
practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC, and NECA's "Standard of
Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. Carefully coordinate with work
performed under the Mechanical Division of these Specifications.
C. Division 21 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled mechanical equipment
which is specified in Division 21 Specifications or scheduled on Division 21 Drawings. The
specific division of responsibilities between Division 21 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this
equipment is as follows:
1. Division 21 Responsibilities:
a. MOTORS: Furnish and install all motors necessary for mechanical equipment.
b. MAGNETIC STARTERS: Furnish all magnetic starters whether manually or
automatically controlled which are necessary for mechanical equipment. Furnish
these starters with all control relays or transformers necessary to interface with
mechanical controls. If the starter is factory installed on a piece of Division 21
equipment, also furnish and install the power wiring between starter and motor.
c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Provide all VFD's associated with equipment.
If the drive is installed on a piece of factory assembled equipment the wiring
between motor and drive is to be provided as part of the factory equipment.
d. DISCONNECTS: Provide the disconnects which are part of factory wired Division
21 equipment. Factory wiring to include wiring between motor and disconnect or
combination starter/disconnect.
e. CONTROLS: Division 21 Contractor (including the temperature controls
subcontractor) is responsible for the following equipment in its entirety. This
equipment includes but is not limited to the following:
1) Control relays necessary for controlling Division 21 equipment.
2) Control transformers necessary for providing power to controls for Division 21
equipment.
3) Line voltage thermostats.
4) Low or non -load voltage control components.
5) Remote bulb thermostats.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION 210500 - 19
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
6) Non -life safety related valve or damper actuators.
7) Float switches.
8) Solenoid valves, EP and PE switches.
9) Refrigeration controls. (Division 21 provides power to refrigeration panels.)
f. FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT:
1) Fire Sprinkler System: Division 21 is responsible for providing necessary
controls including flow switches and alarm bells.
2) Specialized fire suppression systems: Division 21 is responsible for providing
necessary system controls and any required control interface wiring to these
controls. Division 26 is responsible for bringing power to point of connection
with the system.
D. Division 26 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled mechanical equipment
which is specified in Division 21 Specifications or scheduled on Division 21 Drawings. The
specific division of responsibilities between Division 21 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this
equipment is as follows:
1. Division 26 Electrical Responsibilities:
a. MOTORS: Provide the power wiring for the motors.
b. MAGNETIC STARTERS: Except where magnetic starters are factory installed on
Division 21 factory assembled equipment, Division 26 is to install magnetic starters
furnished by Division 21 and install the necessary power wiring to the starter and
from the starter to the motor. In the case of factory installed starters, Division 26 is
to install the necessary power wiring to the starter.
c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Physically mount all VFD's, which are not
specified to be installed on Division 21 factory assembled equipment. Provide the
necessary power wiring to the VFD and from the VFD to the motor except in the case
of factory installed VFD's where wiring between the motor and VFD is to be by
Division 21. Where disconnects are installed between a VFD and a motor provide
the interlocking wiring between the disconnect and VFD to insure that the drive is
shutdown simultaneously with motor.
d. DISCONNECTS: Provide all disconnects necessary for Division 21 mechanical
equipment which are not provided as part of factory wired Division 21 equipment.
Provide power wiring to all disconnects. In addition provide power wiring between
motor and disconnect when the disconnect is not factory installed. See also Variable
Frequency Drive above for special wiring requirements.
e. CONTROLS: Division 26 Contractor is responsible for providing power to control
panels and control circuit outlets.
f. FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT:
1) Fire Sprinkler System: Division 26 is responsible for providing power wiring to
fire protection controls including flow switches and alarm bells.
2) Specialized fire suppression systems: Division 26 is responsible for providing
power wiring to suppression system and its controls.
2. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation,
as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment
with other work.
3. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match
conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power
supplies and installed equipment.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 20
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
4. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and operational
facilities, unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner,
or Architect/Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing
facilities. When necessary, schedule momentary outages for replacingexisting wiring
systems with new wiring systems. When that "cutting -over" has been successfully
accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.
5. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation
resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced.
6. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation
properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.
Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also
avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.
E. Motors and Motor Control Equipment: Conform to the standards of the NEMA. Equip motors
with magnetic or manual line starters with overload protection. Motor starters and line voltage
controls shall be installed under Electrical Section but located and coordinated as required under
this Section of the work. Starters shall be combination type with non -fusible disconnect
switches. All single phase fractional horsepower motors shall have built-in overload protection.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. General: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting, or
other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to
installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
B. Piping System Identification:
1. Install pipe markers on each system indicated to receive identification, and include
arrows to show normal direction of flow.
2. Locate pipe markers as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each
pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter
non -accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points which permit view of concealed
piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced horizontally at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run, with
minimum of one in each room. Vertically spaced at each story transversed.
C. Underground Piping Identification: During backfilling/topsoiling of each exterior underground
piping system, install continuous underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over
buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common
trench and do not exceed overall width of 16", install single line marker.
D. Mechanical Equipment Identification: Locate engraved plastic laminate signs on or near each
major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide signs for the
following:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.
2. Meters, gauges, thermometers, and similar units.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION 210500 - 21
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Pumps, compressors, and similar motor -driven units.
4. Tanks and pressure vessels.
5. Sprinkler and standpipe equipment.
E. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between
multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. Equipment signs shall include an
identification of the area or other equipment served by the equipment being labeled.
3.9 VIBRATION AND DYNAMIC BALANCING
A. Vibration tolerances shall be as specified by the "International Research and Development
Corporation", Worthington, Ohio, measured by the displacement, peak to peak, as follows:
1. Pump and Electric Motors: Below severity chart labeled "SLIGHTLY ROUGH",
maximum vibration velocity of 0.157 in/sec, peak.
2. Compressors: Same as pumps.
B. Correction shall be made to all equipment which exceeds vibration tolerances specified above.
Final vibration levels shall be reported as described above.
3.10 TESTING
A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment,
including test pumps, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Test all rotational
equipment for proper direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing, certify to the Architect,
in writing, that the specified tests have been performed and that the installation complies with
the specified requirements and provide a report of the test observations signed by qualified
inspector.
END OF SECTION 210500
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
210500 - 22
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 21 10 00 — WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
210500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 21 specified herein.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) specified in inches.
B. Working plans as used in this Section refer to documents (including drawings and calculations)
prepared pursuant to requirements in NFPA 13 for obtaining approval of authority having juris-
diction.
C. NTCET - National Institute For Certification In Engineering Technologies
D. Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes modifying, providing and installing a complete and fully operable automatic
sprinkler system as described in this Section of the Specification and as shown on the contract
construction drawings and shall be in accordance with rules, regulations and standards as re-
quired by the following authorities having jurisdiction.
1. State of Washington
2. City of Tukwilla.
3. Building Department.
4. Fire Prevention Division, Fire Marshal's Office.
B. Work to be in accordance with criteria of the following design and installation standards:
1. State of Washington Structural Specialty Code.
2. National Fire Protection Association.
a. No. 13 - Sprinkler Systems
b. No. 14 - Standpipes & Hose Systems.
c. No. 70 - National Electrical Code.
d. No. 101 -Life Safety Code.
3. International Fire Code (IFC) with city & state amendments.
4. International Building Code (IBC) with city & state amendments.
5. Factory Mutual Approval Guide (Product listing, only).
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
7. Industrial Risk Insurance Underwriters.
8. Owner's insurance agency.
C. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 10 00-1
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Automatic Wet Type Sprinkler System: Provide & replace existing sprinkler heads in the
remodeled areas on 4th & 5th floors.
2. Remodeling of existing systems.
3. All cutting and patching.
4. Provide all pipe, fittings, sprinklers, valves, signs, flow switches, tamper switches, pro-
tective painting, test connections, drains and tests necessary to make the entire system
complete and operative.
5. Coordinate with plumbing contractor for capacity of all sprinkler main, test, and auxiliary
drain connections.
6. Valve tags and instruction plates shall be mounted and/or hung per local fire department
requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit six copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions
for fire protection materials and products.
1. Thirty days after the awarding of contract, contractor shall submit list of manufacturer's
names and model numbers for approval to architect. This list shall identify any prior ap-
proved substituted items contractor wishes to use. Do not submit technical data until list
has been approved. This is mandatory.
2. Prior to construction submit for approval items including but not be limited to the follow-
ing:
a. Coordinated layout drawings. Lettering shall be minimum 1/8" high.
b. Sprinklers and escutcheons - designating area of use.
c. Valves, valve boxes, flow switches, and tamper switches.
d. Pipe, fittings, sway bracing, inserts, anchors and hangers.
e. Inspector's test and drain station.
f. Fire extinguishers.
B. Working Plans: Prepare scaled working plans for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but
not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, and elevations and slopes of horizontal
runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Indicate interface between and spatial rela-
tionship to piping and adjacent equipment. Lettering shall be minimum 1/8" high.
1. Spacing of fire sprinklers shall be coordinated with lights, air conditioning outlets, sound
speakers, architectural reflected ceiling plan; obstruction from light fixtures and other ar-
chitectural features; and sprinkler piping shall be coordinated with HVAC ductwork &
piping, plumbing, electrical conduit, cable trays and structure prior to the installation.
Drawings shall be composite type including mechanical, plumbing and lighting equip-
ment with sprinkler and sprinkler drain piping. See architectural ceiling plan.
C. Submittal Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Agency having jurisdiction for approval. Submit
six approved copies, bearing stamp and/or signature of authority having jurisdiction to the En-
gineer for approval.
1. Contractor shall submit sprinkler head locations to architect for approval.
2. Each calculation shall include legible schematic of system showing all hydraulic refer-
ence points.
D. Hydraulic Calculations: Prepare hydraulic calculations of fire protection systems. Submit to
authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit six approved copies, bearing stamp, and/or
signature of Agency having jurisdiction to Owner's representative for approval.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1.. Contractor shall submit published piping friction loss data from manufacturer with hy-
draulic calculations.
E. (:ertificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work,
which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13, and also that system is
operational, complete, and has no defects.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and
products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calcula-
tion, certificate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of the General Conditions and of Division 01.
G. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide the Owner with three sets of operating and
maintenance instructions covering completely the operation and maintenance of sprinkler
equipment and controls. Manual shall be assembled in a 3 -ring binder and arranged in follow-
ing sections:
1. Site Utilities: Drawings showing location, size, depth of all connections, valve boxes,
manholes, etc., as installed.
2. Section No. 1: A chart tabulating all types of pipefittings, valves, and piping specialties
installed in each system.
3. Section No. 3: Manufacturer's brochures of all sprinkler heads.
4. Section No. 9: Reproducible copies of approved working drawings prepared to facilitate
the actual installation of ductwork and piping. Drawings shall indicate location of all
concealed valves, and other apparatus.
5. Section No. 10: 2 copies of NFPA 25 "Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance
of Water Based Fire Protection Systems."
6. Section No. 11: Approval Calculations.
7. Section No. 12: Certificate of Installation.
8. Section No. 13: Guarantees.
9. The Contractor is responsible for proper instruction of Owner's personnel for operation
and maintenance of all material, equipment and apparatus provided.
1.5 DESIGN DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specification combined with any of the contract drawings are intended as a
guide to establish a basis of design for the systems required.
B. Contractor shall examine the existing installation, the Architectural, Interior Design, Structural,
Mechanical and Electrical drawings, layout and install a completely hydraulically sized sprin-
kler system for all modified areas. Space shall be provided for any valving and equipment to be
used.
1, Contractor shall contact Owner's insurance agency to incorporate insurer's design re-
quirements in this layout document.
C. Pressure restricting devices shall be installed on any branch outlet exceeding 100 PSI.
D. All electrical devices used for this system shall be compatible with the fire alarm system, refer
to Division 26.
E. Seismic Requirement: All automatic sprinkler systems to be seismically braced.
1. Do not use NFPA Earthquake Zone Chart.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1.6 HYDRAULIC DESIGN
A. System shall be a straight line or gridded system per NFPA No. 13 with the following excep-
tions:
1. For all systems the design area shall be the hydraulically most demanding rectangular
area.
2. Minimum pressure for any sprinkler head shall not be less than 7 psi.
B. Light Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.10 GPM per square foot calculated for an area of 1500
square feet in the most remote location.
C. Ordinary Group I Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.15 GPM per square foot calculated for an
area of 1500 square feet in the most remote locations.
D. Ordinary Group II Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.20 GPM per square foot calculated for an
area of 1500 square feet in the most remote locations.
E. Extra Group I Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.30 GPM per square foot calculated for an area
of 2500 square feet in the most remote locations.
F. Head spacing shall not exceed the limits described in NFPA Pamphlet No. 13.
1. Light Hazard: 225 sq.ft. (for smooth ceiling).
2. Ordinary Hazard: 130 sq. ft.
3. Extra Hazard: 100 sq. ft.
G. Maximum floor areas protected by any one sprinkler system riser:
1. Light Hazard: 52,000 sq.ft.
2. Ordinary Hazard: 52,000 sq.ft.
3. Extra Hazard: 40,000 sq. ft.
H. Flow Data: Contractor is to verify flow data (static pressure, residual pressure and GPM flow-
ing) available at site and provide design for available pressure and flow.
1.7 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 09: Finishes.
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor for the fire protection installation shall be duly qualified Fire Protection Con-
tractor, experienced and regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems with a
license classification of C-16. Where local authorities require additional licensing of the Fire
Protection Contractor, and/or workmen, such a license shall be mandatory for a prospective
Contractor.
1. Contractor is to verify flow data (static pressure, residual pressure and GPM flowing)
available at site and provide design for available pressure and flow.
2. Permits - The Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain permits for the installation or con-
struction as required for approval and installation of the fire protection system. The Fire
Protection Contractor shall submit working plans to the authorities having jurisdiction to
obtain approval.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-4
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 01. Handle components carefully to pre-
vent damage, denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged components. Damaged compo-
nents shall be replaced with new components.
B. Store/protect products under provisions of Division 01. Store components in clean, dry place.
Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
1.3 GUARANTEE
A. Provide a one-year (12 months) guarantee under provisions of Division 01. The guarantee shall
include parts, shipping, labor, travel costs, living expenses, required fees, and any other associ-
ated cost or expense to repair or replace products or systems. The guarantee period is to begin
on the date of acceptance of the fire protection installation by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All products to be commercial grade, new and of the manufacturer's latest design model. Prod-
ucts manufacturers outside of North America will not be accepted without written approval
from engineer prior to submission of bid.
B. All products to be UL listed and/or FM approved, except for items, which are not required to be
listed by code.
C. All products shall be delivered and stored in original containers. Containers shall be clearly
marked or stamped with manufacturer's name and rating.
D. The following items to be included but specified under Section 15050: Basic Materials and
Methods.
1. Hangers and supports.
2. Escutcheons plates, flashings and sleeves.
3. Access panel and doors.
4. Identification markers and signs.
5. Expansion compensators and flexible connectors.
6. Anchors, and seismic restraints.
7.. Excavation and backfill.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS - ABOVE GROUND
A. General: The piping products listed below by manufacturer's name and model numbers are the
only acceptable materials listed for this project. Substitutions of pipe must be submitted and
approved in writing by the architect prior to bid. No copper pipe shall be allowed in the wet
fire sprinkler system.
B. Piping or fittings that show substantial rust or breaks in coating will be removed and replaced.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Allied Tube & Conduit: Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A-135 or ASTM A-795 stamped on
pipe, UV cured acrylic finish; Stockham, Grinnell or Warwick Class 150 threaded malleable,
ASTM A197, ASTM A126, or Victaulic roll -grooved fittings and couplings, only.
D. Plenum Rated CPVC pipe listed for fire protection use. Blazemaster.
E. Shop -weld thread -o -lets may be used in lieu of tee fittings, but field (site) welding will not be
permitted.
F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic grooved couplings style 07, 75 or 77, or equal by Gruvlok.
G. Mechanical Tees: Victaulic style 920, Gruvlok. U -bolt mechanical tees are not acceptable.
H. Flexible sprinkler connector for ductwork sprinlder application: Flexhead or equal Factory Mu-
tual approved system.
I. Use rigid couplings where flexibility is not required or provide necessary sway bracing.
J. Prohibited Piping and Fittings: Copper pipe, CPVC pipe, schedule 5, 10, 20, 30, Super 40,
"Dyna -Flow", "Dyna-Thead", "Fireflow", XL, Thinwall, "Eddylite" by Bullmoose and Thread -
able Lightwall pipe are not allowed. POZ-LOK, U -bolt Victaulic style 921 mechanical tees,
Victaulic style 99 Roust -A -Bout, Victaulic style 90 Plainlock, Hooker style fitting, quick dis-
connect, boltless, snap -joint, field drilling or welding of any main or branch lines, and any de-
vice specifically prohibited by the local authority having jurisdiction is not allowed. No unions
shall be permitted for any size pipe. Plain end fittings are not allowed.
2.3 RODS AND CLAMPS
A. Socket clamps shall be stainless steel; four bolt type, equipped with stainless steel socket clamp
washers and nuts Grinnell Fig. 595 and 594, Elcen Fig. 37 and 37X, or equal.
B. Rods shall be stainless steel, 3/4" diameter.
2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS - GENERAL
A. Sprinkler heads shall be regular automatic closed -type heads of ordinary degree temperature
rating except that sprinlder heads installed in the vicinity of heating equipment or in special oc-
cupancy areas shall be of the temperature rating as described in NFPA No. 13.
B. Provide quick response heads in all new light hazard occupancies. For existing sprinkler sys-
tems, response type to match existing type unless otherwise noted.
C. Provide corrosion -resistant sprinkler heads where they are exposed to weather, moisture or cor-
rosive vapors.
D. The Contractor shall furnish spare heads. The heads shall be packed in a suitable container and
shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating
head installed. In addition to the spare heads, the contractor shall furnish not less than two spe-
cial sprinkler head wrenches. Refer to NFPA 13 section; "Stock of Spare Heads".
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-6
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Provide 1" clearance with escutcheon around penetrations through suspended ceilings per
ASCE requirements.
2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Sprinkler heads installed shall be upright or pendent, as conditions require, and shall be of the
following type and finish for the areas designated. Unless otherwise specified, sprinklers shall
be small frame type, center bulb capsule for finished areas, fusible link for unfinished areas,
and 'A" orifice.
Building Area
Unfinished Retail, &
Office, Garage &
Mechanical Rooms
Electrical, Telephone
& Switchgear Rooms
Finished Ceilings
Soffit
Sidewall
Balconies
Sprinkler Escutcheon Temp.
Sprinkler Head Finish Finish Deg.
Upright/Pendant Brass None 165° F
Upright Brass None 286° F
Semi -recessed Pendant White White 165° F
Flush Sidewall White White 165°F
Horizontal Sidewall Brass None 165°F
Dry Sidewall Brass Chrome 155°F
B. Manufacturer: Reliable, Star or Viking.
2.6 VALVING
A. 2" or Smaller:
1.. Control Valve: OS&Y rising stem type gate valve bronze body, bonnet and disc, copper
alloy stem, threaded ends, 175 PSI WOG min. Provide with tamper switch.
2.. Check Valve: Swing check type with bronze body, cap and disc, threaded ends, 175 PSI
WOG min.
3. Drip Valve: 3/4", cast brass automatic ball drip type, threaded ends, 175 PSI WOG min.
4. Testing Valve: 1-1/4", test and drain, sight glass, 'A" test orifice, lever operated, 300 psi
WOG. Drain to mop sink or drain riser.
5. Main Drain Valve: 2", angle gate valve, bronze body, copper alloy stem, threaded ends,
175 psi WOG. Drain to mop sink or drain riser.
B. 2-1/2" or Larger:
1. Control Valve: Lug type wafer valve with tamper switch, ductile iron body, nickel plated
ductile iron disc, stainless steel stem and Buna-N seat, 175 PSI WOG min.
2. Control Valve: OS&Y rising stem type gate valve, cast iron body and bonnet, bronze
stem, seat and disc, flanged ends, 175 PSI WOG min. Provide with tamper switch.
3. Check Valve: Swing check type with cast iron body, bolted cap and disc, flanged ends,
175 PSI WOG min.
4. Manufacturer: Grinnell, Stockham, Milwaukee, Mueller, Kennedy, Elkart or AGF.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 43lumac
21 10 00-7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
PART 3 - EXECUTION
11 GENERAL
A. This system to be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of auto-
matic sprinkler system as specified by the requirements of the Specifications.
3.2 PERFORMANCE OF WORK
A. Examine areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed. Layout the system to
suit the different types of construction and equipment as indicated on the drawings and in ac-
cordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 13, 14, 20 and 24.
B. Work to start immediately after authorization has been given to proceed so that the overall pro-
gress of the construction is not delayed.
C. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to properly interface components of the sprinkler sys-
tem.
D. Follow manufacturer's directions and recommendations in all cases.
E. The omission from the drawings or Specifications of any details of construction, installation,
materials, or essential specialties shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing the same in
place for a complete system.
3.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide all temporary valving, piping, Siamese connections and other components as directed
by the fire agency office during all phases of construction.
3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Fire protection system shall be installed in accordance with the approved Drawings. The fin-
ished ceiling is not to be erected until all fire protection piping has been installed, tested, and
inspected. Sprinkler heads located in the electrical equipment, elevator, or similar rooms shall
be furnished with deflectors to prevent water spray on equipment.
B. The arrangement of all pipes shall conform to all architectural requirements and field condi-
tions, shall be as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with
building walls and other pipes, and shall be neatly spaced. Offsets will be permitted only where
required to permit the pipes to follow the walls. Standard fittings shall be used for offsets. All
risers shall be erected plumb and true, shall be parallel with the walls and other pipes, and shall
be neatly spaced. All work shall be coordinated with HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical and Struc-
tural work in order to avoid interference and unnecessary cutting of floors or walls. All under-
ground or concealed work shall be insepcted before the construction is closed up.
C. All sprinkler heads to be installed in ceilings throughout the scope of work building as listed in
Section 2.6. All areas without ceilings shall have rough brass upright or pendent heads as
shown on drawings.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-8
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
11 Sprinkler heads in all finished areas are to be installed on a true axis line in both directions,
with maximum deviation from the axis line of 1 inch plus or minus and shall be plus or minus
1" within center of tile. At the completion of the installation, if any heads are found to exceed
the above-mentioned tolerance, they shall be removed and reinstalled.
E. No pipes or other apparatus shall be installed so as to interfere in any way with full swing of
doors.
F. The arrangement, positions, and connections of pipes, drains, valves, etc., shall be as required
by NFPA Pamphlet #13 for all areas to be sprinklered. However, the right is reserved by the
Architect to change the location of any item to accommodate conditions, which may arise dur-
ing progress of the work, without additional compensation for such changes provided that no
additional heads are required prior to the installation of the work.
G. Where required, piping shall be installed concealed in building construction, or though steel
beams, to obtain adequate head room.
H. All pipe throughout the job shall be reamed smooth before being installed. Pipe shall not be
split, bent, flattened, or otherwise injured either before or during installation.
I. Provide protective pans under pipes passing over high voltage electrical bus duct or switchgear
equipment. The pan shall be constructed of 12 gauge black iron with a 6 inch lip, the corners
being welded to make the pans watertight. Each pan shall be given three coats of Rust-Oleum
paint and shall be supported by pipe hangers. The pan shall drain clear of the bus duct or
switchgear.
J. All pipe interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before installation, and shall be
kept clean during installation by plugging or other approved means. Piping shall be covered
with visqueen during storage. Piping that shows signs of rusting will be removed from job site
and replaced.
K. Field Connections: Any modifications to system required by field conditions, physical equip-
ment changes or compliance with code regulations shall be made promptly without cost to
Owner.
L. Interference: No piping or sprinkler devices shall interfere with the operations of any door,
window or mechanical and electrical systems. No part of this system shall visibly be installed
in the physical parameter of any window.
M. Threaded Pipe: Threads shall be clean cut, standard and tapered. Threads shall be made up us-
ing flaked graphite and lubricating oil, piping compound or Teflon tape applied to the male
threads only.
N. Grooved Pipe: Installation shall be as prescribed in the Victaulic Piping Manual only. Holes in
the piping are to be made in the fabrication shop, not at the job site. Contractor shall provide at
the project site a sample of each type of coupling (threaded, standard grooved coupling and me-
chanical type), showing complete assembly with pipe connections.
O. Keep all pipe and other openings closed to prevent entry of foreign matter. Cover all equip-
ment and apparatus to protect against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage, before and
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
during construction period. Restore to original condition all apparatus and equipment damaged
prior to fmal acceptance, including restoration of damaged shop coats of paint.
P. Location of sprinkler piping is critical.
1. Where ceiling space is at a minimum under beams location of ductwork takes prece-
dence, coordinate accordingly.
2. Include in base bid (3) two-hour coordination meetings with Owner, Architect, and Engi-
neer for coordination of sprinkler pipe routing.
3. Coordinate beam and shear wall penetrations with Structural Engineer. Obtain written
approval for all beam penetrations from Structural Engineer.
3.5 SLEEVES AND FLASHINGS
A. Wherever pipes are exposed and pass through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings, they shall be
fitted with chromium plated steel escutcheons held in place with setscrews. Care shall be taken
to protect the escutcheons during the course of construction.
B. Penetrations through fire rated walls and floors shall be sealed with listed mastic of similar fire
rating.
3.6 HANGERS, INSERTS, SUPPORTS, AND SWAY BRACING
A. Hangers and supports shall be installed per NFPA #13 sections on Hangers and Protection of
Piping Against Damage Where Subject to Earthquake. Provide restraint from movement at end
sprinkler on branch line per NFPA 13.
B. Bending of threaded hanger rod is not allowed. All powder driven anchor pins in concrete are
not allowed.
3.7 SAFETY TESTING & VERIFICATION
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems according to NFPA 13 Chapter "System Ac-
ceptance."
B. Provide NFPA 13 Contractor's Material & Test Certificate Form 85A for above ground piping.
C. Provide manpower to test the function and performance of all Life Safety System components
and devices per floor and per zone basis in accordance with the local requirements.
3.8 AS -BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS AND CERTIFICATION
A. As -built Record Drawings are to be kept up-to-date and the Master Copy kept at the job site.
Prior to final acceptance of work being approved, these drawings are to be turned over to the
Owner's Representative for approval.
B. Written certification from the insuring agents, and authorities having jurisdiction that the tests
were satisfactory.
C. After installation is complete and tests satisfactorily approved, deliver test certificates and ap-
proval by the local Fire Authorities and the FMA to the architect. Final acceptance of sprin-
kler/standpipe system by Owner's Representative shall be contingent upon receipt of certificate
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-10
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
and approval from authorities having jurisdiction and for the delivery of final As -Built Draw-
ings.
END OF SECTION 21 10 00
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 10 00-11
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GENCD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 220500 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions,
Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and
shall include all Mechanical Sections specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE OF THIS SECTION
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1.. Compliance with all codes and standards applicable to this jurisdiction.
2. Shop Drawings for Equipment
3. Coordination Documents
4. Record Drawings
5. Start-up Service and Building Commissioning
6. Instruction, Maintenance, and 0 & M Manuals
7. Work associated with Delivery, Storage, and Handling of products
8. Work associated with provision of Temporary Facilities
9. Preparation of Posted Operating Instructions
10. Meeting Project Safety and Indemnity requirements
11. Proper Cleaning and Closing
12. Supplying proper Warranty information
13. Supply specified Guarantee documentation
14. Design and provision of Supports and Anchors
15. Design and provision of Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation
16. Pipe Portals
17. Roof Curbs
18. Equipment Rails •
19. Access Panels and Doors
20. Identification Markers
21'. Coordination of Electrical requirements for equipment provided
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Contract Documents, including Specifications and Construction Drawings, are intended to
provide all material and labor to install complete plumbing systems for the building and shall
interface with all existing building systems affected by new construction.
B. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior details, floor plans, elevations, and the
structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other
trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of
the fixtures, equipment, and pipe lines and are not to be scaled; all dimensions and existing
conditions shall be checked at the building.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. The Contractor shall comply with the project closeout requirements as detailed in General
Requirements of Division 01.
D. Where project involves interface with existing building and site systems, every effort has been
made to note existing utilities and services. However, the Contractor should thoroughly
familiarize themselves with existing conditions and be aware that in some cases information is
not available as to concealed conditions, which exist in portions of the existing building affected
by this work.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.
2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.
B. Drawings:
1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to
equipment and methods of installation.
2. Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions.
3. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of
equipment and structure.
4. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested, in order to resolve space problems,
preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of
other trades.
5. Where existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts prevent installation of new work as
indicated, relocate, or arrange for relocation, of existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts.
Verify exact location and elevation of existing piping prior to any construction.
6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to
Architect or Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible, including
during bidding period.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. "Above Grade": Not buried in the ground and not embedded in concrete slab on ground.
B. "Actuating" or "Control" Devices: Automatic sensing and switching devices such as
thermostats, pressure, float, electro -pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling operation of
equipment.
C. "Below Grade": Buried in the ground or embedded in concrete slab on ground.
D. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within
double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in enclosures. In general, any
item not visible or directly accessible.
E. "Connect": Complete hook-up of item with required service.
F. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed."
G. "Furnish": To supply equipment and products as specified.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 2
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
H. "Indicated," "Shown" or " "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on Drawings or
Specifications.
I. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
J. "Motor Controllers": Manual or magnetic starters (with or without switches), individual push
buttons or hand -off -automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
K. "Piping": Pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, strainers, hangers, supports, unions,
traps, drains, insulation, and related items.
L. "]Provide": To supply, install and connect as specified for a complete, safe and operationally
ready system.
M. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory" or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, or directed by or to
Architect/Engineer/Owner.
N. "Rough -In": Provide all indicated services in the necessary arrangement suitable for making
final connections to fixture or equipment.
O. "Shall": An exhortation or command to complete the specified task.
P. "Similar" or "Equal": Of base bid manufacture, equal in materials, weight, size, design, and
efficiency of specified products.
Q. "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
R. "Typical" or "Typ": Exhibiting the qualities, traits, or characteristics that identify a kind, class,
number, group or category. Of or relating to a representative specimen. Application shall apply
to all other similarly identified on plan or detail.
S. "Will": A desire to complete the specified task. Allows some flexibility in application as
opposed to "Shall."
T. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
U. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items required
for proper and complete installation.
1.6 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All Division 22 Plumbing sections included herein.
B. Division 02: Existing Conditions. Coordinate with Civil Engineer.
1. Coordination of excavation of trenches and the installation of mechanical systems and
piping on site.
C. Division 03: Concrete.
1. All concrete work for Plumbing Division shall be included in Division 22 under the
appropriate Sections and shall include:
a. Concrete curbs and housekeeping pads for the mechanical equipment.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
b. Thrust blocks, pads, and boxes for mechanical equipment.
c. Coordination of floor drain and floor sink installations in sloped floors.
D. Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection.
1. Flashing and sheet metal.
2. Sealants and caulking.
3. Firestopping.
E. Division 09: Finishes:
1. Division 22 installers shall perform all painting, except where specifically stated
otherwise in Division 09.
2. Painting of all exposed steel, piping, equipment, and materials.
3. Paint all exposed gas piping, interior and exterior to the building, yellow.
F. Division 26: Electrical is related to work of:
1. Power connections to all plumbing equipment.
2. Life safety provisions.
1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements not explicitly detailed in these specifications
or drawings, but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the project,
must be provided as part of the contract.
B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 22 Sections.
Provide written reports on all tests.
C. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be
UL listed and labeled.
D. All plumbing and mechanical work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA).
E. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all
owners of underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10 business
days, before commencing an excavation.
F. Provide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following:
1. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Washington:
a. 2003 International Building Code (IBC) with State Amendments.
b. 2003 International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State Amendments.
c. 2003 Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State Amendments.
d. 2002 National Fuel Gas Code (NFGC) NFPA 54, WAC 51-52
e. 2002 National Electrical Code (NEC)
f. 2005 Washington State Energy Code, (WAC 51-11, WSEC)
g. Washington State Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality Code, WA 51-13 (VIAQ).
2. Local, city, county and state codes and ordinances.
3. Local Bureau of Buildings.
4. Local Health Department.
5. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts.
6. Washington Administrative Codes.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 4
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following:
1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
2. CSA - Canadian Standards Association.
3. ADC - Air Diffuser Council.
4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
5. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning Engineers.
6. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
7. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
8. AWS - American Welding Society.
9. AWWA - American Water Works Association.
10. FM - Factory Mutual.
11. MSS - Manufacturer's Standardization Society.
12. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association.
13. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
14. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories.
1.5. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.
16. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories.
17. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineers.
18. PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute.
19. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.
20. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum or Type 304
stainless steel sheet, not less than 20 USG (0.0375"), riveted or bolted to the manufactured item,
with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non -erasable record of equipment data.
B. Current Models. All work shall be as follows:
1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer.
2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA.
C. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 22,
manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation or
repair, on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project.
1.9 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all existing conditions at building site.
B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided.
C. Provide and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections.
D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final
location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that
require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access
doors required for mechanical access.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 02 through
48 for rough -in requirements.
F. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components.
G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
H. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical
installations.
I. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured -in-
place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
J. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing -in the building.
K. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of
mechanical equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching
required for installation of his work unless otherwise noted.
L. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install plumbing services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
M. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, without interference with other
installations.
N. Coordinate the installation of plumbing materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork,
piping, conduits, suspension system, light fixtures, cable trays, sprinkler piping and heads, and
other installations.
O. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
P. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule shutdown of existing systems to make new
connections. Provide valves in new piping to allow existing system to be put back in service
with minimum down time.
Q.
All materials (such as insulation, piping, wiring, controls, etc.) located within air plenum
spaces, air shafts, and occupied spaces shall have a flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -
developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) Method. In addition, the
products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive.
Provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing, or satisfactory certified test report from
an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do
not exceed those specified.
R. Coordinate installation of floor drains and floor sinks with work of other trades, such that
finished floor slopes to drains and floor sinks are flush with surrounding floor.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 6
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
S. Products made of or containing lead, asbestos, mercury or other known toxic or hazardous
materials are not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as
part of the work of the Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and
replacement shall be borne solely by the installing Contractor.
1.10 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangements of all plumbing work and
requirements to be performed. It is not intended to show or indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories which will be required as a part of the work of this Section.
B. The Contractor shall review the structural and architectural conditions affecting his work. It is
the specific intention of this section that the contractor's scope of work shall include
1. Proper code complying support systems for all equipment whether or not scheduled or
detailed on drawings or in these specifications
2. Minor deviations from the mechanical plans required by architectural and structural
coordination.
C. The Contractor shall study the operational requirements of each system, and shall arrange his
work accordingly, and shall furnish such fittings, offsets, supports, accessories, as are required
for the proper and efficient installation of all systems from the physical space available for use
by this section. This requirement extends to the Contractor's coordination of this section's work
with the "Electrical Work." Should conflicts occur due to lack of coordination, the time delay,
cost of rectification, demolition, labor and materials, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall
not be at a cost to the Owner.
D. Minor deviations in order to avoid conflict shall be permitted where the design intent is not
altered.
E. Advise the Architect, in writing, in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of
equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly
coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict.
1.11 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products
other than those scheduled or shown on the drawings as a basis of design:
1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design,
detailing, structural supports, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution.
3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed
substitute.
B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are
equivalent or superior to specified item.
C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in
the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500-7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for review all materials and equipment in accordance with Division
01 requirements.
B. After approval of preliminary list of materials, the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's Certified Drawings to the Architect for approval.
C. The Contractor shall submit approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's equipment cuts, of all
equipment requiring connection by Division 26, to the Electrical Contractor for final
coordination of electrical requirements. Contractor shall bear all additional costs for failure to
coordinate with Division 26.
D. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a complete package bound in a 3 -ring
binder with tabs for each specification section. The approved submittals shall be converted into
Operations & Maintenance Manuals at the completion of the project. Submit six (6) typed
copies of submittals. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.13 UNIT PRICING SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for review all materials and equipment in accordance with Division
01 requirements.
B. Preliminary List of Materials and Unit Price Items: Within thirty (30) days after awarding of
the Contract, submit to architect for preliminary approval a complete list of manufacturer's
names and model numbers of proposed materials and equipment. Also include proposed list of
unit price items for review.
1. Indicate substituted items.
2. Identify test and balancing agency.
3. Identify independent testing laboratory for water analysis.
C. The Contractor shall submit with preliminary list of materials a unit price list for each item
furnished on this project. Included with price shall be labor cost index.
D. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a complete package bound in a 3 -ring
binder with tabs for each specification section. Submit six (6) typed copies of submittals. Refer
to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.14 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractors shall prepare coordinated Shop Drawings to coordinate the installation and
location of all equipment, piping and all system appurtenances with other trades. The Drawings
shall include all mechanical rooms and floor plans. The Drawings shall be Overlay Drawings
showing each discipline on a single sheet. The Drawings shall be keyed to the structural
column identification system, and shall be progressively numbered. Prior to completion of the
Drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architect and the
structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection,
Electrical, Ceiling Suspension, and Tile Systems), and provide reasonable maintenance access
requirements. When conflicts are identified, modify system layout as necessary to resolve. Do
not fabricate, order or install any equipment or materials until coordination documents are
approved by the General Contractor, Architect, and Owner. Within thirty (30) days after award
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 8
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
of Contract, submit proposed coordination document Shop Drawing schedule, allowing
adequate time for review and approval by parties mentioned above. Drawings should be
prepared and submitted for approval on a floor -by -floor basis to phase with building
construction.
B. The Drawings shall be prepared as follows:
1. The Sheet Metal (Mechanical) Contractor shall prepare Drawings to an accurate scale of
1/4" = 1'-0" or larger, on reproducible media sheets (vellum) or AutoCAD disks. Obtain
reproducibles or AutoCAD files of the HVAC design from the Architect, or Engineer, at
cost plus. Drawings are to be same size as Contract Drawings and shall indicate location,
size and elevation above finished floor, of all HVAC equipment, ductwork, and piping.
Plans shall also indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout, as shown on electrical
plans and reflected ceiling plans.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall obtain reproducible plans or AutoCAD disks from the
Mechanical Contractor, and indicate all plumbing lines including fittings, hangers, access
panels, valves, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor.
1 The Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain reproducible plans or AutoCAD disks with
the detailed mechanical and plumbing work shown. The Sprinkler Contractor shall
indicate location of all sprinkler heads and piping, including valves and fittings,
dimensions from column lines, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor.
4.. Plans are to incorporate all addenda items and change orders.
5. Distribute plans to all trades and provide additional coordination as needed.
C. Advise the Architect in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment.
Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly coordinate the
installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict.
D. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material,
equipment and apparatus, and advise the Architect of any discrepancies between those indicated
on the Drawings and those existing in the field prior to any installation related thereto.
E. Final Coordination Drawings with all appropriate information added are to be submitted as
Record Drawings at completion of project.
F. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for their use when doing
their work.
1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing installation, obtain an extra set of prints from Architect, marked "Record."
Keep this set of Drawings at the job site at all times, and use it for no other purpose but to mark
on it all the changes and revisions to the Contract Drawings resulting from coordination with
other trades. At the completion of the project, edit project AutoCAD files to incorporate all site
marlcups, changes, and revisions to the Contract Drawings. Submit plots of Record Drawings
and six copies CD Roms labeled with all record AutoCAD drawing files.
B. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for use when doing his
work.
C. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location both exterior and interior;
including locations of control devices, valves, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and
locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and
branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed
unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e. — valves, traps, strainers,
expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.
D. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and
materials used.
E. Refer also to Special Conditions in Division 01 for full scope of requirements.
1.16 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING
A. Prior to start-up, be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper
equipment rotation, proper wiring, auxiliary connections, lubrication, venting, controls, and
installed and properly set relief and safety valves.
B. Provide services of factory -trained technicians for start-up of temperature controls, boilers,
pumps, and other major pieces of equipment. Certify in writing compliance with this
Paragraph, stating names of personnel involved and the date work was performed.
C. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for additional requirements.
1.17 INSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE, AND O&M MANUALS
A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect
complete set of operating instructions, maintenance instructions, part lists, and all other
bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and maintenance for equipment furnished and
installed as specified in this section, bound in a durable binder. Refer to Division 01.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper instruction of Owner's personnel for operation
and maintenance of equipment, and apparatus installed as specified in Division 22 to be no less
than 2 hours for each piece of equipment.
1.18 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately
packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site, unless off-site
storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping
shall be stored in bundles covered with visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be
removed from site and replaced.
C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site
congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed
for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
1.19 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 10
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Refer to Division 01 for the requirements of temporary water and sewer for construction and
safety. Provide temporary water, and sewer, etc. services as necessary during the construction
period and as required to maintain operation of existing systems.
1.20 F'OSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical
sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring
diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic.
Post instructions where directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each
principal system and equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and
procedure in the event of equipment failure. Provide weather -resistant materials or
weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating
instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy
removal.
1.21 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY
A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site
including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement
will apply continuously and not be limited to normal hours of work.
B. No act, service, Drawing, review, or Construction Review by the Owner, Architect, the
Engineers or their consultants, is intended to include the review of the adequacy of the
Contractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site.
C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless,
indemnify and defend the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers and their consultants, and each of
their officers, employees and agents from any and all liability claim, losses or damage arising,
or alleged to arise from bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons, and for all
damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of,
or in connection with, the performance of the work under the Division of the Specifications, and
from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of the work described in the Construction
Contract Documents; but not including the sole negligence of the Owner, the Architect, the
Engineers, and their consultants or their officers, employees and agents.
1.22 CLEANING AND CLOSING
A. All work shall be inspected, tested, and approved before being concealed or placed in operation.
B. Upon completion of the work, all equipment installed as specified in this section, and all areas
where work was performed, shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the
Architect.
1.23 WARRANTIES
A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor.
Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty
requirements.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Provide complete warranty information for each item, to include product or equipment, date of
beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone
numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
C. Service during warranty period: Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere
during the 12 -month warranty period.
1.24 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented
by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which
may become defective within the period of one (1) year after the Date of Final Acceptance,
ordinary wear and tear excepted.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects
in his work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless
specifically noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be identified by the
manufacturer's name, nameplate, and pertinent data.
B. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise.
The words "or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers'
names used herein, unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed.
2.2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of
supports and anchors, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. UL Compliance: Provide products which are UL listed.
2. MSS Standard Compliance: Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS).
3. SMACNA: "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
4. Provide copper plated or plastic coated supports and attachment for copper piping
systems. Field applied coatings or tape is unacceptable.
5. Manufacturer: B -Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Tolco, Kin -Line or Superstrut.
B. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
factory -fabricated hangers and supports of one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.
2. Adjustable Steel Swivel Band Hangers: MSS Type 10.
3. U -Bolts: MSS Type 24.
4. Pipe Slides and Slide Plates: MSS Type 35, including one of the following plate types:
a. Plate: Unguided type.
b. Plate: Guided type.
c. Plate: Hold-down clamp type.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 12
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base support and cast iron
floor flange.
6. Pipe Saddle Supports with U -Bolt: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and
cast iron floor flange.
7. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38, including steel pipe base support and
cast iron floor flange.
8. Single Pipe Roller with Malleable Sockets: MSS Type 41.
9. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43.
10. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44.
11. Pipe Guides: Provide factory -fabricated guides of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated
steel, consisting of a bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with a two -section
guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if
any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow
indicated travel.
C. Horizontal Cushioned Pipe Clamp: Where pipe hangers are called out to absorb vibration or
shock install a. piping clamp with thermoplastic elastomer insert. Cush -A -Clamp or equal.
D. Vertical Piping Clamps: Provide factory -fabricated two -bolt vertical piping riser clamps, MSS
Type 8.
E. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated hanger -rod
attachments of one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
2. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
4. Malleable Iron Eye Sockets: MSS Type 16.
5, Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
F. Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated building
attachments of one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18.
2. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading:
a. Light Duty: MSS Type 31.
b. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32.
c. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33.
3. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58.
4. Anchor Bolts: Heavy duty, drilled -in concrete expansion wedge anchor bolts, Hilti or
Red Head.
G. Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping
hangers and supports, factory -fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for
exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.
1. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of
insulation matching adjoining insulation.
2. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40, 18" minimum, or of the length
recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. High-density insulation
insert lengths shall match or exceed shield length.
3. ' Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360° insert of waterproofed calcium silicate (60
psi flexural strength minimum) encased in 360° sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 13
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
same thickness as adjoining insulation. Shield length shall match or exceed length of
calcium silicate insert.
4. Thermal Hanger Couplings: Constructed of high strength plastic coupling to retain
tubing and join insulation at clevis hangers and strut -mounted clamps. Klo-Shure
Insulation Coupling or equal.
H. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1.
2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36.
3. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C 150, Type 1 or Type III) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0
parts sand by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and
hydration.
4. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required.
Weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.
5. Pipe Brackets: "HoldRite" copper plated brackets. Insulate brackets attached to metal
studs with felt.
2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINTNIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment, piping, ductwork and all system appurtenances (including weight of normal
operating contents) shall be adequately restrained to resist seismic forces. Restraint devices
shall be designed and selected to meet seismic requirements as defined in Chapter 16 of the
latest edition of the IBC, with State Amendments, and applicable local codes in accordance with
Seismic Zone E and the applicable Importance Factors and Soil Factors.
B. All anchorages and/or seismic restraints shall be designed by a registered professional Civil or
Structural Engineer licensed in the state of the project. Design shall include:
I . Number, size and location of anchors for floor or roof -mounted equipment. For curb
mounted equipment, provide design of attachment of both the unit to the curb and the
curb to the structure.
2. Number, size and location of vibration isolators, seismic restraint devices and their
anchorage for vibration -isolated and suspended equipment.
3. Number, size and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and ductwork on
shop drawings.
a. The contractor must select a single seismic restraint system pre -designed to meet the
requirements of the current version of the IBC, with State Amendments.
b. Installations not addressed by the selected system must be designed, detailed and
submitted along with the shop drawings.
c. Maximum seismic loads shall be indicated on drawings at each brace location.
d. Drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the registered professional engineer
licensed in the state of the project who designed the layout of the braces.
4. Manufacturers: Mason, M.W. Sausse, Kinetics or approved equal.
C. Isolated Equipment:
1. Spring type isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable and complete with 1/4"
neoprene acoustical friction pads or neoprene cup between the spring and the base plate.
All mountings shall have leveling bolts. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel
to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters,
deflections compressed spring height and solid spring height. A steel housing shall be
included to resist motion due to earthquake loads. A minimum clearance of shall be
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 14
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to
interfere with the spring action. The housing shall be out of contact during normal
operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Manufacturer:
Mason Industries #SLR series or approved equal.
2. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and
complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pad between
the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be
rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional
travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Manufacturer: Mason Industries
#SLF series or approved equal.
3. Spring hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4" thick
neoprene elements at the top and steel springs that are free standing and laterally stable
seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup at the bottom. Spring diameters shall be
no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. The neoprene
element and the cup shall have a neoprene bushing projecting through the steel box.
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the
hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing
and short circuiting the spring. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #30N or approved equal.
4. All -directional seismic snubber restraints shall consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by a one-piece molded bushing or bridge bearing neoprene. A minimum air
gap of 1/4" shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is
made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end shall be removable to allow
inspection of internal clearances. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #Z-1225.
5. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases designed to
prevent excessive base flexure at start up, prevent misalignment of equipment and
provide attachment points for seismic restraints. Bases shall be rectangular in shape and
constructed of welded wide flange structural steel main members with cross bracing
located at or near each restraint location. Where height saving brackets are required, they
shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" clearance below the base.
Manufacturer: Mason Industries #WF.
6. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms
for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to
provide for suction and discharge elbows and shall be 6"deep for pumps thru 75 HP and
10" deep for pumps 100 HP thru 250HP. Forms shall include minimum concrete
reinforcing consisting of #4 bars welded in place on 6" centers running both ways in a
layer 1-1/2" above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the
anchor bolts sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets
shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" clearance below the base.
Manufacturer: Mason Industries #BMK or K.
7. Suspended isolated equipment and vessels shall be protected with cable restraints.
Cables shall be installed to prevent excessive seismic motion and so arranged that they do
not engage during normal operation, starting or stopping. Seismic sway braces shall
consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables. Cables braces shall be designed to resist
seismic tension loads with a minimum safety factor of 2. Brace end connections shall be
steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle. Steel angles or struts, when
required, shall be clamped to the threaded hanger rods at the seismic sway brace locations
utilizing a minimum of two ductile iron clamps. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #SCB,
SRC and UC.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 ,Glumac
220500 - 15
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
8. Flexible spherical expansion joints shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers,
liners and Kevlar tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised
face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2"
and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain
shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar
interlocks. Sizes 16" to 24" may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4" to 1 1/2" may have threaded
bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14" and smaller connectors shall
be rated at 250 psi up to 190F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at
250F. 16" and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190F and 135 psi at 250F. Safety
factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have
permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure.
Concentric reducers to the above specifications may be substituted for equal ended
expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of
the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping
locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure
requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If
control rods are used, they must have 1/2" thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough
in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall
be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two
test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in
vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage
frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints
shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Manufacturer: Mason
Industries #SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR, SFU and CR.
9. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes
3" and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Hoses must have
sufficient length to accept 1/2" intermittent motion without failure. Hoses shall be
installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the
equipment shafts wherever possible. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #BSS.
D. Rigidly Mounted Equipment: Floor mounted equipment weighing over 400 lbs. and suspended
equipment and vessels of any weight shall be protected by properly sized anchor bolts or hanger
rods and bracing and, if required, by additional seismic restraints as described above for isolated
equipment.
E. All non -isolated piping and ductwork shall be protected in accordance with the SMACNA
Guidelines. At the Contractor's option, for ease of installation, cable restraint system may be
used. Installations not addressed in the SMACNA Guidelines shall be designed by a registered
professional engineer who designed the seismic bracing for the suspended piping and ductwork.
F. Isolator Types: Where equipment isolators are not provided by other sections of the
specification or shown on Drawings, provide factory fabricated isolator types sized by the
manufacturer for the appropriate loading. Model numbers of Mason Industries products are
listed below. Products of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with all
of the requirements of this specification and the Drawings. Manufacturers: Mason Industries,
M.W. Sausse, Kinetics or approved equal.
1. Floor Mounted Pumps: 2" free-standing type housed single coil spring with separate
seismic snubbers. Mount on concrete filled inertia base with weight not less than that
equaling the equipment weight. Mason Industries #BMK base with #SLF springs and
#Z-1225 snubbers.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 16
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Submittals:
1. Confirmation of responsible design party (Shop Drawings received without this
information will be rejected without review. Architect will be informed of potential
delay of project.)
a. The seismic manufacturer's representative or engineer responsible for preparing the
specified seismic submittal package shall send the following documentation of
qualification:
1) The name and professional engineer's license number of the structural engineer
who will be responsible for preparing, designing, and stamping the seismic shop
drawing information.
2. Shop Drawings submittal
a. Stamped seismic restraint calculations.
b. The type, size and deflection of each isolator proposed.
c. Details for all the isolators with snubbers proposed and seismic bracing.
d. Details for steel frames to be used in conjunction with the isolation and seismic
restraint of the items.
e. Clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators, seismic
restraints and snubbers.
2.4 PIPE PORTALS
A. Where pipe portals are not provided by other sections of Specification, provide prefabricated
insulated pipe portals as required for piping penetrating through the roof where shown on plans.
Field built pipe portals are acceptable alternatives - provide detail of construction for review.
B. Standard pipe portals, unless otherwise noted, shall be constructed as follows:
1. Curb shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welds on shell
seams.
2. Insulation to be 1-'/z" thick, 3 lb density rigid fiberglass.
3. Curb to have a raised 3" (minimum), 45° cant.
4.. Curb to have 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" wood nailer (minimum).
5.. Curb height to be 8" (minimum) above roof deck.
6. Cant shall be raised to match roof insulation thickness.
7. Cover or flashing to be constructed of galvanized steel or other suitable material to
provide sturdy weather tight closure. Provide collars and rubber nipples with draw bands
of sizes required by piping. Size curb, cover and nipples per manufacturer's
recommendations.
8. Manufacturer: Roof Products Systems or Pate.
2.5 EQUIPMENT/PIPING RAILS
A. Where equipment/pipe rails are not provided by other sections of Specification, provide
prefabricated reinforced equipment rails as required for support of equipment and piping. Field
built curbs are acceptable alternatives - provide detail of construction for review.
B. Standard equipment rail, unless otherwise noted, shall be constructed as follows:
1. Construct of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welds on shell seams.
2. Provide internal reinforcing supports welded as required to meet application
requirements.
3. Equipment rails to have raised 3" (minimum), 45° cant.
4. Equipment rails to have 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" wood nailer (minimum) and counterflashing.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 17
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Equipment rail height to be 6" (minimum) above roof deck.
6. Cant shall be raised to match roof insulation thickness.
C. Equipment rails to be constructed to meet equipment size and weight requirements. Provide
tapered rails to match roof pitch where required.
D. Manufacturer: Pate, Vent Products, Thy Curb or Roof Products Systems.
2.6 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide all access doors and panels to serve equipment under this work, including those which
must be installed, in fmished architectural surfaces. Frame of 16 -gauge steel, door of 20 gauge
steel. 1" flange width, continuous piano hinge, key operated, prime coated. Refer to
Architectural Specifications for the required product Specification for each surface. Contractor
is to submit schedule of access panels for approval. Exact size, number and location of access
panels is not shown on Plans. Access doors shall be of a size to permit removal of equipment
for servicing. Access door shall have same rating as the wall or ceiling in which it is mounted.
Provide access panel for each trap primer or concealed valve. Use no panel smaller than 12" x
12" for simple manual access, or smaller than 24" x 24" where personnel must pass through.
Provide cylinder lock for access door serving mixing or critical valves in public areas.
B. Included under this work is the responsibility for verifying the exact location and type of each
access panel or door required to serve equipment under this work and in the proper sequence to
keep in tune with construction and with prior approval of the Architect. Access doors in fire
rated partitions and ceilings shall carry all label ratings as required to maintain the rating of the
rated assembly.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor, Karp, Nystrom, or Elmdor/Stoneman.
D. Submit markup of architectural plans showing size and location of access panels required for
equipment access for approval by Architect.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. Mechanical Identification Materials: Provide products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 22 Sections. Where more than single type is
specified for application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each
product category. Stencils are not acceptable.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers:
1. Snap-On Type: Provide pre-printed, semi-rigid snap -on, color coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI A13.1.
2. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure
sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. Secure both ends of markers
with color coded adhesive vinyl tape.
3. Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F
(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
4. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit
of plastic.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING 220500 - 18
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Ovoner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Underground -Type Plastic Line Markers: Provide 6" wide x 4 mils thick multi -ply tape,
consisting of solid metallic foil core between 2 layers of plastic tape. Markers to be permanent,
bright colored, continuous printed, intended for direct burial service.
D. Valve Tags:
1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 1 1/2" diameter 1 9 -gauge polished brass valve tags with
stamp -engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve
numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Fill tag engraving with black
enamel.
2. Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide 3/32" thick engraved plastic laminate valve tags,
with piping system abbreviations in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2"
high, and with 5/32" hole for fasteners.
3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass
S -hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured
specifically for that purpose.
4. Access Panel Markers: Provide 1/16" thick engraved plastic laminate access panel
markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include 1/8"
center hole to allow attachment.
5. Non -potable Water Tags: 1/16" thick, engraved, plastic tags as indicated on Drawings.
E. Plastic Equipment Signs:
1. Provide 4-1/2" x 6" plastic laminate sign, ANSI A.13 color coded with engraved white
core lettering.
2. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive
where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
3. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as
possible:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters, such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm,
etc.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Craftmark, Seton, Brady, or Brimar.
2.8 ELECTRICAL
A. General:
1. All electrical material, equipment, and apparatus specified herein shall conform to the
requirements of Division 26.
2. Provide all motors for equipment specified herein. Provide motor starters, controllers,
and other electrical apparatus and wiring which are required for the operation of the
equipment specified herein.
3. Set and align all motors and drives in equipment specified herein.
4. Provide expanded metal or solid sheet metal guards on all V -belt drives to totally enclose
the drive on all sides. Provide holes for tachometer readings. Support guards separately
from rotating equipment.
5. Provide for all rotating shafts, couplings, etc., a solid sheet metal, inverted "U" cover
over the entire length of the exposed shaft and support separately from rotating
equipment. Cover shall extend to below the bottom of the shaft and coupling, and shall
meet the requirements of the State Industrial Safety Regulations.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING 220500 - 19
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
6. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for
mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL listed/labeled as suitable for
location and use - no exceptions.
C. Motors:
1. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors,
more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment
Specifications.
2. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads.
3. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to
operate in the service factor range. Unless otherwise noted on plans, all motors '/2 HP or
larger shall be rated for 208 or 460 volt, 3-phase, operation. Unless otherwise noted on
plans, all motors less than 1/2 HP shall be rated for 120 volt, single phase operation.
4. Temperature Rating: Motor meets class B rise with class F insulation.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly -phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.
6. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design
"B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.
a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 56; use driven equipment manufacturer's
standards to suit specific application.
b. VFD driven motors. To be provided rated for inverter duty (NEMA Standard MG -1,
Part 31) and equipped with a shaft grounding device or as an insulated bearing motor.
c. Bearings:
1) Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2) Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible
for regular maintenance.
3) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives product lateral
or axial thrust in motor.
4) For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted.
5) Enclosure Type:
a) Open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or
remotely located during operation.
b) Guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.
c) Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed.
d. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection where external overload
protection is not provided and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for
signaling and stopping motor at starter.
e. Noise Rating: "Quiet."
f. Efficiency: Motors shall have a minimum efficiency per governing State or Federal
codes, whichever is higher.
g. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, special features and similar information.
D. Starters and Electrical Devices:
1. Motor Starter Characteristics:
a. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet
locations shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs.
b. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING 220500 - 20
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.
2. Manual switches shall have pilot lights and all required switch positions for multi -speed
motors. Overload Protection: Melting alloy or bi-metallic type thermal overload relays,
sized according to actual operating current (field measured).
3. Magnetic Starters:
a. Heavy duty, oil resistant, hand -off -auto (HOA), or as indicated, and pilot lights,
properly arranged for single speed or multi -speed operation as indicated.
b. Trip -free thermal overload relays, each phase, sized according to actual operating
current (field measured).
c. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with
control requirements of Division 23 Controls sections.
d. Built-in primary and secondary fused control circuit transformer, supplied from load
side of equipment disconnect.
e. Externally operated manual reset.
f. Under -voltage release or protection for all motors over 20 hp.
4. Motor Connections: Liquid tight, flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords
are specifically indicated.
E. Low Voltage Control Wiring:
1. General: 14 gauge, Type THHN, color coded, installed in conduit.
2. Manufacturer: General Cable Corp., Alcan Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp.,
Senator Wire and Cable Co., or Southwire Co.
F. Disconnect Switches:
1. Fusible Switches: For equipment 1/2 HP or larger, provide fused, each phase; heavy
duty; horsepower rated; spring loaded quick -make, quick -break mechanism; dead front
line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring
reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating
lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN" position; arc quenchers; capacity and
characteristics as indicated.
2.. Non -Fusible Switches: For equipment less than 1/2 horsepower, switch shall be
horsepower rated; toggle switch type with thermal overload quantity of poles and voltage
rating as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master mechanics and shall result
in an installation consistent with the best practices of trades.
B. Install work uniform, level and plumb, in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any
diagonal, or otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by
Architect.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of
articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or
covered in these Specifications.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 21
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the work between the various Plumbing Sections and with the work specified under
other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or
failure to make proper and timely provisions, the alternations shall be made to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and at the Contractor's cost.
B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or
defected materials.
3.4 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
A. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors, and associated work, installer shall meet at
project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and
testing agency representatives, (if any), installers of other work with requirements specified.
B. Installation of Building Attachments: Install building attachments at required locations within
concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Install additional building attachments
where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed. Fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength
less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through opening at top of inserts.
C. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports, and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including, but not limited to, proper placement of inserts, anchors, and other
building structural attachments.
D. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on
trapeze type hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together
by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for
smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not
support piping from other piping.
E. Install hangers within 12 inches of every change in piping direction, end of pipe run or
concentrated load, and within 36 inches of every major piece of equipment. Hangers shall be
installed on both sides of flexible connections. Where flexible connection connects directly to a
piece of equipment only one hanger is required.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install
hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
G. Support gas independently of other piping.
H. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are
copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 22
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac
507048GEN
I.
April 30, 2008 Bank of America
CD Owner Review
New Southcenter Branch
Hanger Spacing in accordance with following minimum schedules (other spacings and rod sizes
may be used in accordance with the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual using a safety factor
of five):
1 Steel Pipe (Water Filled):
Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing
1/2" to 1 1/4" 5 feet
1 'h" to 2" 7 feet
2.. Steel Pipe (Gas/Air Filled):
Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing
1/2" to 1 1/4" 6 feet
1 'h" and larger 10 feet
3. Copper Pipe:
Pipe Size
1/2"to 2"
2 ''/2" and larger
4. Glass Pipe:
Pipe Size
1/2" to 2"
2 '/2" and larger
5. Plastic/Fiberglass
Pipe Size
1/2" to 2"
2 ''/z" and larger
6. Caulked Bell and Spigot and Glass Pipe: Provide hanger for each section of pipe, located
at shoulder of bell. Where an excessive number of fittings are installed between hangers,
provide additional reinforcing.
Max. Hanger Spacing
6 feet
8 feet
Max. Hanger Spacing
6 feet
8 feet
Pipe:
Max. Hanger Spacing
4 feet
6 feet
Rod Size
3/8"
3/8"
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
J. Sloping, Air Venting, and Draining:
1„ Slope all piping as specified and as indicated, true to line and grade, and free of traps and
air pockets. Unless indicated otherwise, slope piping in the direction of flow as follows:
Service
Domestic Water
Soil and Waste
Storm Water
Sanitary Vent
Inclination
Down
Down
Down
Up (towards
terminal)
Slope
1” per 100'
1/4" per foot (1/8" per foot)
1/4" per foot (1/8" per foot)
roof 1/4" per foot (1/8" per foot)
2. Slope all compressed air branch piping down toward main risers at 1" per 10'.
3. Provide eccentric reducers in horizontal piping for all sizing changes:
a. Steam piping -bottom side flat.
4. Connect steam supply branch piping to the top of mains.
5. Provide drain valves and hose adapters at all low points in piping.
6. Provide vents at all high points in water piping.
K. Provisions for Movement:
1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connecting equipment.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 23
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements:
a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers, (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation.
b. Shields: Where low compressive strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated
on cold or chilled water piping, install shields or inserts.
c. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated install protection
saddles.
L. Installation of Anchors:
1. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent excessive stresses and to prevent transfer of
loading and stresses to connected equipment.
2. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to
structure.
3. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and
forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.
4. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal
pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends.
M. Equipment Supports:
1. Provide all concrete bases, unless otherwise furnished as work of Division 03. Furnish to
Division 03 Contractor scaled layouts of all required bases, with dimensions of bases, and
location to column centerlines. Furnish templates, anchor bolts, and accessories
necessary for base construction.
2. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from
structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide
factory -fabricated tank saddles for tanks.
N. Adjusting:
1. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
2. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment
to proper level and elevations.
3. Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 ROOF CURBS, EQUIPMENT RAILS, PIPE PORTALS
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with other trades so units are installed when roofing is being installed.
C. Verify roof insulation thickness and adjust raise of cant to match.
3.6 VIBRATION CONTROL ISOLATORS
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration
isolation materials and units except as otherwise indicated. Comply with minimum static
deflections recommended by ASHRAE, of vibration isolation materials and units where not
otherwise indicated.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 24
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration
control materials and units except as otherwise indicated. Adjust to ensure that units have equal
deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or
bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support
during installation.
C. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
D. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as
required where substrate is not level.
E. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves.
F. Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured equipment
deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated. Clean each vibration control unit,
and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of
unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
3.7 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate with Division 26 work to provide complete systems as
required to operate all mechanical devices installed under this Division of work.
B. Installation of Electrical Connections: Furnish, install, and wire (except as may be otherwise
indicated) all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection, etc., motors
and controls in accordance with the following schedule and in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with
applicable requirements of UL, NEC, and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that
products fulfill requirements. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Plumbing
Division of these Specifications.
C. Division 22 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled mechanical equipment
which is specified in Division 22 Specifications or scheduled on Division 22 Drawings. The
specific division of responsibilities between Division 22 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this
equipment is as follows:
1. Division 22 Plumbing Responsibilities:
a. MOTORS: Furnish and install all motors necessary for mechanical equipment.
b. MAGNETIC STARTERS: Furnish all magnetic starters whether manually or
automatically controlled which are necessary for mechanical equipment. Furnish
these starters with all control relays or transformers necessary to interface with
mechanical controls. If the starter is factory installed on a piece of Division 22
equipment, also furnish and install the power wiring between starter and motor.
c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Provide all VFD's associated with mechanical
equipment. If the drive is installed on a piece of factory assembled equipment the
wiring between motor and drive is to be provided as part of the factory equipment.
d. DISCONNECTS: Provide the disconnects which are part of factory wired Division
22 equipment. Factory wiring to include wiring between motor and disconnect or
combination starter/disconnect.
e. CONTROLS: Division 22 Contractor (including the temperature controls
subcontractor) is responsible for the following equipment in its entirety. This
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
. 220500 - 25
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
equipment includes but is not limited to the following:
1) Control relays necessary for controlling Division 22 equipment.
2) Control transformers necessary for providing power to controls for Division 22
equipment.
3) Line voltage thermostats.
4) Low or non -load voltage control components.
5) Non -life safety related valve.
6) Float switches.
7) Solenoid valves, EP and PE switches.
8) Refrigeration controls. (Division 22 provides power to refrigeration panels.)
D. Division 26 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled equipment which is
specified in Division 22 Specifications or scheduled on Division 21 Drawings. The specific
division of responsibilities between Division 22 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this equipment
is as follows:
1. Division 26 Electrical Responsibilities:
a. MOTORS: Provide the power wiring for the motors.
b. MAGNETIC STARTERS: Except where magnetic starters are factory installed on
Division 22 factory assembled equipment, Division 26 is to install magnetic starters
furnished by Division 22 and install the necessary power wiring to the starter and
from the starter to the motor. In the case of factory installed starters, Division 26 is
to install the necessary power wiring to the starter.
c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Physically mount all VFD's, which are not
specified to be installed on Division 22 factory assembled equipment. Provide the
necessary power wiring to the VFD and from the VFD to the motor except in the case
of factory installed VFD's where wiring between the motor and VFD is to be by
Division 22. Where disconnects are installed between a VFD and a motor provide
the interlocking wiring between the disconnect and VFD to insure that the drive is
shutdown simultaneously with motor.
d. DISCONNECTS: Provide all disconnects necessary for Division 22 mechanical
equipment which are not provided as part of factory wired Division 22 equipment.
Provide power wiring to all disconnects. In addition provide power wiring between
motor and disconnect when the disconnect is not factory installed. See also Variable
Frequency Drive above for special wiring requirements.
e. CONTROLS: Division 26 Contractor is responsible for providing power to control
panels and control circuit outlets.
2. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation,
as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment
with other work.
3. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match
conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power
supplies and installed equipment.
4. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and operational
facilities, unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner,
or Architect/Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing
facilities. When necessary, schedule momentary outages for replacing existing wiring
systems with new wiring systems. When that "cutting -over" has been successfully
accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 26
•
•
t
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation
resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced.
6. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation
properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.
Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also
avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.
E. Motors and Motor Control Equipment: Conform to the standards of the NEMA. Equip motors
with magnetic or manual line starters with overload protection. Motor starters and line voltage
controls shall be installed under Electrical Section but located and coordinated as required under
this Section of the work. Starters shall be combination type with non -fusible disconnect
switches. All single phase fractional horsepower motors shall have built-in overload protection.
3.8 PAINTING
A. All painting shall be provided under this Division work, unless otherwise specified under
Division 09: Painting. Painting schemes shall comply with ANSI A13.1. Paint all exposed
materials such as piping, ductwork, equipment, insulation, steel, etc. Exposed gas piping inside
and outside the building shall be painted with two coats of "Rust-O-Leum" Yellow. Exposed
copper indirect waste piping serving food service equipment shall be painted metallic chrome.
B. All exposed work under Division 22 shall receive either a factory finish or a field prime coat
finish, except:
1. Exposed copper piping.
2. Aluminum jacketed outdoor insulated piping.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. General: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting, or
other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to
installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
B. Piping System Identification:
1. Install pipe markers on each system indicated to receive identification, and include
arrows to show normal direction of flow.
2. Locate pipe markers as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each
pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter
non -accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points which permit view of concealed
piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced horizontally at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run, with
minimum of one in each room. Vertically spaced at each story transversed.
C. Underground Piping Identification: During backfilling/topsoiling of each exterior underground
piping system, install continuous underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 27
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common
trench and do not exceed overall width of 16", install single line marker.
D. Mechanical Equipment Identification: Locate engraved plastic laminate signs on or near each
major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide signs for the
following:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.
2. Meters, gauges, thermometers, and similar units.
3. Pumps, compressors and similar motor -driven units.
4. Hot water system mixing valves and similar equipment.
5. Tanks and pressure vessels.
6. Strainers, filters, treatment systems and similar equipment.
E. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between
multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. Equipment signs shall include an
identification of the area or other equipment served by the equipment being labeled.
F. Gas pressure regulators shall have metal tags attached stating, "Warning: lbs. upstream
natural gas pressure. Do not remove."
3.10 VIBRATION AND DYNAMIC BALANCING
A. Vibration tolerances shall be as specified by the "International Research and Development
Corporation", Worthington, Ohio, measured by the displacement, peak to peak, as follows:
1. Pump and Electric Motors: Below severity chart labeled "SLIGHTLY ROUGH",
maximum vibration velocity of 0.157 in/sec, peak.
2. Compressors: Same as pumps.
B. Correction shall be made to all equipment which exceeds vibration tolerances specified above.
Final vibration levels shall be reported as described above.
3.11 TESTING
A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment,
including test pumps, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Test all rotational
equipment for proper direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing, certify to the Architect,
in writing, that the specified tests have been performed and that the installation complies with
the specified requirements and provide a report of the test observations signed by qualified
inspector.
END OF SECTION 220500
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING
(WITH SEISMIC)
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220500 - 28
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 220501 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and
Section 220500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 22 specified
herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 220500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 230700: Mechanical Insulation
C. Section 222113: Plumbing Piping, Valves and Specialties
D. Section 226313: Medical Gas and Vacuum Systems
E. Section 224000: Plumbing Fixtures
F. Section 221123: Plumbing Equipment
1.3 SCOPE
A. All work includes providing new plumbing. Systems as specified under this section shall
include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Connection to utilities at five (5) feet from the building. Coordinate with the Civil
Engineering Plans and/or Division 02 work.
2. Connection of all waste, vent, and water piping to all plumbing fixtures, drains and
mechanical equipment.
3. Connect hot and/or cold water to hose bibbs and wall hydrants. Provide individual shut-
off valves at each location.
4. Provide traps on all floor drains with trap primer where specified. Pipe to trap shall be
'/z" minimum.
5. Domestic water heating shall be electric.
6. Provide domestic hot water recirculation system. Each branch line to be set at one (1)
gpm. Provide individual shut-off valve, check valve and Circuit Setter valve with
memory stop at each location.
7. Provide floor drainage in core toilets, mechanical rooms and equipment rooms.
8. Provide connections for all area drains, catch basins, downspouts, roof drains and
overflow drains to storm sewer system.
9. Gas service and meter assembly for HVAC equipment shall be by "Puget Sound Energy".
Location of new meter to be approved by Owner, Facility Engineer, Architect, and
Engineer before installation.
10. Contractor to start gas system at discharge flange of meter setting assembly. Provide
regulator assembly to reduce pressure to 2.0 psi maximum entering building.
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
11. Provide gas shut-off and regulator assembly at each connection, as detailed on drawings.
Supply to any piece of equipment shall not exceed 0.5 psi.
12. Temporary Water Service: As directed by the General Contractor, the plumber shall
provide a temporary metered water service and temporary water risers with four (4) hose
bibbs installed at each level as the building proceeds upwards to the roof.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval all materials and equipment in accordance with
Division 01. Submit manufacturer's data, installation instructions, and maintenance and
operating instructions for all components of this section including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Plumbing specialties.
2. Trap primers.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Drains
5. Roof flashing
6. Wall hydrants and hose bibbs
7. Mixing valves
8. Backwater valve
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged products - remove from project site.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year (12 months) warranty. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs,
and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials and equipment under this Division of the Specifications shall be new, of best
grade and as listed in printed catalogs of the manufacturer.
B. All manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers. Equipment
shall be clearly marked or stamped with the manufacturer's name and rating.
C. All items shall be furnished Vandal Proofed. One type of vandal proof screw is to be used
through out this facility. Coordinate with general contractor for type.
D. The following products to be included as part of this work but specified under Section 220500
Basic Materials and Methods and Section 222113 Plumbing Piping, Valves and Specialties:
1. Piping.
2. Valves.
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 2
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Hangers and supports.
4. Escutcheon plates, flashings, and sleeves.
5. Identification markers and signs.
6. Anchors, alignment guides and Seismic Zone 3 requirements.
1. Excavation and backfill.
8. Pressure and temperature gauges.
9. Access Panels.
E. Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to Section 224000.
F. Plumbing Equipment: Refer to Section 221123.
G. Products made of, or containing, lead, asbestos, mercury, or other known toxic or hazardous
materials are not acceptable for installation under this Section. Any such products installed as
part of the work of this Section shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and
replacement shall be borne solely by the Contractor(s).
2.2 VALVES: DOMESTIC WATER AND NATURAL GAS (SEE SECTION 222113)
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanout Plugs: Bronze, taper thread countersunk head.
B. Floor Cleanouts: Service weight cast-iron body and frame, flange with flashing clamp,
adjustable cast-iron collar, caulk inside, Ty -seal or No -hub joints, neoprene plug gasket seal.
1. Carpeted Areas: Zurn ZN-1400-KC-VP-BP-CM or J. R. Smith 4028 C - F- C - Y - U
2. Tiled Areas: Zurn ZN-1400-X-KC-VP-BP or J.R. Smith 4148 - F - C - U
3. Unfinished Areas: Zurn ZN-1400-HD-KC-VP-BP or J.R. Smith 4108 C - F - C - U
4. Yard Areas: Zurn Z 1474 -IN -VP or J.R. Smith 4258 - C - U
C. Cleanout Tee: Cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk brass plug, neoprene plug gasket seal
and smooth stainless steel cover.
1. Manufacturer: Zurn Z -1446 -BP or J. R. Smith 4532 S (Y)
2.4 ROOF FLASHING
A. Flashing: Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings flashings for pipes through the roof shall
be galvanized sheet metal, 24 gauge minimum with seams and joints lapped and soldered
watertight. Coordinate with Architectural Sections for flashings and roofing.
B. Vent Pipes: Provide caulk type, vandalproof hood with Allen head vandal proof screws for all
vent pipes through roof or preformed vinyl/galvanized steel assembly.
2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Piston Type: Hard drawn copper construction, mirror finished internal surfaces; machine
finished brass piston, air charged, 250 psi rated, tested and certified per PDI WH -201 and ASSE
1015. Coordinate location of access panels with Architect or provide access panel where none
are shown.
1. Manufacturer: Watts Series 15, Precision Plumbing series SC, or Sioux Chief.
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.6 ANTI -CONTAMINATION WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS
A. Anti -Contamination Wall Hydrant, WH -1: Exterior, box -type, freezeproof, cast -bronze
construction, chrome plated finish, loose key, bronze casing, length to suit wall thickness,
vacuum breaker/backflow preventor, 3/4" inlet, 3/4" threaded hose end, solder joint.
L Manufacturer: Woodford series B 67C, or Zurn Z -1320-C.
2.7 DRAINS
A. General: Provide drains of type and size as indicated on drawings, including features, as
specified herein.
B. Area Drain AD -1: Enamel coated cast iron body with flange, clamping collar, seepage
openings, adjustable 8" square top, sediment bucket, bottom outlet, caulk inside or Ty -seal,
satin bronze finish, vandal proofed.
1. Manufacturer: Zurn Z -525 -T -VP -S or J.R. Smith 2310 - U - FBS - C(Y).
C. Floor Drain, FD -1 - Finished Areas: Enamel coated cast iron body with flange, integral
reversible clamping collar, seepage openings, adjustable round satin nickel bronze strainer,
sediment bucket, bottom outlet, caulk inside or Ty -Seal or no -hub joint. Provide trap primer.
1. Manufacturer: Zurn ZN-415-5B-Y-P or J.R. Smith 2010 - A - C(Y).
D. Roof Drain, RD -1: 16" diameter, enamel coated cast iron body with flange, flashing ring with
gravel stop, under deck clamp, extension, sump receiver, 10-7/8" aluminum mushroom domes,
caulk inside, Ty -Seal or no -hub joint.
1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 1010 - C(Y) - C - R - CL - AD — AD or Zurn ZA-100-C-R.
E. Overflow Roof Drain, OD -1: 16"diameter, Enamel coated cast iron body with flange, flashing
ring with gravel stop, underdeck clamp, extension, sump receiver, standpipe collar, aluminum
dome, caulk inside, Ty -Seal or no -hub joint.
1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 1070-C(Y)-C-R-E-CL-AD or Zurn ZA-100-W2-DP.
2.8 TRAP PRIMER
A. Cast bronze construction, vacuum breaker, V2" sweat solder connection. Install in accessible
location or provide access panel.
1. Manufacturer: PPP Oregon #1 or E&S, for use for up to 8 drains using PPP trap primer
distribution units.
2. Option: Sloan F -72-A1 used in conjunction with water closet flush valve.
B. For Multiple Units or Kitchen Areas: PPP Prime Time electronic trap primer Series PT.
Coordinate 120 V, electrical service with Division 26.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This system to be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of
plumbing systems as specified by the requirements of the Specifications.
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 4
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Install all items specified in this section of the Specification under the full purview of local and
state governing agencies.
C. Refer to Section 220500: General Plumbing Requirements for installation of piping, valves and
other requirements.
3.2 PERFORMANCE OF WORK
A. Examine areas, physical conditions and phasing requirements under which materials are to be
installed. Layout the system to suit the different types of construction and equipment as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Work shall start immediately after authorization has been given to proceed so that the overall
progress of the construction is not delayed. No foundry items to be installed until submittals
have been approved.
C. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to properly interface components of the plumbing
system.
D. Follow manufacturer's directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of
articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the drawings or
covered in these Specifications.
E. The omission from the drawings or Specifications of any details of construction, installation,
materials, or essential specialties shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing the same in
place for a complete system.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. The word "piping" shall mean all pipes, fittings, nipples, valves and all accessories connected
thereto.
B. Run piping generally parallel to the axis of the building, arranged to conform to the building
requirements and to suit the necessities of clearance for other mechanical ducts flues, conduits
arid work of other trades and close to ceiling or other construction as practical, free of
unnecessary traps or bends.
C. Run horizontal sanitary drainage at uniform pitch of not less than 1/8" per foot, unless otherwise
indicated. Pitch horizontal vent piping downward from stack to fixtures.
D. Run drainage piping as straight as possible with long radius turns. Offsets shall be made at an
angle of 45° or less.
E. Grade water supply piping for complete drainage of the system. Install hose bibbs at low points.
F. Piping connections to all equipment shall be made up with unions.
G. Provide sufficient elbows, swings and offsets to permit free expansion and contraction.
H. Use reducers or increasers. Use no bushings.
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
I. Ream or file each pipe to remove burrs. Inspect each length of pipe and each fitting for
workmanship and clear passageway.
J. Vent pipes to terminate at least 6" above the roof. Provide vandal proof hood assembly.
K. Cover, cap or otherwise protect open ends of all piping during construction to prevent damage
to threads or flanges and prevent entry of foreign matter. Disinfect water supply piping as
specified.
L. Exposed connections to equipment shall be installed with special care, showing no tool marks
or threads at fittings and piping. No bowed or bend piping to be permitted.
M. All ferrous to non-ferrous connections shall be made by means of dielectric fittings. Submit
shop drawings for approval.
N. Use extra heavy pipe for nipples, where unthreaded portion is less than 1'/z". Use no close
nipples. Use only shoulder nipples.
O. All piping shall be inspected for defects and flaws prior to installation. Remove any damaged
piping from job site. Piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, debris or rust.
P. Cleanouts to be provided at each change in direction greater than 135° or 100' maximum
intervals on underground piping.
Q. Cleanouts to be same size as pipe except cleanout plugs larger than 4" shall not be required.
R. Cleanouts on concealed piping to be extended through and terminate flush with the finished
wall or floor. Cover plates to be provided on all cleanout plugs in finished areas.
S. The bodies of cleanout ferrules to conform in thickness to that required for pipe and fittings of
the same metal.
T. Route piping on roof on manufactured polyethylene pipe pier supports "Pipe Pier" by Erico.
3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Install as per PDI Standard WH -20 and equipment manufacturer's recommendation and as
shown on working drawings. Provide before each quick closing valve (flush valve, solenoid
valve, etc.) or bank of fixtures.
B. Install at each plumbing fixture, bank of fixtures, equipment and as indicated.
3.5 TESTING AND DISINFECTING - PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. General: The Contractor to perform all field tests and provide all labor, equipment, and
incidentals required for the tests. Owner to witness all field tests and conduct all field
inspections. The Contractor to give the Owner ample notice of the dates and times scheduled
for tests. Any deficiencies to be completely retested at no additional cost.
1. Inspection: Inspection to continue during installation and testing. Perform a final
inspection of the equipment prior to installation to determine conformity to the type,
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 6
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
class, grade, size, capacity, and other characteristics specified herein or indicated.
Correct or replace all rejected equipment prior to installation.
2. Water Distribution Piping Test: Before fixtures are set, subject the entire hot and cold
piping system to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch with water for
not less than 8 hours in order to permit inspection of all joints with no evidence of
leakage. Where a portion of the water distribution piping is to be concealed before
completion, test this portion separately as specified for the entire system.
3. Sanitary, Waste, Storm, Rainwater, and Vent Piping Test: Before the installation of any
fixtures or drains, cap the ends of the system and fill all lines with water to the roof level
and allow to stand for at least 30 minutes without leakage. Make tests within building
with piping exposed. If the system is tested in sections, tightly lug each opening, except
the highest opening of the section under test, and fill each section with water and test
with at least a 10' head of water.
4. Sanitary Drainage Vent, Storm, Rainwater and Fixture System Final Test: Give sanitary,
drainage vent, and fixture systems an in-service test after complete installation. After all
fixtures are installed, test the entire vent and sewer system and prove gas and water tight.
Final test shall be with air. Before proceeding with test, fill all traps with water. Close all
stacks and line openings during test, for a minimum period of 24 hours. If test reveals
leakage of air at any point, repair and retest the system.
5. Disinfection of Water Distribution System: After pressure tests have been made
thoroughly flush the entire domestic water distribution system with water until all
entrained dirt and mud have been removed, and sterilize by chlorinating material. The
chlorinating material shall be liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall provide a
dosage of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be introduced into the system or part
thereof in an approved manner. Retain the treated water in the pipe for 24 hours, or, fill
the system or part thereof with a water -chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per
million of chlorine and allow to stand for three hours. Open and close all valves in the
system being disinfected three times during the contact period. Then flush the system
with clean potable water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm.
During the flushing period open and close all valves and faucets three times. From at
least three divergent points in the system, take samples of water in properly sterilized
containers for bacterial examination. Repeat the disinfecting until tests indicate that
satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
a. Taking of samples shall be witnessed by Architect or Owner's representative.
Samples are to be taken and tested by an independent analytical testing laboratory.
Written reports shall be supplied to Architect for approval.
3.6 OPERATING TESTING AND CERTIFICATION - PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. Upon completion and disinfection, and prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor to
subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory, functional, and
operating efficiency. Such operating tests to include the following information in a report with
conclusions as to the adequacy of the system.
1. Time, date, and duration of tests.
2. Water pressures at most remote location.
3. Operation of all valves and hydrants.
4. Operation of all floor drains by flooding with water.
5. Quality of domestic water.
6. Read all indicating instruments at half-hour intervals unless otherwise directed. Supply
four copies of the test report to the Owner.
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3.7 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. In addition to the requirements of Section 220500, provide for the safety and good condition of
all materials and equipment until final acceptance by the Owner. Protect all materials and
equipment from damage. Provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of
the work. Special care to be taken to provide protection for bearings, open connections, pipe
coils, pumps, compressors, and similar equipment.
B. All piping, finished surfaces, and equipment to have all grease, adhesive labels, and foreign
materials removed.
C. All piping to be drained and flushed to remove grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating
assemblies, traps, flush valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Remove and
thoroughly clean and reinstall all liquid strainer screens after the system has been in operation
for ten days.
D. When connections are to be made to existing systems, the,Contractor is to do all cleaning and
purging of the existing systems required to restore them to the condition existing prior to the
start of work.
3.8 OPERATION MANUALS, START-UP SERVICE, WARRANTIES, ACCEPTANCE AND
GUARANTEES
A. General: Refer to Section 220500 for details.
END OF SECTION 220501
PLUMBING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220501 - 8
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and
Section 220500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 22 specified
herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall include, but not necessarily be
limited to, providing insulation for the following:
1. Piping:
a. Domestic hot water supply and return piping.
b. Domestic cold water, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Hot and cold equipment.
3. Plumbing:
a. Condensate drains inside the building from cooling coil drip pans to discharge point.
b. Roof and overflow drain bodies and all horizontal runs.
c. Horizontal pipe runs from fixtures receiving cold condensate from cooling coils, cold
boxes, and ice machines.
d. Drains from electric drinking fountains to first connection
e. Underground water piping..
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this Section include the following:
1. Fiberglass pipe insulation.
2. Insulation jackets.
3.. Insulation accessories.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 220500: Basic Materials and Methods.
B. Section 220501: Plumbing.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Ambient: The air temperature to be maintained in a conditioned room. Typically between 70°F
and 78°F.
B. Insert: Spacer placed between the pipe support system and the piping to allow for the space
required for insulation.
C. Insulation Group (IG): Definition of Insulation Materials and Operating Temperatures.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Insulation Shield: Buffer material placed between the pipe support system and the insulation to
prevent the insulation material from crushing.
E. Jacket: Protective covering over the pipe insulation; may be factory applied such as "all service
jacket" or field applied to provide additional protection; of such materials as canvas, PVC,
aluminum or stainless steel.
F. Piping Insulation: Thermal insulation applied to prevent heat transmission to or from a piping
system.
G. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Insulation jacket material that impedes the transmission of water vapor.
H. Freezing Climate: Where outdoor design temperature is less than 33°F, as stated in ASHRAE
fundamentals under 99% column for winter design conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Provide products conforming to the requirements of the following:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Manufacture and test insulation in
accordance with the ASTM Standards, including:
a. B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plat.
b. C 165 - Recommended Practice for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal
Insulation.
c. C167 - Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal
Insulations.
d. C177 - Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission.
e. Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus.
f. C 195 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
g. C196 - Specification for Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Thermal Insulating
Cement.
h. C302 - Test Method for Density of Preformed Pipe -Covering -Type Thermal
Insulation.
i. C303 - Test Method for Density of Preformed Block -Type Thermal Insulation.
j. C305 - Test for Thermal Conductivity of Pipe Insulation.
k. C356 - Test for Linear Shrinkage of Preformed High -Temperature Thermal
Insulation.
I. C411 - Test for Hot -Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation.
m. C423 — Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
n. C449 - Specification of Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
o. C518 — Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
p. C533 - Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
q. C534 - Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation
in Sheet and Tubular Form.
r. C547 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
s. C552 - Specification for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
t. C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket -Type Pipe Insulation (Industrial
Type).
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
u. C592 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket -Type Pipe Insulation (Metal -
Mesh Covered).
v. C612 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
w. C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation.
x. C921 - Practice for Determining Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal
Insulation.
y. C1104 — Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Sorption of
Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation.
z. C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation.
aa. C1338 — Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation
Materials and Facings..
bb. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
cc. E119 - Test for Fire Resistance.
dd. G21 — Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi.
ee. G22 — Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Bacteria.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE): Provide and install pipe and duct insulation in accordance with the
following ASHRAE Standard:
a. 90 Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Manufacture insulation in accordance with
the following NFPA standards:
a. 255 Test Methods, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. Do not provide materials with flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the
effects of moisture or high humidity.
C. Flame/Smoke Rating: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings,
sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed
index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) Method. In addition, the products,
when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing; or satisfactory certified test report from an
approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not
exceed those specified.
D. Corrosiveness: Provide insulation such that when tested in accordance with the following test,
the steel plate in contact with the insulation shows no greater corrosion than sterile cotton in
contact with a steel plate for comparison.
1. Test Specimen: Two specimens shall be used, each measuring 1" by 4" by
approximately ''A" thick.
2. Apparatus: Provide a humidity test chamber in which two polished -steel test plates, 1"
wide, 4" long and 0.020" thick, shall be placed. Plates shall be clear finish, cold -rolled
strip steel, American quality, quarter hard, temper No. 3, weighing 0.85 lb/sq. ft.
3. Procedure: The steel test plates shall be rinsed with cp benzol until their surfaces are free
from oil and grease and allowed to dry. One piece of cold -rolled steel shall be placed
between the two insulation specimens and secured with tape or twine. The test specimen
and uncovered plate shall be suspended vertically in an atmosphere having a relative
humidity of 95% (plus or minus 3%), and a temperature of 120°F (plus or minus 3°F), for
96 hours, and then be examined for corrosion.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 3
Glumac
507048GEN
April 30, 2008
CD Owner Review
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
E. Insulation thickness shall be the greater standard of that specified here or the State energy
conservation requirements.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number,
K -value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
Also furnish necessary test data certified by an independent testing laboratory. Submit samples.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of
mechanical insulation. Include this data and product in maintenance manual.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coating to the site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.
B. Store and protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not
install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Armstrong, Pittsburgh -Corning, Certainteed, Halstead,
Rubatex, 3M FireMaster, Pabco, Reflectix, or approved equal. Manufacturer and insulation
types listed below indicate a minimum acceptable level of quality required for each
classification.
2.2 PIPE INSULATIONS
A. Glass Fiber: Molded fibrous glass pipe insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
C 547 and meet ASTM C 585 for sizes required in the particular system. For all fluid
distribution temperatures below 45°F the system shall be of a wicking type.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Micro -Lok Meeting ASTM C547; or Micro -Flex (pipe sizes larger
than 18"), Knauf einsulation.
2. Applications: Insulation of piping up to 18" in diameter and 3" thick insulation.
3. 'K' Value: 0.23 at 75°F.
4. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F.
5. Vapor Retarder Jacket: AP -T PLUS white kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn
and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or
AP jacket with outward clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
B. Field Applied Jackets (For Interior Applications):
1. All longitudinal seams shall be located on bottom of pipes.
2. PVC Plastic: Johns Manville Zeston 2000. One piece molded type fitting covers and
jacketing material, gloss white. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive color matching
vinyl tape.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq. yd. plain weave cotton, treated with dilute fire
retardant lagging adhesive.
4. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016" thick sheet, [smooth/embossed] fmish, with longitudinal slip
joints and 2" laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Secure aluminum jackets with 3/8" or l/2" stainless steel bands on 12" centers.
C. Field Applied Jackets (For Exterior Applications):
1. All longitudinal seams, on horizontal pipe runs, shall be installed on the bottom of pipes.
2. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016" (minimum) thick sheet, [smooth/embossed] finish, with
longitudinal slip joints and 2" laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
protective liner.
3. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010" minimum (smooth/corrugated)
finish.
4. Secure stainless steel or aluminum jackets with %" or l/2" stainless steel bands on 12"
centers.
5. Manufaturers: Pabco, Childers, RPR, or approved equal.
D. Removable Covers:
1. Provide removable covers on pumps, valves, air separators, vents, fittings, flanges,
strainers, traps, etc., where periodic maintenance or removal of insulation may is
required.
2.. Use of premolded fittings with PVC covers is acceptable.
3. Use of lace -on type insulating blankets is acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that piping and ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with specifications
before applying insulation materials. All piping and ductwork shall be inspected by Owner's
Representative prior to installation of insulation. Any insulation applied prior to inspection
shall be removed and new insulation applied at no additional cost to Owner. Notify Owner's
Representative five (5) working days prior to insulation installation.
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of foreign material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes and
industry standards.
2.. Remove and replace any insulation that has become wet or damaged during the
construction process.
3. Continue insulation and vapor barrier at penetrations and duct supports, except where
prohibited by code. Instances where this is required include:
a. Ductwork support angle or struts. To prevent crushing of low density insulation,
provide separator or high density insulation at point of support. Vapor barrier to
continue unbroken at point of support.
B. Piiping Insulation:
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations unless otherwise specified.
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient
temperature with vapor retardant jackets with self sealing laps. Insulate complete system.
4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self
sealing lap or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at
equipment, flanges, and unions.
5. Provide insert between support shield and piping on piping 1'/s" diameter or larger.
Fabricate of Johns Manville Thermo -12, or other heavy density insulating material
suitable for temperature. Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths:
a. 1'/z" to 2'W pipe size 10" long
6. Use of metal saddles is acceptable as specified in Section 15050. Fill interior voids with
segments of insulation matching adjoining pipe insulation.
7. Use of pipe hangers designed as an insulation coupling is acceptable in lieu of saddles
and other devices. Klo-Shure coupling or equal.
8. For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 7 feet
above finished floor, finish with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket and fitting
covers, or aluminum or stainless steel jacket.
9. Where pumps, valves, strainers, etc., with insulation require periodic opening for
maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily
removed and replaced without damage. Use of premolded covers or lace -on type
insulation blankets is required.
10. For exterior applications:
a. Provide weather protection jacket. Insulated pipe lengths, pumps, fittings, joints, and
valves shall be covered with aluminum jacket or stainless steel jacket. Jacket seams
shall be located on bottom side of horizontal piping. All lateral joints shall be
caulked with a minimum 20 -year silicone sealant (clear). All longitudinal joints,
except those at the bottom of a horizontal pipe run, shall be caulked with a minimum
20 -year silicone sealant (clear).
b. Apply weather -resistant protective finish such as WB Armaflex to flexible
elastomeric insulation. Insulation seams shall be located on the bottom side of
horizontal piping. All lateral and longitudinal joints to be sealed with low V.O.C.,
UV inhibitive adhesive, such as Armaflex 520 BLV adhesive.
11. For underground installations, install per manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
12. When maintenance or service access for equipment will result in foot traffic over floor
mounted insulated piping the contractor is to fabricate a permanent removable walkway
to prevent damage to the piping and insulation.
3.3 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. All insulation thicknesses shall meet or exceed state energy code requirements as noted below.
Increase thickness V2" if exposed to exterior ambient air. Minimum thermal resistance in range
of 4.2 to 4.6 per inch of thickness. Insulation thicknesses are based on fiberglass insulation and
may be adjusted for equivalent insulation values for materials with superior "K" factors.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 6
•
•
•
•
Glumac
507048GEN
B. F iberglass Insulation
April 30, 2008
CD Owner Review
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
END OF SECTION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 7
PIPE SIZE
(inches)
THICKNESS
(inches)
Domestic hot water
Up to 2
2V2andover
1
1'A
Domestic hot water return
All Sizes
1
Domestic cold water
All Sizes
1
Roof and overflow drain bodies
All Sizes
1
Horizontal roof and overflow drainage
Up to 2
2 % and over
1
1
Misc. drains from electric water coolers, ice machines, etc.
All Sizes
1
END OF SECTION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
220700 - 7
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 221123 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and
Section 220500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 22 specified
herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall include but not necessarily be
limited to the following:
1. Water heaters
2. Expansion Tank
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 220500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 220501: Plumbing
C. Section 224000: Plumbing Fixtures
D. Section 222123: Plumbing Pumps
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval all materials and equipment in accordance with
Division 01. Submit manufacturer's data, colors, installation instructions, and maintenance and
operating instructions for all components of this section including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Water heaters
2. Expansion Tank
B. Electrical Work: Refer to Division 26, Section 220500 for requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit rough -in drawings. Detail dimensions, rough -in requirements,
required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for electrical power supply
wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring
required for final installation. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed
and portions that are to be field installed.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type and size of water
heater, control, and accessory, including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include this
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Copyright 2008 Glumac
221123 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual, in accordance
with requirements of Division 01.
F. Certificates: Submit appropriate Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report as required by
provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
G. Start-up: Provide written report on start-up in accordance with Section 220500.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged products - remove from project site.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year (12 months) warranty. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs,
and living expenses to repair or replace products or systems.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 HOT WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC
A. The heater shall be a glass -lined dura -power supreme commercial electric Model DSE as
manufactured by A.O. Smith Corporation.
B. Heater should be rated at capacities indicated on contract documents and constructed in
accordance with ASME code shall bear appropriate symbol and listed with the National Board
as required. Heater shall be listed with Underwriters' Laboratories and approved by National
Sanitation Foundation.
C. All internal surfaces of the tank shall be glass -lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition
that has been fused -to -steel by firing at a temperature of 1600° F. Tank shall be cathodically
protected with adequate extruded magnesium anode. The entire vessel is to be enclosed in a
round steel enclosure with baked enamel finish.
D. Control compartment to be hinged and shall house 120 volt control circuit transformer,
transformer fusing, magnetic contactor(s), immersion style operating thermostat(s), element
fusing per NEC, and commercial grade incoloy sheathed flange mounted elements with pre-
wired thermal leads. Temperature controls include limiting switch which will require resetting
manually in the event the temperature reaches 190° F.
E. Heater shall include ASME T & P relief valve and drain valve.
F. Warranty: 3 years, professional start-up to be included.
G. Acceptable Equals: A. O. Smith, Bradford -White, Lochinvar, or RECO.
2.2 RELIEF VALVES
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 221123 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Relief Valve: Watts vacuum relief valve, bronze body, silicone disc, threaded ends, installed on
C.W. supply line only, refer to H.W. Heater Detail on contract drawings.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: Watts, bronze body construction, thermostat and test
lever, temperature relief set at 210° F, and pressure relief set at 125 psi.
C. Acceptable manufacturers: Watts, Kunkle, Keckley or Cash Acme.
2.3 EXPANSION TANK
A. Furnish and install where shown on plans for domestic hot water system.
B. ASME stamped and constructed vessel with the following:
1. Tanks rated for 125 psi maximum working pressure.
2. Black steel construction painted with "Hammerton" blue enamel.
3. Tank saddle supports.
4. Stainless connection opening.
5. Butyl diaphragm bonded to polypropylene liner.
6. Pre -charged air chamber permanently sealed.
7. Air valve.
C. Manufacturer: Amtrol AST, Adamson or RECO.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units
plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
C. Orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access.
D. Connect water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions as indicated.
E. Start -Up: Start-up, test, and adjust equipment in accordance with manufacturer's start-up
instructions. Check and calibrate controls. Start-up to be by authorized manufacturer's
representative or agent.
3.2 OPERATION MANUALS, START-UP SERVICE, WARRANTIES, ACCEPTANCE AND
GUARANTEES
A. General: Refer to Section 220500 for details.
END OF SECTION 221123
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Copyright 2008 Glumac
221123 - 3
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 222113 - PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
220500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 22 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Pipe and Fittings
a. Sanitary waste and vent
b. Storm drain and overflow
c. Cold water
d. Hot water
e. Fuel gas
2. Valves
a. Backwater valves
b. Natural gas valves
c. Balancing valves
d. Fuel oil valves
e. Backflow prevention valves
f. Pressure reducing valves
g. Gas pressure regulator valves
3. Thermometers and gauges
4. Piping specialties
a. Pipe escutcheons
b. Strainers
c. Drip pans
d. Air vent
e. Dielectric unions
f. Unions
g. Flanges
h. Pipe sleeves
i. Sleeve seals
j. Valve boxes
k. Pipe coating
1. Gas connectors
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 220500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 220501: Plumbing
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Section 224000: Plumbing Fixtures
D. Section 221123: Plumbing Equipment
E. Division 26: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications:
1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer.
2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. All work shall be in full accordance with all applicable codes, ordinances and code
rulings.
2. The Contractor shall furnish without any extra charge the labor and material required for
compliance of codes.
3. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and as required under all Division 22
Sections. Provide written reports on all tests.
4. Electrical devices and wiring shall confirm to the latest standards of NEC; all devices
shall be UL listed and so identified.
5. All plumbing work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
6. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification
to all owners of underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10
business days, before commencing an excavation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for all piping, valves and
specialties indicating dimensions, valve CV, tolerances etc.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating underground piping installation showing all
fittings with inverts. Indicate all footings and grade beams.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions on accordance with requirements of
Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless
specifically noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be identified by the
manufacturer's name, nameplate, and pertinent data. All pipe, pipe fittings and valves shall be
manufactured in North America. Alternatives may be acceptable, but must be submitted and
approved by the Engineer prior to bidding.
B. Type M copper piping is not acceptable for any pressure water piping unless specifically noted
otherwise.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 222113 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. :For all Grade B piping specified below grade provide a mill report with production
:identification numbers for piping submitted to permit tracking of pipe by mill and production
ilot.
D. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise.
The words "or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturer's names
used herein, unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed.
E. Products made of, or containing, lead, asbestos, mercury, or other known toxic or hazardous
materials are not acceptable for installation under this Section. Any such products installed as
part of the work of this Section shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and
replacement shall be borne solely by the Contractor(s).
2.2 STANDARD PIPE AND FITTING
A. Natural Gas Pipe & Fitting (Above Grade)
1. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black steel.
2. Fittings: 150 lb. rating. ANSI B16.3, malleable iron threaded; ANSI B16.5, flanged;
ANSI B16.9, steel.
'. Joints: 2" and smaller, threaded; all piping inside the building 2-1/2" and larger, ANSI
B16.25 bevelweld, ANSI B16.5 flanges, or ANSI B16.11 socket weld.
B. Natural Gas Piping (Below Grade)
1. Polyethylene, Grade 23, Type II, ASTM 2513, plain ends, heat fused joints, orange
finish.
C. Trap Primer Piping:
1. Pipe: Domestic Only, ASTM B88, Type K, soft drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: No joints below ground. For pipes below grade double wrap with Scotch Wrap
#51 or PASCO Wrap, with 50% overlap.
D. Domestic Water Pipe & Fittings (Below Grade):
1. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: Domestic Only, Elkhart, ANSI B16.22, wrought copper, 95%-5% tin -antimony
solder joints. Wrap underground piping with Scotch Wrap or Pasco Wrap.
E. Condensate and indirect drains:
1 Pipe: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.22, wrought copper.
3. Joints: Lead-free solder joints. Solder shall be lead-free nickel/silver bearing solder
meeting ASTM B-32, ASTM B-828. Flux shall be water soluble and shall meet CDA
standard test method 1.0 and ASTM B813-91.
4. Insulate condensate drain pipes with minimum '/2" insulation to prevent moisture dripping
from pipe.
F. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe & Fittings (Above Grade):
1. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.22, wrought copper, 95%-5% tin -antimony solder joints. Alternative
Domestic Water Pipe Fitting (See Section 3.8F): Copper press fittings shall conform to
the material and sizing requirements of ASME B 16.22. O -rings for copper press fittings
shall be EPDM. Viega/Ridgid or approved equal.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Sanitary Sewer, Vent, Rainwater Pipe & Fittings:
1. Pipe: Tyler or AB&I or Charlotte Pipe and Foundry, ASTM A-74, ASTM A-888 cast
iron, bituminous coated, "No -Hub". Pipe showing rust or cracks in coating shall be
removed and replaced.
2. Fittings: No -hub, ASTM A-888.
3. Couplings Below Grade: Heavy Duty Type 304 stainless steel couplings conforming to
FM 1680 with neoprene sealing sleeve conforming to ASTM C-1540 having minimum
shield thickness of 28 gauge. Husky SD -4000 or Clamp All 125 only.
4. Couplings Above Grade: Type 304 stainless steel couplings conforming to ASTM C-
1540 and neoprene sealing sleeve, having minimum shield thickness of 34 gauge. Anaco
or Ideal.
H. Rainwater Leader Pipe and Fittings (Exposed, Above Grade):
1. Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV class, copper tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.23 cast bronze or ANSI B16.29 wrought copper. Drainage pattern
fittings.
3. Joints: Lead free solder. Lead solder shall not be present at the job site.
I. Vent Piping (Above Grade) (Contractor's Option):
1. Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV class, copper tube.
2. Fittings: Elkhart, ANSI B16.23 cast bronze or ANSI B16.29 wrought copper, sweat
solder no lead joint. Submit sample of solder for Engineer's review and approval.
J. Water Service to Building:
1. Pipe: Class 52 ductile iron, ANSI A21.51, AWWA C1510-70, 150 psi cement lined;
factory encased with 8 mil polyethylene tube or sheet.
2. Fittings: ANSI A21.10 mechanical joint, AWWA C110-1971, 250 psi. fittings to be
double field wrapped with 2", 20 mil vinyl tape, 50% overlap.
3. All fittings shall be restrained with 2000 psi thrust blocks in accordance with NFPA
4. Fire Protection: Refer to Specification Section 211000.
2.3 VALVES: GENERAL
A. General: Valve ratings shall exceed respective system operating pressures by 50% (minimum).
All valves shall be line size unless otherwise noted.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions
for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve.
Submit valve schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features
for each required valve.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type (exploded view) shop drawings for each
type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of
components.
D. Acceptable manufacturers (manufacturer and model number listed for individual valves
indicates minimum acceptable by all manufacturers):
1. Gate, Ball, Check or Butterfly: Apollo, Hammond, Nibco (commercial grade, US
manufacturer only), Milwaukee, Victaulic or Watts.
2. Lubricated Plug Valves: Homestead, Resun, or Rockwell.
3. Backflow Preventors: Ames, Febco, Cla-Val, Watts or Wilkins.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 4
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5.
6.
Pressure Reducing Valves: Cash -Acme, Cla-Val, Watts, or Wilkins.
Solenoid Valves: ASCO, Automatic or Magnatrol.
Circuit Setters: Griswold (Venturi with characterized ball valve only), Wheatley (Y -
globe type only), Armstrong, or Tour & Anderson.
E. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure
rating clearly marked on the valve body.
F. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter -turn.
Provide lever handle for quarter -turn valves, other than plug valves. Provide one wrench for
every 10 plug valves, and one in each size. Provide extended levers/stems for valves on
insulated lines. For manual valves 2 '''A" and larger located 8 feet above the floor in mechanical
rooms provide chain operator to permit operating the valve from 4'-0" above floor.
G. Valve Features:
1. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated,
provide proper valve features. Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping,
and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
2. Drain: Comply with MSS SP -45, and provide threaded pipe plugs.
3. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5 (steel), or
ANSI B16.24 (bronze).
4. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
5. Solder -Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
6. Flangeless: Valve bodies manufactured to fit between flanges complying with ANSI
B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B 16.5 (steel), or ANSI B 16.24 (bronze).
2.4 DOMESTIC PLUMBING SERVICE VALVES
A. Gate Valves:
1. 2" and Smaller: Class 125, MSS SP -80, ASTM B62 cast bronze body, soldered ends,
bronze bonnet, bronze wedge, rising stem, brass packing gland, non -asbestos packing and
aluminum hand -wheel.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Class 125, MSS SP -70, ASTM A126 Grade B cast iron body, flanged
ends, cast iron bonnet, cast iron wedge, bronze trim, rising stem, brass packing gland,
non -asbestos packing and cast iron hand -wheel.
B. Ball Valves:
1. 2 1/2" and Smaller: 600 psi, 2 piece, bronze body, soldered ends for copper pipe and
threaded ends for iron pipe, chrome plated brass ball, Teflon seat, brass stem, steel
handle, full port. Apollo 70-200 series.
C. Check Valves:
1. 2" and Smaller: Class 125, MSS SP -80, ASTM B62 and ASTM B16, cast bronze body,
soldered ends for copper pipe, screwed cap, swing type, Teflon bronze disc.
2. Vertical or High Flow: Class 125, cast bronze, high-flow body, TFE seat, brass check,
stainless steel guide and spring. Watt #6015.
2.5 NATURAL GAS, LP GAS AND OIL SERVICE VALVES
A. Ball Valves:
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. 'W' and 3/4": Brass body, U.L. listed, CSA approved for pressure of system, bronze ball
valve, 175 WOG, with integral lever handle. Watts #FBV-1.
2. 1" thru 1-1/2": 175 psi working pressure, CSA and UL approved, bronze body, welded
ends, stainless steel ball, stainless steel stem, steel handle with memory stop tab,
conventional port.
3. Lubricated Plug Valve, 2" and Larger: Class 125, MSS SP -78, 200 PSI, UL listed, CSA
approved for pressure of system, lubricated plug type, semi -steel body, loose wrench
operated, straight way pattern round port, combination button head fitting and lubricant
screw, Teflon seal and discs.
B. Seismic Gas Shutoff Valves:
1. 3/4" thru 2" (low and medium pressure, screwed body): U.L. Listed valve meeting ASCE
25-97, positive closure, soft seal seating, visual open -close indicator, manual reset, and
closure time interval within 5 seconds when subjected to a sinusoidal oscillation with
peak acceleration of 0.3G and a period of 0.4 seconds. Koso/California Valve Series EV,
or approved equal, sized for 0.5 PSI or 20 PSI max operating pressure, respectively.
2. 2", 3" and 4" (High pressure, screwed body): U.L. Listed valve meeting ASCE 25-
97,manual reset, soft seat construction for positive sealing, visual open -close indicator,
tripping mechanism with non -creeping rolling latch, and closure time interval within 5
seconds when subjected to sinusoidal oscillation with peak acceleration of 0.3G and a
period of 0.4 seconds. Koso/Califomia Valve Series EV315, or approved equal, sized for
20 PSI max. operating pressure.
3. 6" (high Pressure, Flanged body): U.L. Listed valve meeting ASCE 25-97,manual reset,
soft seat construction for positive sealing, visual open -close indicator, tripping
mechanism with non -creeping rolling latch, and closure time interval within 5 seconds
when subjected to sinusoidal oscillation with peak acceleration of 0.3G and a period of
0.4 seconds. Koso/California Valve Series EV317, or approved equal, sized for 60 PSI
max. operating pressure.
2.6 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Single seated, direct operated type; high capacity, having bronze body with strainer, by-pass
feature, pressure gauge tappings and complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003.
Select proper size for maximum flow rate and fail -off at inlet and outlet pressure indicated.
Watts #U5 series or equal.
B. Single seated, pilot operated globe valve type'having ductile iron body with FDA approved
epoxy coating inside and out, with Y strainer, stainless steel seat, FDA approved diaphragm,
copper control tubing, pressure gauge tappings and complying with requirements of ANSI
Standard A112.26.2. Select proper size for maximum flow rate and fall-off at inlet and outlet
pressure indicated. Watts 115 series or equal.
2.7 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Pressure Relief Valves: Constructed in accordance with ASME, 125 -pound setting, and so
stamped. Size as required. Watts #740 series or equal.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: Constructed in accordance with ASME, 125 -pound
setting, and so stamped. Size as required. Watts #100XL, 40XL, 140, N240, or 340 series or
equal.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 6
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.8 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVES
A. Diaphragm operated, steel construction of size and capacity as indicated on drawings.
Regulators shall be approved serving gas supplier, CSA and UL listed. Fisher, Sherwood, or
approved equal.
2.9 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES
A. General:
1. Certification: Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operating
conditions, are certified by manufacturer.
2. No mercury shall be used in thermometers due to hazardous material classification.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Winters, Trerice, Marshalltown or US Gauge.
B. Thermometers:
1. Bi -Metal Type: Provide bi-metal glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges
indicated, designed and constructed in service indicated. Accuracy shall be 1% +/- full
scale with adjustable recalibration.
a. Case: Type 300 series stainless steel, hermetically sealed, glass window, 3" diameter
dial, with adjustable angle.
b. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180° adjustment in
vertical plane, 360° adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
c. Scale: Satin faced, non -reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.
d. Stem: Stainless steel, adjustable angle socket, length to suit installation.
2. Glass Thermometer: Provide adjustable angle 9" thermometer of materials, capacities
and ranges as appropriate to medium being measured and designed and constructed for
service indicated. Accuracy to be 1% +/- of full scale.
a. Case: Aluminum or Valox
b. Temperature Sensitive Gage Liquid: Organic non-toxic. No mercury permitted.
c. Scale: Aluminum painted white with black markings.
d. Connection: V2" NPT with thermowell, 1 'A" UNF swivel nut without thermowell.
3. Photovoltaic Cell Powered LCD Thermometer
a. Case: ABS Plastic
b. Accuracy: 1% of full scale.
c. Display: 16 LUX rating LCD display. Switchable Fahrenheit and Celcius.
d. Connection: 3/4" NPT with thermowell 1 1/4" UNF swivel nut without thermowell.
4. Range: Conform to the following:
1) Hot Water: 20°F - 240°F with 2°F scale divisions.
2) Cold Water: -40°F - 160°F with 2°F scale divisions.
C. Thermometer Test Wells:
1. Provide thermometer test wells as indicated, constructed of brass or stainless steel,
pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated
piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs:
1. Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200°F (93°C).
Construct of brass and finish in nickel -plate, equip with '/�" NPS fitting, with self-sealing
valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly
from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain.
Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Pressure Gauges:
1. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed
and constructed for use in service indicated.
2. Type: General use, 1% accuracy ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourbon type,
bottom connection.
3. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2" diameter.
4. Connector: Brass with 1/4" male NPT.
5. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
6. Pressure differential range shall be 100 psig minimum for the appropriate application
with maximum 1 psig divisions.
F. Pressure Gauge Cocks:
1. General: Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees on
piping systems. Gauge cock constructed of brass with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and
"T" handle brass plug.
2. Syphon: '/4" straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4" male NPT on each end.
3. Snubber: 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which
pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.
G. Pressure Gauge Connector Test Plugs:
1. Provide pressure gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200°F (93°C).
Constructed of brass and finish in nickel -plate, equip with Y2" NPS fitting, with
self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D.
probe assembly from dial type insertion pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed
screw cap an chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated
piping.
2.10 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General:
1. Provide factory -fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in
service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for
each service, or provide proper selection to comply with installation requirements.
Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and
equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is installer's
option.
B. Pipe Escutcheons:
1. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe
outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside
diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or
ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or
chrome finish for occupied areas, prime zinc base paint finish for unoccupied areas.
2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and
condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide stainless steel, cast brass or sheet
brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
3. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide stainless steel escutcheons, solid or split
hinged.
C. Low Pressure Y -Type Pipeline Strainers:
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 222113 - 8
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system
materials. Select strainers for 125% of the working pressure of piping system, with Type
304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64" perforations at 233 0.045" perforations per square
inch.
2. Threaded ends, 2" and smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered
blowdown fitted with hose bibb. Sarco, Wheatley or Mueller.
3. Flanged ends, 2-1/2" and larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off -center
blowdown fitted with hose bibb. Sarco, Wheatley or Mueller.
D. Drip Pans:
1. Provide drip pans fabricated from 16 -gauge galvanized sheet metal with watertight joints,
and with edges turned up 2-1/2". Reinforce top by structural angles. Provide hole,
gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1" copper drain line connection.
Extend 1" drain to nearest approved receptor.
E. A.ir Vent with Valves:
1.. Install in all closed and open loop water systems at high points of systems and at any
other point necessary to free system of air. A shut-off valve shall be provided in riser to
each automatic vent valve to facilitate servicing. A 3/8" type "L" copper tubing drain
line shall be run to drain receptor to carry away water that valve discharges. Manual type
vent may be used in lieu of automatic type, where specifically shown on the Drawings.
Hoffman #79 or Dole.
F. Dielectric Unions:
1. Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated,
which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance),
prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
G. Dielectric Flanges: Provide dielectric flanges for flanged transitions between dissimilar metal
piping. Watts Series 3100 or approved equal.
H. Unions:
1. Unions shall be of type specified in following schedule:
a. Black Steel, 2" and smaller: 250 Ib. screwed malleable iron, ground joint, brass to
iron seat.
b. Black Steel, 2-1/2" and larger: 150 1b. cast iron screwed flanged, flat faced, full faced
gasket.
c. Soldered Copper or Brass Pipe, 2" and smaller: 150 Ib. cast bronze or copper, ground
joint, non-ferrous seat with soldered ends.
d. Screwed Copper or Brass Pipe, 2" and smaller: 150 lb. cast brass, ground joint, brass
to brass seat, with threaded ends.
e. Flanged Copper or Brass Pipe, 2-1/2" and larger: two (2) 150 lb. cast bronze flanges.
f. Manufacturer: EPCO, Mueller, Stanley G. Flagg or Watts.
1. Flanges:
1. Provide flanges at flanged connections to equipment, tanks and valves. Faces of flanges
being connected shall be alike in all cases. Connection of raised -face flange to flat -faced
flange not permitted.
2. Use ASTM A307, Grade B, bolts and nuts for cast iron flanges and ASTM A193 for steel
flanges. Regular square head unfinished bolts with heavy semi -finished hex nuts ASTM
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A 194. Cadmium plated where exposed to weather. Rating: 150 Ib. or 300 Ib. in high
pressure portions.
3. Type of pipe and corresponding flanges as follows:
a. Screwed Black Steel Pipelines: 1251b. black cast iron screwed flange, flat faces.
b. Welded Steel Pipe, 1501b. black forges steel welding flanges, 1/16" raised fact
ASTM A181 Grade I. Use flat face when connected to flat faced companion flange.
J. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Provide fire proof sleeve assemblies utilizing UL rated sealant systems at all fire rated
penetrations. For non -rated sleeve penetrations pack the annular space between the pipe
and sleeve with fiberglass and/or mastic.
2. Sleeves shall provide a minimum '/z" annular clearance around pipe.
3. Sheet metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock
joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following
gauges: 3" and smaller, 20 gauge; 4" to 6", 16 gauge; over 6", 14 gauge.
4. Steel pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
5. Iron pipe: Fabricate from cast iron or ductile -iron pipe; remove burrs.
6. Plastic and copper pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.
7. Sleeves through interior concrete walls and floors: Telescopic, submerged, adjustable
sleeves by Adjust -to -Crete, AMI or Shamrock. Floor sleeves to extend a minimum of 1"
above finished floor.
8. Through exterior walls and floor on grade: 150 -pound class cast-iron pipe sleeve. Where
waterproof membranes are used, provide membrane clamps. For insulated piping, sleeve
diameter shall not be less than diameter of insulated pipe.
K. Sleeve Seals:
1. All sleeves shall be sealed to prevent intrusion of moisture, dust or insects.
2. Underground: For sleeves passing through exterior or foundation walls, provide
mechanical link seal assembly.
3. Aboveground: For sleeves passing through walls or floors provide a non-toxic 3 -hour
rated fire resistant silicone foam sealant with a Flame Spread Rating of 20. Sealant to be
tested and approved under UL 263, ASTM E119, and NFPA 251 Standards. All fire
rated penetrations shall be sealed with approved UL System.
4. Local Approvals: All seals to be provided shall be in accordance with the regulations of
all governing agencies of the city, county, and State Fire Marshal's Office.
L. Valve Boxes: Concrete body, cast iron cover with vandal resistant screws, extensions as
required to extend full depth to valve. Valve box cover lettering shall correspond to the valve
service, "Water", "Gas", "Fire", "Sewer", etc. Christy #G8 or equal.
2.11 PIPE COATING
A. All underground steel and copper pipe fittings, and all above ground steel and copper pipe and
fittings in corrosive air environments shall be covered with one of the following methods:
1. Twice Wrap 20 Mil. Scotch Wrap PVC No. 51, 50% overlap.
2. Prefabricated extruded plastic cover with joints sealed with two coats of 20 Mil. Scotch
Wrap No. 51 or Pasco Wrap 20 mil weight.
2.12 GAS CONNECTORS
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 222113 - 10
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. General Areas: CSA rated, UL listed, braided stainless steel gas hose of size and capacity to
meet appliance input requirements.
B. Food Service Equipment: CSA rated, UL listed, plastic coated braided stainless steel gas hose
with quick disconnect, swivel fitting and coiled restraining device. Dormont # 1675BPQS or
approved equal.
C. Gas connectors for outdoor applications shall be listed for exterior use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master mechanics and shall result
in an installation consistent with the best practices of trades.
B. Install work uniform, level and plumb, in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any
diagonal, or otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by
Architect.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of
articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or
covered in these Specifications.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the work between the various Plumbing Sections and with the work specified under
other Divisions of the work or contracts toward rapid completion of the entire project. If any
cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper
provisions in time, then the work hereunder shall include all expenses of such changes as are
necessary in the work under other contracts, and such changes shall be directly supervised by
and made to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. The cooperative work not included in the Plumbing Division related to the general construction
work is as follows:
1. All formed concrete work.
2. Framed openings in masonry and other Architectural and Structural elements.
3. Wood grounds and nailing strips in masonry and concrete.
4. Sloping of floors to drains and floor sinks.
5. Sloping of roof -to -roof drains and overflow drains.
C. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any that may be
subject to rejection as a result of damage or other defects. Provide tarps and visqueen cover to
protect equipment and piping delivered to and stored at the site.
3.4 WORKING PRESSURES
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. All fittings, valves, pipe, specialties equipment shall be rated for the working pressure subjected
in the installed locations.
B. Drawings indicate working pressure in each system. The rating of the equipment and material
shall not be less than that of the system pressures.
3.5 PIPES SIZES TO EQUIPMENT
A. General: Pipe sizes indicated shall be carried full size to equipment served. Any change of size
to match equipment connection shall be made within one foot of equipment.
B. At temperature control valves with sizes smaller than connected lines, reduction shall be made
immediately adjacent to valve.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated
service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints or couplings, but with
adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance or replacement of valves and
equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately
at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ASME B31 Code for
Pressure Piping.
B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain)
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and
column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details, and notations or, if not
otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct space or block access
for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, and
other structural and permanent -enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where
furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if
any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Whenever
possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column
enclosures, in hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal
runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.
C. Elevator Machine Rooms, Switchgear, Generator, Telecommunications, Telephone Rooms, and
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical
or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping
that must be run through electrical spaces. Route drip pan drain piping to floor drain, floor sink
or other approved receptor.
3.7 WELDING
A. Qualifications of Welders: Welders performing work under this Contract shall be certified and
qualified in accordance with tests prescribed by the National Certified Welding Bureau
(NCWB) or by other approved test procedures using methodology and procedures covered in
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding
and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators". Installation
shall conform to ANSI 31.1 "Power Piping".
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 222113 - 12
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Submit for approval the names, identification, and welder's assigned number, letter or
symbol of welders assigned to this project.
2. The assigned identification symbol shall be used to identify the work of each welder and
shall be indelibly stamped immediately upon completion of each weld.
3. Welders shall be tested and certified for all positions.
4. Submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by each operator.
5. Any or all welders may be required to retake welding certification tests without
additional expense.
6. When so requested, a welder shall not be permitted to work as a welder on this project
until he has been recertified in accordance with NCWB.
7. Recertification of the welder shall be made after the welder has taken and passed the
required tests.
8. Where piping 1-1/2 inches and smaller is butt or socket welded, submit 3 samples of test
welds for approval.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS
A. All piping shall be cut squarely, free of rough edges and reamed to full bore. Piping shall be
mechanically cleaned prior to make-up of joints and fully inserted into fittings.
B. Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.
C. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Remove excess cutting oil from
piping prior to assembly. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where
recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to
leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
D. Solder copper tube and fitting joints with lead free nickel/silver bearing solder meeting ASTM.
B-32, in accordance with IAPMO IS 3-93, ASTM B-828 and Copper Development Association
recommended procedures. Joints shall be cleaned by other than chemical means prior to
assembly. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. Fluxes shall be applied liberally to the outside of the
pipe and the solder cup of the fitting. Fluxes shall be water soluble for copper and brass potable
water applications, and shall meet CDA standard test method 1.0 and ASTM B813-91. Solder
shall be applied until a full fillet is present around the joint. Solder and flux shall not be applied
in such excessive quantities as to run down interior of pipe. Lead solder or corrosive flux shall
not be present at the jobsite.
1 Manufacturers:
a. Solder: JW Harris "Bridgit" or Englehard "Silvabrite 100".
b. Flux: Laco "Flux -Rite 90", MW Dunton "Nokorode CDA Flux", Hercules "Fluid
Action Solder Flux".
E. Braze copper tube and fitting socket or extrude joints (T -drill) with BCUP series filler metal
without flux. Listed brazing flux shall be used for joining of copper tube to brass or bronze
fittings and shall meet AWS FB3A or FB3C. Medical gas system brazing shall be as specified
in Section 226313. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. A continuous fillet shall be visible around
the completed joint. After cooling, flux residue shall be thoroughly removed with warm water
an.d a brush prior to testing. Do not use BCUP filler on copper alloys containing over 10%
nickel.
F. Piping shall be capped during construction to prevent entry of foreign material.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 ,Glumac
222113 - 13
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:
1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F.
2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5° angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove
slag, metal particles, and dirt.
3. Use pipe clamps or tack -weld joints with 1" long welds, 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8
welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20".
4. Build up welds with stringer -bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler
pass. Eliminate valleys at center and at edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which
will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow -holes, and
non-metallic inclusions.
5. Do not weld out piping system imperfections by tack -welding procedures. Refabricate to
comply with requirements.
6. At Installer's option, install forged branch -connection fittings whenever branch pipe is
indicated, or install regular T -fitting.
H. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.
I. Cast -Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards
and installation instructions.
3.9 VALVES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements:
1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including
valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as
to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided as necessary.
2. Install valves, except butterfly valves, with stems pointed up, in vertical position where
possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane without
prior written approval. Install valve drains with hose -end adapter for each valve that
must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.
3. Install butterfly valves with stems mounted horizontally.
4. All valves mounted higher than 7' above floor in mechanical rooms and where indicated
shall be installed with stem horizontal and equipped with chain wheels and chains
extending to 6' above floor.
B. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended -stem valves, arranged in proper
manner to receive insulation.
C. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install
valves with the following ends of types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Pipe, 2-1/2" and Smaller: Soldered joint valves.
2. Steel Pipe, 2" and Smaller: Threaded joint valves.
3. Larger Pipe Sizes: One of the following, at installer's option:
a. Flanged valves.
b. Lug valves.
D. Non -Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to
locations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight
shutoff of metal seated valves.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 14
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise
indicated.
F. Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install gate, ball, plug, circuit setter, globe, and
butterfly valves to comply with ASME B31.9.
G. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to
center line of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow.
H. Wafer Check: Install between 2 flanges in horizontal or vertical position.
I. Ball Valve: Ball valve used on gas systems shall be UL listed, CSA approved for pressure of
system, no exception.
J. Valve Adjustment: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final
testing, adjusting, and balancing, inspect each valve for possible leaks. Adjust or replace
packing to stop leaks, replace valve if leak persists.
K. Valve Identification: Tag each valve in accordance with "Mechanical Identification" section.
L. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.10 TEMPERATURE GAUGES
A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily
read by observer standing on floor without supplemental illumination. All gages to be installed
with snubbers to absorb system shock.
B. Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At outlet of hot water heaters.
2. At inlet and outlet of boilers.
3.11 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each
bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form
a watertight seal.
B. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound in compliance
approved and listed UL system number. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.12 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS (SEE 15050)
3.13 EQUIPMENT RAILS AND PIPE PORTALS
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with other trades so units are installed when roofing is being installed.
C. Verify roof insulation thickness and adjust raise of cant to match.
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 222113 - 15
Copyright 2008 ,Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3.14 VIBRATION CONTROL ISOLATORS
A. Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection and
application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units.
C. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load
application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal
deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or
bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support
during installation.
D. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
E. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as
required where substrate is not level.
F. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves.
G. Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured equipment
deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated.
H. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt
or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
3.15 EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Expansion Loops: Fabricate expansion loops as indicated, in locations indicated, and elsewhere
as determined by installer for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Subject loop to
cold spring which will absorb 50% of total expansion between hot and cold conditions. Provide
pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and elsewhere as determined by installer
to properly anchor piping in relationship to expansion loops.
B. Expansion Compensation for Risers and Terminals: Install connection between piping mains
and risers with at least five pipe fittings including tee in main. Install connections between
piping risers and terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in riser.
3.16 EXPANSION COMPENSATORS
A. Install as noted on plans. Where plans do not indicate spacing of guides or other pertinent
information, install per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.17 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Underground piping shall be installed in stable, open trench work. Trench excavations shall be
a minimum of 16" wide, true to line and grade. Contractor shall exercise all due shoring and
safety procedures. No stones larger than 1" may be present in the trench to a minimum depth of
4" below the trench bottom. The trench shall be free of job site debris, and free of corrosive
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 16
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
rnedia. Pipe crown shall be not less than 24" below the finished ground surface for metallic
pipe, and 30" for non-metallic pipe, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or directed by
the Architect. Trenches shall be kept free of excess moisture, and shall be kept open for only a
short a time as necessary for installation, testing and inspection. Dispose of surplus excavation
and seepage water as directed by the Architect.
B. Piping shall be properly bedded and backfilled over stable trench bottom to a level of at least
12" above the pipe crown with thin layers of unwashed sand, dampened but not puddle, and free
of organic or corrosive materials and excessive moisture. Backfill shall be placed in thin layers
not to exceed 6" and tamped by mechanical tampers to a minimum 90% Modified Proctor
Density, in accordance with ASTM D -1557-58T. trenches shall be backfilled to a minimum
depth of 36" prior to being wheel loaded. Replace to their original condition all turf, plants,
concrete, asphalt, or other improvements which constitute landscaping, traffic areas or other
improved areas which become disturbed by excavation. In graded and undeveloped areas, in
addition to procedures specified above, backfill trenches with crown 8" above the surrounding
surface.
C. Excavated and backfill in soils of unstable nature shall be provided as directed by Architect.
3.18 PIPE INSPECTIONS
A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that systems be inspected at completion of each phase
while under tests required for administrative authorities, and prior to concealment, i.e. "Rough -
in" "top -out" and final.
B. Inspection — Below Grade: All piping installed below grade shall be inspected prior to burial by
the Architect, the Owner's Representative or the Engineer. Contractor must notify Architect no
less than 24 working hours prior to inspection time. Should the piping be buried prior to
inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the piping at no delay to the project and
at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Inspection — Above Grade: All piping installed above grade shall be made available for
inspection upon completion and prior to finish of walls and ceilings. Notify the Architect, the
Owner's Representative or the Engineer. Contractor must notify Architect no less than 24
working hours prior to the desired inspection time. Should the piping be hidden within the
structure prior to inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the piping at no delay to
the project and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.19 CLEANING, FLUSHING, DISINFECTING
A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and
prepare for application of specified coatings (if any).
B. Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each
run of each system for completion of joints, supports, and accessory items.
C. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.
D. Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with Section 220501.
3.20 TESTING
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222113 - 17
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment,
including test pumps, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Test all rotational
equipment for proper direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing, certify to the Architect,
in writing, that the specified tests have been performed and that the installation complies with
the specified requirements and provide a report of the test observations signed by qualified
inspector.
B. Piping: Remove from the system, during testing, all equipment which would be damaged by
test pressure. Replace removed equipment when testing has been accomplished. The system
may be tested in sections as the work progresses; however, any previously tested portion shall
become a part of any latter test of a composite system. Correct leaks by remaking joints with
new material.
C. Test time will be accrued only while full test pressure is on the system, unless indicated
otherwise. "Tolerance" shall be no pressure drop, except that due to temperature change in a
24-hour period. Inspect and test all work prior to burying or concealing. Test pressure shall be
one and one-half times the system operating pressure or the listed test pressure below,
whichever is greater:
System
Test Medium
Test Pressure
Tolerance -Test Period
Domestic Water
Water
80 psig
None — 8 hours
Soil and Waste
Water
10 ft head, 5 psi
No leaks — 8 hours
Vent
Water
Top of Vent Terminal
No leaks — 8 hours
Storm
Water
Top of Roof Drain
No leaks — 8 hours
Natural Gas/Propane
Air or Nitrogen
100 psig
None — 24 hours
D. Final Drainage, Waste and Vent Test: Upon project closeout, Contractor shall perform and
certify that the DWV system has passed the following test:
1. After all plumbing fixtures have been installed and their traps filled with water, all vent
terminals and building drains shall be closed and a U-tube water manometer shall be
inserted into the trap of water closet and an air compressor testing apparatus shall be
attached to any suitable opening. An air pressure of 1" water column as indicated on the
manometer shall be introduced into the system. The pressure shall hold constant for a
period of 15 minutes without the introduction of additional air. Leaks revealed during
this test may be located by smoke test of other recognition methods.
E. Valves: Test all valve bonnets for tightness. Test operate all valves at least once from closed -
to -open -to -closed position while valve is under test pressure. Test all automatic valves,
including solenoid valves, and temperature and pressure relief valves, safety valves, and
temperature and pressure relief valves not less than three (3) times.
F. Piping Specialties: Test all thermometers, pressure gauges, and water meters for accurate
indication; automatic water feeders, air vents, trap primers, and vacuum breakers for proper
performance. Test all air vent points to ensure that all air has been vented.
G. Backflow Preventers: Each testable backflow prevention device shall be tested and approved
by certified testers after installation. Submit test results.
END OF SECTION 222113
PLUMBING, PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 222113 - 18
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 222123 - PUMPS AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. A.11 work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and
Section 220500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 22 specified
herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
o Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1„ Domestic hot water recirculating pumps
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 220500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 220501: Plumbing
C. Section 224000: Plumbing Fixtures
D. Division 26: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide systems that are the standard product of an equipment
manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such units who issues complete catalog
information on such products.
B. Codes and Standards: Provide pumps which conform to the requirements of:
1. Hydraulic Institute (HI): Manufacturer pumps in accordance with "Standards for
Centrifugal Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps.”
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide electrical components
which comply with NEMA Standards.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70: National electrical Code
4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a. UL -778: Motor Operated Water Pumps
1.5 SIJBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for units showing dimensions,
weights (shipping, installed, and operating), capacities, ratings, performance with operating
point clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, and installation
instructions.
PUMPS AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222123 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Submittal information to verify all scheduled characteristics are met including efficiency.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight (shipping,
operating), required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and location and size of
each field connection.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, tube
replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data,
shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in operating and maintenance manuals.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for power and control
wiring required. Differentiate between factory -installed and field -installed wiring.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
13. Store and protect products and units against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do
not install damaged units - remove from project site.
C. Rigging: Comply with the manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide general one year (12 months) warranty. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel
costs, and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PUMPS
A. Furnish and install pumps with capacities as shown on plans. Pumps shall be in-line type for
installation in vertical or horizontal piping. Pump must be capable of being serviced without
disturbing piping connections.
13. Pump body shall be of all bronze construction, rated 175 psi working pressure, with gauge ports
at nozzles, and with vent and drain ports.
C. Impeller shall be non-ferrous material, enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft
and secured by a locking capscrew or nut.
D. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the motor shaft by an internally -flushed mechanical seal
with ceramic seal seat, and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225° F. A non-
ferrous shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal.
E. Pump bearing bracket shall have oil lubricated bronze journal and thrust bearings. Bracket shaft
shall be alloy steel having ground and hardened thrust bearing faces. A flexible coupling to
dampen starting torque and torsional vibration shall be employed.
PUMPS AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222123 - 2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
F. Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be the size, voltage and enclosure called for on
the plans.
G. Each pump shall be factory tested. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least
one coat of high-grade machinery enamel prior to shipment.
H. Provide H -O -A switch with overload protection. Pump shall run continuously. Wiring between
switch and pump provided under Division 22, as stated in Section 220500.
I. Manufacturer: ITT Bell and Gossett Series 60, TACO, Thrush or Grundfos.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. A.11 equipment, unless otherwise shown or noted on the Drawings, is to be installed in
accordance with industry standards and manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.
B. Grouting Pump Base: For all base mounted flexibly coupled pumps fill the pump base frame
with grout after completing pump/motor alignment.
C. Provide vibration isolation, inertia bases, seismic snubber, flexible pipe connections, etc, as
specified in related specification sections.
D. For variable flow pumping applications, see Section 230593 for additional requirements.
E. Contractor to assist testing and balancing contractor in verifying correct pump rotation and
system operation.
F. Flush and clean equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in
presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls.
G. Isolation for Service: Provide pump installations with a discrete isolation valve on both the
supply and intake side of the pump to permit service of the pump and any related strainer, check
or balancing valves. Triple duty valves are not equivalent for this shut-off service.
H. Balancing Coordination and Impeller Trimming: Coordinate final pump flow with test and
balance contractor. For pumps larger than 5 horsepower, if the system tests and balance
indicate that flow exceeds the specified flow by greater than 20%, it is not acceptable to reduce
flow merely by adjusting balance valves to create additional head or reducing VFD peak flows.
Excess system flow must be reduced by trimming the impeller to match the load.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S START-UP SERVICES
A. The manufacturer shall provide start-up service in the form of a factory trained service
technician. The service technician shall verify correct installation, verify pump systems
mounting, verify piping installation, verify control wiring, verify power wiring, and check for
proper operation. The service technician shall provide final adjustments to meet the specified
PUMPS AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 (ilumac
222123 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
performance requirements. Fully staffed parts and service personnel shall be within four hours
travel from the jobsite.
END OF SECTION 222123
PUMPS AND SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
222123 - 4
•
•
•
•
r
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and
Section 220500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 22 specified
herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall include, but not necessarily be
limited to, the installation of plumbing fixtures and trim.
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 220500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 220501: Plumbing
C. Section 221123: Plumbing Equipment
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval all materials and equipment in accordance with
Division 01. Submit manufacturer's data, colors, installation instructions, and maintenance and
operating instructions for all components of this section including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Plumbing fixtures.
2. Piping specialties.
3.. Toilets.
4.. Urinals.
5. Lavatories.
6. Sinks.
7. Drinking fountains.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough -in drawings. Detail dimensions, rough -in requirements,
required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages. Coordinate
requirements with Architectural Woodwork shop drawings specified in Division 06 for fixtures
installed in countertops and cabinets. Furnish templates for use in woodwork shop.
C. Samples: Submit samples of any piece of equipment requested by Architect for review and
approval.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for
power supply to units. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed
and field installed portions.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
224000 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State Amendments.
B. All fixtures and faucets must meet all requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
C. State Energy Code
D. ARI Standard 1010: "Drinking Fountains and Self -Contained Mechanically Refrigerated
Drinking Water Coolers."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not
install damaged products. Remove damaged products from project site.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Stock:
1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures,
flush valves, and trim to Owner with receipt in a quantity of one device for each 10
fixtures.
2. Furnish faucet repair kits complete with all necessary washers, springs, pins, retainers,
packings, o -rings, sleeves, and seats in a quantity of 1 kit for each 10 faucets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide fixtures as specified. Fixtures in any secure or public areas shall be vandal proofed.
B. Architect/Engineer shall review and approve any substitution requested by Contractor prior to
bid submittal.
C. Provide fixture as specified, acceptable manufacturers:
1. Vitreous China or Cast Iron Fixtures: American Standard, Eljer, Zurn or Kohler.
2. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay or Just
a. All stainless steel is 18 gauge, type 304 unless otherwise specified.
3. Drinking Fountains: Elkay, Haws, Sunroc or Oasis.
4. Terrazzo Service Sinks: Florestone or Stem Williams.
D. Provide faucet as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Chicago Faucets, Zurn, Symmons, T
and S or as indicated.
E. Provide flush valve as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Sloan, Hydrotek or Zurn.
F. Provide commercial grade toilet seat as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Beneke, Bemis,
Church or Olsonite.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
224000 - 2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Provide heavy-duty cast iron commercial grade carrier as specified. Provide compact carriers
where space is limited. Acceptable manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Wade or Zum. No
plastic parts on foundry items.
1. Wall hung water closet: J.R. Smith figs: 0210L/RY-M12, 0210DY-M12, 0240L/RY-
M12, 0240DY-M12, 0410R/LY-M12 and 0410DY-M 12.
2. Wall hung urinal: J.R. Smith fig: 0634-M12 or Zurn Z-1221-58.
3. Wall hung lavatory: J.R. Smith fig: 0700(D) -M31 concealed arm carrier.
H. Provide heavy duty commercial grade 17 -gauge P -Trap and supplies with stops as specified.
Provide heavy duty commercial grade lavatory supplies. Supplies shall be'/�"x 3/8" x 12"
ground joint flexible riser with loose key angle stop with chrome plates I.P.S. brass nipple.
Sink supplies shall be''/" x 12" ground joint flexible riser with loose -key angle stop with
chrome plated I.P.S. brass nipple. Provide bell type escutcheons for both P -trap and supplies.
Acceptable manufacturers: Zurn, Brasscraft, Chicago, or McGuire.
1. P -trap - Lav: McGuire C8902 -DF or Zum Z-8701.
2. P -trap - Sink: McGuire C8912 -DF or ZumZ-8702.
3. Supply for Lavatory: McGuire H2165 LK or Zurn ZH-8821-LK.
4. Offset supply for barrier free lavatory: McGuire 158 WC.
5. Supply for Sink: McGuire H2167 LK or Zurn ZH-8803-LR.
6. Supply for Water Closet: McGuire H2169LK or Zum ZH-8807-CR.
7. Escutcheons: McGuire WEOOD Series, wrought brass, bell type.
8. Lavatory grid strainer: McGuire 155A or Zurn Z-8743.
9. Barrier -free lavatory offset grid strainer: McGuire 155WC or Zurn 8746.
10. Sink Strainer: Elkay LK -1 8B.
I. Insulation: provide white molded closed cell vinyl pre -fab insulation on P -Trap and on both hot
and cold water supply for barrier free lavatories and sinks. Acceptable manufacturers:
Plumberex, True-Bro, and Zurn. Bag type insulators are not acceptable.
J. Drinking fountain shall be lead-free construction only.
2.2 FIXTURE LISTING
A. WC -1 Water Closet - Dual Flush:
1. Fixture: Z5610 wall mount vitreous china siphon jet toilet 1-1/2" top spud, bolt caps, 1.6
gallon water flush.
2. Seat : Zurn Z5955SS-EL or Bemis.
3. Flush Valve: Zurn Z6000AV-WS1-DF dual flush valve.
4. Paired Performance: Fixture and flush valve must be from the same manufacturer.
B. WC -2 Water Closet - Dual Flush - Barrier Free:
1. Fixture: Z5610 wall mount vitreous china siphon jet toilet 1-1/2" top spud, bolt caps, 1.6
gallon water flush.
2. Seat : Zum Z5955SS-EL or Bemis.
3. Flush Valve: Zurn Z6000AV-WSI-DF dual flush valve.
4. Paired Performance: Fixture and flush valve must be from the same manufacturer.
5.
C. LTR -1 Urinal - Ultra low flow, ADA:
1. Fixture: Zurn Z5755 ultra water saving washdown urinal.
2. Flush Valve: Zum ZEG-6003-AV sensor operated valve with 1/8 GPF.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Copyright 2008 ,Glumac
224000 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Mounting Height: 17" floor to lip.
D. L-1 Lavatory - Barrier Free:
1. Fixture: Kohler K-2005 "Kingston" or American Standard 0355.012 "Lucerne" 20" x
18" wall hung vitreous china lavatory drilled for concealed arm carrier.
2. Faucet: Chicago Faucet 2200-4CP with grid strainer, and Omni L-400-0.5 VR low flow
outlet set @ 0.50 G.P.M.
3. Mounting Height: 34" floor to bowl ledge, maximum.
E. S-2 Sink:
1. Fixture: Elkay LRAD-3322-6 ''/z."Lustertone" 33"x22"x6 '/z",A.D.A. compliant
self -rimming countertop 18 gauge stainless steel double bowl sink.
2. Faucet: Chicago Faucet 2300-8 Single lever faucet with Omni A-400-2.00 VR laminar
flow set @ 2.0 G.P.M.
3. Drain: Elkay, standard duo strainers with 4" tailpiece, 2 required.
4. Continuous Waste Arm: Brass combination drain outlet for double compartment sinks.
5. Supplies: '/z" flexible supplies with stops and escutcheon plate.
6. Mounting Height: Refer to architectural elevation details.
F. MS -1 Sink - Service:
1. Fixture: Stern Williams #HL-1900BP, 32" x 32" x 12" terrazzo floor set receptor, cast
brass drain, stainless steel strainer and tailpiece and 20 gauge steel rim guard, splash
guard.
2. Faucet: Chicago Faucet 897 -RCF; wall mounted combination fitting with vacuum
breaker, wall brace, threaded hose outlet and integral stops, rough brass finish, Omni A-
810-2.00 VR set at 2.0 gpm.
3. Sealant: Caulk edges of basin with silicone sealant.
G. EWC-I Electric Water Cooler, Barrier Free Bi -Level Unit:
1. Fixture: Sunroc SRF -7200, stainless steel construction, oval bowls.
2. Electrical: 420watt, 4.7amps; 120 volt. Coordinate hardware electrical connection with
Division 26.
3. Finish: Stainless steel.
4. Mounting Height: 36" floor to top of bubbler, maximum,
1-1. EWC-2 Electric Water Cooler - Barrier Free:
1. Fixture: Sunroc SRF -7100, stainless steel unit, 8.0 gph capacity, 4.7 amps. 420watts.
120 volt supply. coordinate with Division 26,
2. Finish: Stainless steel.
3. Mounting Height: 36" floor to top of bubbler, maximum..
DF -I Dual Height drinking Fountain:
1. Fixture: Sunroc SF -2800 dual height heavy gauge stainless steel with No. 4 satin finish.
2. Mounting height: 36" to top of bubbler.
3. «Remote Chiller: Sunroc RWC-8 with grill=%
J. DF -2 drinking fountain:
1. Fixture: Sunroc SF -2600 18 gauge stainless steel with No.4 satin finish.
2. «Back Panel: Sunroc SF -0151>>
3. Mounting height: 36" to top of bubbler.
4. «Remote chiller: Sunroc RWC-8 with grill>>
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
224000 - 4
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be installed
in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced
standards.
B. Examine rough -in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of
piping connections prior to installing fixtures.
C. Examine walls, floors and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
D. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written
instructions, rough -in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the
referenced standards.
E. Comply with the installation requirements of ADA with respect to plumbing fixtures for the
physically handicapped.
F. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or
within wall construction to provide rigid installation.
G. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.
H. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork.
I. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Division 07. Match
sealant color to fixture color.
J. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are
water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.
K. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.
L. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide
proper flow stream.
M. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
N. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
O. During construction cover all installed fixtures, sinks, and water coolers with cardboard boxes
arid wrap with Visqueen.
P. Provide flush valve and faucet support behind wall.
END OF SECTION 224000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
224000 - 5
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 230500 - BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions,
Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and
shall include all Mechanical Sections specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE OF THIS SECTION
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Compliance with all codes and standards applicable to this jurisdiction.
2. Shop Drawings for Equipment
3. Coordination Documents
4. Record Drawings
5. Start-up Service and Building Commissioning
6. Instruction, Maintenance, and 0 & M Manuals
7. Work associated with Delivery, Storage, and Handling of products
8. Work associated with provision of Temporary Facilities
9. Preparation of Posted Operating Instructions
10. Meeting Project Safety and Indemnity requirements
11. Proper Cleaning and Closing
12. Supplying proper Warranty information
13. Supply specified Guarantee documentation
14. Design and provision of Supports and Anchors
15. Pipe Portals
16. Equipment Rails
17. Access Panels and Doors
18. Identification Markers
19. Coordination of Electrical requirements for equipment provided
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. General mechanical scope of work shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Provide packaged rooftop units with ducted supply and return to building.
2. Provide a dedicated split -system conditioning unit to serve the ATM Room and
Vestibule.
3, Provide a dedicated AC unit to serve the NER room.
4.. Provide rooftop toilet exhaust fan and ducted exhaust for the building.
B. The Contract Documents, including Specifications and Construction Drawings, are intended to
provide all material and labor to install complete heating, ventilating, air conditioning systems
for the building and shall interface with all existing building systems affected by new
construction.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior details, floor plans, elevations, and the
structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other
trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of
the fixtures, equipment, and pipe lines and are not to be scaled; all dimensions and existing
conditions shall be checked at the building.
D. The Contractor shall comply with the project closeout requirements as detailed in General
Requirements of Division 01.
E. Where project involves interface with existing building and site systems, every effort has been
made to note existing utilities and services. However, the Contractor should thoroughly
familiarize themselves with existing conditions and be aware that in some cases information is
not available as to concealed conditions, which exist in portions of the existing building affected
by this work.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.
2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.
B. Drawings:
1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to
equipment and methods of installation.
2. Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions.
3. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of
equipment and structure.
4. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested, in order to resolve space problems,
preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of
other trades.
5. Where existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts prevent installation of new work as
indicated, relocate, or arrange for relocation, of existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts.
Verify exact location and elevation of existing piping prior to any construction.
6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to
Architect or Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible, including
during bidding period.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. "Above Grade": Not buried in the ground and not embedded in concrete slab on ground.
B. "Accessible": Ability to perform recommended maintenance without removal of services or
equipment and requiring no special platforms.
C. "Actuating" or "Control" Devices: Automatic sensing and switching devices such as
thermostats, pressure, float, electro -pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling operation of
equipment.
D. "Below Grade": Buried in the ground or embedded in concrete slab on ground.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within
double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in enclosures. In general, any
item not visible or directly accessible.
F. "Connect": Complete hook-up of item with required service.
G. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed."
H. "Furnish": To supply equipment and products as specified.
I. "Indicated," "Shown" or " "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on Drawings or
Specifications.
J. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
K. "Motor Controllers": Manual or magnetic starters (with or without switches), individual push
buttons or hand -off -automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
L. "]Piping": Pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, strainers, hangers, supports, unions,
traps, drains, insulation, and related items.
M. "]Provide": To supply, install and connect as specified for a complete, safe and operationally
ready system.
N. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory" or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, or directed by or to
Architect/Engineer/Owner.
O. "Rough -In": Provide all indicated services in the necessary arrangement suitable for making
final connections to fixture or equipment.
P. "Shall": An exhortation or command to complete the specified task.
Q. "Similar" or "Equal": Of base bid manufacture, equal in materials, weight, size, design, and
efficiency of specified products.
R. "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
S. "Typical" or "Typ": Exhibiting the qualities, traits, or characteristics that identify a kind, class,
number, group or category. Of or relating to a representative specimen. Application shall apply
to all other similarly identified on plan or detail.
T. "Will": A desire to complete the specified task. Allows some flexibility in application as
opposed to "Shall."
U. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
V. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items required
for proper and complete installation.
1.6 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. All Division 23 Mechanical sections included herein.
B. Division 33: Utility Site Work. ««<Coordinate with Civil Engineer»»>
1. Coordination of excavation of trenches and the installation of mechanical systems and
piping on site.
C. Division 03: Concrete.
1. All concrete work for Mechanical Division shall be included in Division 23 under the
appropriate Sections and shall include:
a. Concrete curbs and housekeeping pads for the mechanical equipment.
b. Thrust blocks, pads, and boxes for mechanical equipment.
c. Coordination of floor drain and floor sink installations in sloped floors.
D. Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection.
1. Flashing and sheet metal.
2. Sealants and caulking.
3. Firestopping.
E. Division 09: Painting:
1. Division 23 installers shall perform all painting, except where specifically stated
otherwise in Division 09.
2. Painting of all exposed steel, piping, ductwork, insulation, equipment and materials.
3. Paint all exposed gas piping, interior and exterior to the building, yellow.
F. Division 10: Miscellaneous Metals.
1. Exterior louvers and grilles shall be included in this Section.
G. Division 26: Electrical is related to work of:
1. Power connections to all mechanical equipment.
H. Division 28: Electronic Safety and Security is related to work of:
1. Fire protection alarms and relays.
2. Smoke detector and monitoring.
3. Life Safety Systems.
1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements not explicitly detailed in these specifications
or drawings, but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the
project, must be provided as part of the contract.
B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 23 Sections.
Provide written reports on all tests.
C. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be
UL listed and labeled.
D. All mechanical work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all
owners of underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10 business
days, before commencing an excavation.
F. F'rovide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following:
1. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Washington:
a. 2003 International Building Code (IBC) with State Amendments.
b. 2003 International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State Amendments.
c. 2003 Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State Amendments.
d. 2003 International Fire Code (IFC) with State Amendments
e. 2002 National Fuel Gas Code (NFGC) NFPA 54, WAC 51-52
f. 2002 National Electrical Code (NEC)
g. 2005 Washington State Energy Code, (WAC 51-11, WSEC)
h. Washington State Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality Code, WA 51-13 (VIAQ)
2. Local, city, county and state codes and ordinances.
3. Local Bureau of Buildings.
4. Local Health Department.
5. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts.
6. Washington Administrative Codes.
G. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following:
1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
2. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council.
3. CSA - Canadian Standards Association.
4,. ADC - Air Diffuser Council.
5„ AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
6. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
7. ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
8. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning Engineers.
9. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
10. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
11. AWS - American Welding Society.
12. FM - Factory Mutual.
13. MSS - Manufacturer's Standardization Society.
14. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association.
15. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
16. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories.
17. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.
18. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum or Type 304
stainless steel sheet, not less than 20 USG (0.0375"), riveted or bolted to the manufactured item,
with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non -erasable record of equipment data.
B. Current Models. All work shall be as follows:
1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer.
2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 23,
manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation or
repair, on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project.
1.9 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all existing conditions at building site.
B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided.
C. Provide and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections.
D. Prepare a Construction IAQ Management Plan meeting the SMACNA IAQ guidelines. See
Section 233113 Air Distribution for a summary of requirements.
E. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final
location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that
require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access
doors required for mechanical access.
F. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 02 through
16 for rough -in requirements.
G. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components.
H. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
I. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical
installations.
J. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured -in-
place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
K. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing -in the building.
L. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of
mechanical equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching
required for installation of his work unless otherwise noted.
M. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
N. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, without interference with other
installations.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 6
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
O. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with
ductwork, piping, conduits, suspension system, light fixtures, cable trays, sprinkler piping and
heads, and other installations.
P. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
`Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule shutdown of existing systems to make new
connections. Provide valves in new piping to allow existing system to be put back in service
with minimum down time.
Q.
R. All materials (such as insulation, ductwork, piping, wiring, controls, etc.) located within air
plenum spaces, air shafts, and occupied spaces shall have a flame -spread index of 25 or less,
and smoke -developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) Method. In
addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be
progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing, or satisfactory certified
test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials
proposed for use do not exceed those specified.
S. Coordinate installation of floor drains and floor sinks with work of other trades, such that
finished floor slopes to drains and floor sinks are flush with surrounding floor.
T. Products made of or containing lead, asbestos, mercury or other known toxic or hazardous
materials are not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as
part of the work of the Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and
replacement shall be borne solely by the installing Contractor.
1.10 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangements of all mechanical work and
requirements to be performed. It is not intended to show or indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories which will be required as a part of the work of this Section.
B. The Contractor shall review the structural and architectural conditions affecting his work. It is
the specific intention of this section that the contractor's scope of work shall include
1. Proper code complying support systems for all equipment whether or not scheduled or
detailed on drawings or in these specifications
2. Minor deviations from the mechanical plans required by architectural and structural
coordination.
C. The Contractor shall study the operational requirements of each system, and shall arrange his
work accordingly, and shall furnish such fittings, offsets, supports, accessories, as are required
for the proper and efficient installation of all systems from the physical space available for use
by this section. This requirement extends to the Contractor's coordination of this section's work
with the "Electrical Work." Should conflicts occur due to lack of coordination, the time delay,
cost of rectification, demolition, labor and materials, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall
not be at a cost to the Owner.
D. Minor deviations in order to avoid conflict shall be permitted where the design intent is not
altered.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Advise the Architect, in writing, in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of
equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly
coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict.
1.11 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products
other than those scheduled or shown on the drawings as a basis of design:
1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design,
detailing, structural supports, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution.
3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed
substitute.
B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are
equivalent or superior to specified item.
C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in
the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution.
1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for review all materials and equipment in accordance with Division
01 requirements.
B. After approval of preliminary list of materials, the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's Certified Drawings to the Architect for approval.
C. The Contractor shall submit approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's equipment cuts, of all
equipment requiring connection by Division 26, to the Electrical Contractor for final
coordination of electrical requirements. Contractor shall bear all additional costs for failure to
coordinate with Division 26.
D. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a complete package bound in a 3 -ring
binder with tabs for each specification section. The approved submittals shall be converted into
Operations & Maintenance Manuals at the completion of the project. Submit six (6) typed
copies of submittals. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.13 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractors shall prepare coordinated Shop Drawings to coordinate the installation and
location of all HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, lights,
audio/video systems, electrical services and all system appurtenances. The Drawings shall
include all mechanical rooms and floor plans. The Drawings shall be Overlay Drawings
showing each discipline on a single sheet. The Drawings shall be keyed to the structural
column identification system, and shall be progressively numbered. Prior to completion of the
Drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architect and the
structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection,
Electrical, Ceiling Suspension, and Tile Systems), and provide reasonable maintenance access
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 8
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
requirements. When conflicts are identified, modify system layout as necessary to resolve. Do
not fabricate, order or install any equipment or materials until coordination documents are
approved by the General Contractor, Architect, and Owner. Within thirty (30) days after award
of Contract, submit proposed coordination document Shop Drawing schedule, allowing
adequate time for review and approval by parties mentioned above. Drawings should be
prepared and submitted for approval on a floor -by -floor basis to phase with building
construction.
B. The Drawings shall be prepared as follows:
1. The Sheet Metal (Mechanical) Contractor shall prepare Drawings to an accurate scale of
1/4" = 1'-0" or larger, on reproducible media sheets (vellum) or AutoCAD disks. Obtain
reproducibles or AutoCAD files of the HVAC design from the Architect, or Engineer, at
cost plus. Drawings are to be same size as Contract Drawings and shall indicate location,
size and elevation above finished floor, of all HVAC equipment, ductwork, and piping.
Plans shall also indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout, as shown on electrical
plans and reflected ceiling plans.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall obtain reproducible plans or AutoCAD disks from the
Mechanical Contractor, and indicate all plumbing lines including fittings, hangers, access
panels, valves, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor.
3. The Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain reproducible plans or AutoCAD disks with
the detailed mechanical and plumbing work shown. The Sprinkler Contractor shall
indicate location of all sprinkler heads and piping, including valves and fittings,
dimensions from column lines, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor.
4. Plans are to incorporate all addenda items and change orders.
5. Distribute plans to all trades and provide additional coordination as needed.
C. Advise the Architect in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment.
Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly coordinate the
installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict.
D. Provide means of access to all valves, dampers, controllers, operable devices, and other
apparatus that may require adjustment or servicing.
E. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material,
equipment and apparatus, and advise the Architect of any discrepancies between those indicated
on the Drawings and those existing in the field prior to any installation related thereto.
F. Final Coordination Drawings with all appropriate information added are to be submitted as
Record Drawings at completion of project.
G. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for their use when doing
their work.
1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing installation, obtain an extra set of prints from Architect, marked "Record."
Keep this set of Drawings at the job site at all times, and use it for no other purpose but to mark
on it all the changes and revisions to the Contract Drawings resulting from coordination with
other trades. At the completion of the project, edit project AutoCAD files to incorporate all site
markups, changes, and revisions to the Contract Drawings. Submit plots of Record Drawings
and six copies CD Roms labeled with all record AutoCAD drawing files.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for use when doing his
work.
C. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exterior and
interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes and
similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned
from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment,
dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control
devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance
located (i.e. — valves, traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders;
concealed control system devices.
D. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and
materials used.
E. Refer also to Special Conditions in Division 01 for full scope of requirements.
1.15 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING
A. Prior to start-up, be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper
equipment rotation, proper wiring, auxiliary connections, lubrication, venting, controls, and
installed and properly set relief and safety valves.
B. Provide services of factory -trained technicians for start-up of air conditioning units, temperature
controls, chillers, boilers, pumps, and other major pieces of equipment. Certify in writing
compliance with this Paragraph, stating names of personnel involved and the date work was
performed.
C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional requirements.
1.16 INSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE, AND O&M MANUALS
A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work, and prior to training of Owner's personnel, the
Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of operating instructions, maintenance
instructions, part lists, and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and
maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section, bound in a
durable binder. Refer to Division 01.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper instruction of the of Owner's personnel for
operation and maintenance of equipment, and apparatus installed as specified in Division 23 to
be no less than two hours for each piece of equipment. The Contractor shall develop and submit
training materials prior to this training. These materials shall include qualifications of the
trainer, training agenda, learning objectives, and a written test to be administered at the end of
the training session. Operation and Maintenance manuals must present, incorporated and
referenced in the training sessions.
1.17 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately
packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 10
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site, unless off-site
storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping
shall be stored in bundles covered with visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be
removed from site and replaced.
C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site
congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed
for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
1.18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 for the requirements of temporary water and sewer for construction and
safety. Provide temporary heating, air conditioning, ventilation, water, and sewer, etc. services
as necessary during the construction period and as required to maintain operation of existing
systems.
B. Temporary Heating for Commissioning Tests:
1. Provide temporary heating where needed to provide false load for commissioning tests.
2. Temporary heating may be from the permanent heating system of the project or from a
dedicated temporary heating system. If temporary system is necessary, select facilities
known to be safe and without deleterious effect upon what work in place or being
installed.
C. Temporary Cooling for Commissioning Tests:
1. Provide temporary cooling where needed to provide false load for commissioning tests.
2. Temporary cooling may be from the permanent cooling system of the project or from a
dedicated temporary cooling system. If temporary system is necessary, select facilities
known to be safe and without deleterious effect upon the work in place or being installed.
1.19 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical
sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring
diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic.
Post instructions where directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each
principal system and equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and
procedure in the event of equipment failure. Provide weather -resistant materials or
weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating
instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy
removal.
1.20 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY
A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site
including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement
will apply continuously and not be limited to normal hours of work.
B. No act, service, Drawing, review, or Construction Review by the Owner, Architect, the
Engineers or their consultants, is intended to include the review of the adequacy of the
Contractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless,
indemnify and defend the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers and their consultants, and each of
their officers, employees and agents from any and all liability claim, losses or damage arising,
or alleged to arise from bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons, and for all
damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of,
or in connection with, the performance of the work under the Division of the Specifications, and
from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of the work described in the Construction
Contract Documents; but not including the sole negligence of the Owner, the Architect, the
Engineers, and their consultants or their officers, employees and agents.
1.21 CLEANING AND CLOSING
A. All work shall be inspected, tested, and approved before being concealed or placed in operation.
B. Upon completion of the work, all equipment installed as specified in this section, and all areas
where work was performed, shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the
Architect.
1.22 WARRANTIES
A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor.
Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty
requirements.
B. Provide complete warranty information for each item, to include product or equipment, date of
beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone
numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
C. Service during warranty period: Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere
during the 12 -month warranty period.
1.23 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented
by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which
may become defective within the period of one (1) year after the Date of Final Acceptance,
ordinary wear and tear excepted.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects
in his work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless
specifically noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be identified by the
manufacturer's name, nameplate, and pertinent data.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 12
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise.
The words "or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers'
names used herein, unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed.
2.2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of
supports and anchors, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products, which are UL listed and FM approved.
2. MSS Standard Compliance: Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS).
3. SMACNA: "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
4. NFPA: Pamphlet number 13 and 14 for fire protection systems.
5. Provide copper plated or plastic coated supports and attachment for copper piping
systems. Field applied coatings or tape is unacceptable.
6. Manufacturer: B -Line, Anvil, Michigan, Tolco, Kin -Line or Superstrut.
B. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
factory -fabricated hangers and supports of one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.
2. Adjustable Steel Swivel Band Hangers: MSS Type 10.
3. U -Bolts: MSS Type 24.
4. Pipe Slides and Slide Plates: MSS Type 35, including one of the following plate types:
a. Plate: Unguided type.
b. Plate: Guided type.
c. Plate: Hold-down clamp type.
5. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base support and cast iron
floor flange.
6. Pipe Saddle Supports with U -Bolt: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and
cast iron floor flange.
7. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38, including steel pipe base support and
cast iron floor flange.
8.. Single Pipe Roller with Malleable Sockets: MSS Type 41.
9. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43.
10. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44.
1 1 . Pipe Guides: Provide factory -fabricated guides of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated
steel, consisting of a bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with a two -section
guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if
any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow
indicated travel.
C. Horizontal Cushioned Pipe Clamp: Where pipe hangers are called out to absorb vibration or
shock install a piping clamp with thermoplastic elastomer insert. Cush -A -Clamp or equal.
D. Vertical Piping Clamps: Provide factory -fabricated two -bolt vertical piping riser clamps, MSS
Type 8.
E. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated hanger -rod
attachments of one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
2. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 13
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
4. Malleable Iron Eye Sockets: MSS Type 16.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
F. Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated building
attachments of one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18.
2. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading:
a. Light Duty: MSS Type 31.
b. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32.
c. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33.
3. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58.
4. Anchor Bolts: Heavy duty, drilled -in concrete expansion wedge anchor bolts, Hilti or
Red Head.
G. Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping
hangers and supports, factory -fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for
exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.
1. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of
insulation matching adjoining insulation.
2. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40, 18" minimum, or of the length
recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. High-density insulation
insert lengths shall match or exceed shield length.
3. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360° insert of waterproofed calcium silicate (60
psi flexural strength minimum) encased in 360° sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of
same thickness as adjoining insulation. Shield length shall match or exceed length of
calcium silicate insert.
4. Thermal Hanger Couplings: Constructed of high strength plastic coupling to retain
tubing and join insulation at clevis hangers and strut -mounted clamps. Klo-Shure
Insulation Coupling or equal.
H. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1.
2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36.
3. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0
parts sand by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and
hydration.
4. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required.
Weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.
5. Pipe Brackets: "HoldRite" copper plated brackets. Insulate brackets attached to metal
studs with felt.
2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT/VIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment, piping, ductwork and all system appurtenances (including weight of normal
operating contents) shall be adequately restrained to resist seismic forces. Restraint devices
shall be designed and selected to meet seismic requirements as defined in Chapter 16 of the
latest edition of the IBC, with State Amendments, and applicable local codes in accordance with
Seismic Zone E and the applicable Importance Factors and Soil Factors.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 14
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. All anchorages and/or seismic restraints shall be designed by a registered professional Civil or
Structural Engineer licensed in the state of the project. Design shall include:
1. Number, size and location of anchors for floor or roof -mounted equipment. For curb
mounted equipment, provide design of attachment of both the unit to the curb and the
curb to the structure.
2. Number, size and location of vibration isolators, seismic restraint devices and their
anchorage for vibration -isolated and suspended equipment.
3. Number, size and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and ductwork on
shop drawings.
a. The contractor must select a single seismic restraint system pre -designed to meet the
requirements of the current version of the IBC, with State Amendments.
b. Installations not addressed by the selected system must be designed, detailed and
submitted along with the shop drawings.
c. Maximum seismic loads shall be indicated on drawings at each brace location.
d. Drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the registered professional engineer
licensed in the state of the project who designed the layout of the braces.
4. Manufacturers: Mason, M.W. Sausse, Kinetics or approved equal.
C. Isolated Equipment:
1. Spring type isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable and complete with 1/4"
neoprene acoustical friction pads or neoprene cup between the spring and the base plate.
All mountings shall have leveling bolts. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel
to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters,
deflections compressed spring height and solid spring height. A steel housing shall be
included to resist motion due to earthquake loads. A minimum clearance of /e" shall be
maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to
interfere with the spring action. The housing shall be out of contact during normal
operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Manufacturer:
Mason Industries #SLR series or approved equal.
2. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and
complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pad between
the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be
rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional
travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Manufacturer: Mason Industries
#SLF series or approved equal.
3. Spring hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4" thick
neoprene elements at the top and steel springs that are free standing and laterally stable
seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup at the bottom. Spring diameters shall be
no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. The neoprene
element and the cup shall have a neoprene bushing projecting through the steel box.
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the
hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing
and short circuiting the spring. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #30N or approved equal.
4. All -directional seismic snubber restraints shall consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by a one-piece molded bushing or bridge bearing neoprene. A minimum air
gap of 1/4" shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is
made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end shall be removable to allow
inspection of internal clearances. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #Z-1225.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 15
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases designed to
prevent excessive base flexure at start up, prevent misalignment of equipment and
provide attachment points for seismic restraints. Bases shall be rectangular in shape and
constructed of welded wide flange structural steel main members with cross bracing
located at or near each restraint location. Where height saving brackets are required, they
shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" clearance below the base.
Manufacturer: Mason Industries #WF.
6. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms
for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to
provide for suction and discharge elbows and shall be 6"deep for pumps thru 75 HP and
10" deep for pumps 100 HP thru 250HP. Forms shall include minimum concrete
reinforcing consisting of #4 bars welded in place on 6" centers running both ways in a
layer 1-1/2" above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the
anchor bolts sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets
shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" clearance below the base.
Manufacturer: Mason Industries #BMK or K.
7. Suspended isolated equipment and vessels shall be protected with cable restraints.
Cables shall be installed to prevent excessive seismic motion and so arranged that they do
not engage during normal operation, starting or stopping. Seismic sway braces shall
consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables. Cables braces shall be designed to resist
seismic tension loads with a minimum safety factor of 2. Brace end connections shall be
steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle. Steel angles or struts, when
required, shall be clamped to the threaded hanger rods at the seismic sway brace locations
utilizing a minimum of two ductile iron clamps. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #SCB,
SRC and UC.
8. Flexible spherical expansion joints shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers,
liners and Kevlar tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised
face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2"
and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain
shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar
interlocks. Sizes 16" to 24" may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4" to 1 1/2" may have threaded
bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14" and smaller connectors shall
be rated at 250 psi up to 190F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at
250F. 16" and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190F and 135 psi at 250F. Safety
factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have
permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure.
Concentric reducers to the above specifications may be substituted for equal ended
expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of
the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping
locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure
requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If
control rods are used, they must have 1/2" thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough
in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall
be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two
test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in
vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage
frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints
shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Manufacturer: Mason
Industries #SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR, SFU and CR.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 16
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
9. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes
3" and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Hoses must have
sufficient length to accept 1/2" intermittent motion without failure. Hoses shall be
installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the
equipment shafts wherever possible. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #BSS.
D. Rigidly Mounted Equipment: Floor mounted equipment weighing over 400 lbs. and suspended
equipment and vessels of any weight shall be protected by properly sized anchor bolts or hanger
rads and bracing and, if required, by additional seismic restraints as described above for isolated
equipment.
E. All non -isolated piping and ductwork shall be protected in accordance with the SMACNA
Guidelines. At the Contractor's option, for ease of installation, cable restraint system may be
used. Installations not addressed in the SMACNA Guidelines shall be designed by a registered
professional engineer who designed the seismic bracing for the suspended piping and ductwork.
F. Isolator Types: Where equipment isolators are not provided by other sections of the
specification or shown on Drawings, provide factory fabricated isolator types sized by the
manufacturer for the appropriate loading. Model numbers of Mason Industries products are
listed below. Products of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with all
of the requirements of this specification and the Drawings. Manufacturers: Mason Industries,
M.W. Sausse, Kinetics or approved equal.
1. Floor Mounted Pumps: 2" free-standing type housed single coil spring with separate
seismic snubbers. Mount on concrete filled inertia base with weight not less than that
equaling the equipment weight. Mason Industries #BMK base with #SLF springs and
#Z-1225 snubbers.
G. Submittals:
1. Confirmation of responsible design party (Shop Drawings received without this
information will be rejected without review. Architect will be informed of potential
delay of project.)
a. The seismic manufacturer's representative or engineer responsible for preparing the
specified seismic submittal package shall send the following documentation of
qualification:
1) The name and professional engineer's license number of the structural engineer
who will be responsible for preparing, designing, and stamping the seismic shop
drawing information.
2. Shop Drawings submittal
a. Stamped seismic restraint calculations.
b. The type, size and deflection of each isolator proposed.
c. Details for all the isolators with snubbers proposed and seismic bracing.
d. Details for steel frames to be used in conjunction with the isolation and seismic
restraint of the items.
e. Clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators, seismic
restraints and snubbers.
2.4 PIPE PORTALS
A. Where pipe portals are not provided by other sections of Specification, provide prefabricated
insulated pipe portals as required for piping penetrating through the roof where shown on plans.
Field built pipe portals are acceptable alternatives - provide detail of construction for review.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 ,3lumac
230500 - 17
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Standard pipe portals, unless otherwise noted, shall be constructed as follows:
1. Curb shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welds on shell
seams.
2. Insulation to be 1-1/4" thick, 3 lb density rigid fiberglass.
3. Curb to have a raised 3" (minimum), 45° cant.
4. Curb to have 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" wood nailer (minimum).
5. Curb height to be 8" (minimum) above roof deck.
6. Cant shall be raised to match roof insulation thickness.
7. Cover or flashing to be constructed of galvanized steel or other suitable material to
provide sturdy weather tight closure. Provide collars and rubber nipples with draw bands
of sizes required by piping. Size curb, cover and nipples per manufacturer's
recommendations.
8. Manufacturer: Roof Products Systems or Pate.
2.5 EQUIPMENT/PIPING RAILS
A. Where equipment/pipe rails are not provided by other sections of Specification, provide
prefabricated reinforced equipment rails as required for support of equipment and piping. Field
built curbs are acceptable alternatives - provide detail of construction for review.
B. Standard equipment rail, unless otherwise noted, shall be constructed as follows:
1. Construct of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welds on shell seams.
2. Provide internal reinforcing supports welded as required to meet application
requirements.
3. Equipment rails to have raised 3" (minimum), 45° cant.
4. Equipment rails to have 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" wood nailer (minimum) and counterflashing.
5. Equipment rail height to be 6" (minimum) above roof deck.
6. Cant shall be raised to match roof insulation thickness.
C. Equipment rails to be constructed to meet equipment size and weight requirements. Provide
tapered rails to match roof pitch where required.
D. Manufacturer: Pate, Vent Products, Thy Curb or Roof Products Systems.
2.6 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide all access doors and panels to serve equipment under this work, including those which
must be installed, in finished architectural surfaces. Frame of 16 -gauge steel, door of 20 gauge
steel. 1" flange width, continuous piano hinge, key operated, prime coated. Refer to
Architectural Specifications for the required product Specification for each surface. Contractor
is to submit schedule of access panels for approval. Exact size, number and location of access
panels is not shown on Plans. Access doors shall be of a size to permit removal of equipment
for servicing. Access door shall have same rating as the wall or ceiling in which it is mounted.
Provide access panel for each trap primer or concealed valve, for fire and combination
fire/smoke dampers, and for volume dampers. Use no panel smaller than 12" x 12" for simple
manual access, or smaller than 24" x 24" where personnel must pass through. Provide cylinder
lock for access door serving mixing or critical valves in public areas.
B. Included under this work is the responsibility for verifying the exact location and type of each
access panel or door required to serve equipment under this work and in the proper sequence to
keep in tune with construction and with prior approval of the Architect. Access doors in fire
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 18
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
rated partitions and ceilings shall carry all label ratings as required to maintain the rating of the
rated assembly.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor, Karp, Nystrom, or Elmdor/Stoneman.
D. Submit markup of architectural plans showing size and location of access panels required for
equipment access for approval by Architect.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. Mechanical Identification Materials: Provide products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 23 Sections. Where more than single type is
specified for application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each
product category. Stencils are not acceptable.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers:
1. Snap-On Type: Provide pre-printed, semi-rigid snap -on, color coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI A13.1.
2. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure
sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. Secure both ends of markers
with color coded adhesive vinyl tape.
3. Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F
(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
4. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit
of plastic.
C. Plastic Duct Markers:
1. Provide 4 1/2" x 6" laminated plastic, ANSI A13.1 color coded duct markers with white
core lettering.
2.. Nomenclature: Include the following:
a. Direction of air flow.
3. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.).
a. Duct origin (from).
b. Duct destination (to).
c. Design cfm.
4. Provide a minimum of every 20 feet on all ducts with a diameter or width greater than
12".
D. Underground -Type Plastic Line Markers: Provide 6" wide x 4 mils thick multi -ply tape,
consisting of solid metallic foil core between 2 layers of plastic tape. Markers to be permanent,
bright colored, continuous printed, intended for direct burial service.
E. Valve Tags:
1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 1 1/2" diameter 19 -gauge polished brass valve tags with
stamp -engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve
numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Fill tag engraving with black
enamel.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 19
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide 3/32" thick engraved plastic laminate valve tags,
with piping system abbreviations in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2"
high, and with 5/32" hole for fasteners.
3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass
S -hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured
specifically for that purpose.
4. Access Panel Markers: Provide 1/16" thick engraved plastic laminate access panel
markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include 1/8"
center hole to allow attachment.
5. Non -potable Water Tags: 1/16" thick, engraved, plastic tags as indicated on Drawings.
F. Plastic Equipment Signs:
1. Provide 4-1/2" x 6" plastic laminate sign, ANSI A.13 color coded with engraved white
core lettering.
2. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive
where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
3. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as
possible:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters, such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm,
etc.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Craftmark, Seton, Brady, or Brimar.
2.8 ELECTRICAL
A. General:
1. All electrical material, equipment, and apparatus specified herein shall conform to the
requirements of Division 26.
2. Provide all motors for equipment specified herein. Provide motor starters, controllers,
and other electrical apparatus and wiring which are required for the operation of the
equipment specified herein.
3. Set and align all motors and drives in equipment specified herein.
4. Provide expanded metal or solid sheet metal guards on all V -belt drives to totally enclose
the drive on all sides. Provide holes for tachometer readings. Support guards separately
from rotating equipment.
5. Provide for all rotating shafts, couplings, etc., a solid sheet metal, inverted "U" cover
over the entire length of the exposed shaft and support separately from rotating
equipment. Cover shall extend to below the bottom of the shaft and coupling, and shall
meet the requirements of the State Industrial Safety Regulations.
6. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for
mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL listed/labeled as suitable for
location and use - no exceptions.
C. Motors:
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 20
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors,
more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment
Specifications.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads.
3. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to
operate in the service factor range. Unless otherwise noted on plans, all motors 'A HP or
larger shall be rated for 208 or 460 volt, 3-phase, operation. Unless otherwise noted on
plans, all motors less than 1/2 HP shall be rated for 120 volt, single phase operation.
4. Temperature Rating: Motor meets class B rise with class F insulation.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly -phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.
6. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design
"B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.
a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 56; use driven equipment manufacturer's
standards to suit specific application.
b. VFD driven motors to be provided rated for inverter duty (NEMA Standard MG -1,
Part 31) and equipped with a shaft grounding device or as an insulated bearing motor.
c. Bearings:
1) Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2) Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible
for regular maintenance.
3) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives product lateral
or axial thrust in motor.
4) For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted.
5) Enclosure Type:
a) Open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or
remotely located during operation.
b) Guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.
c) Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed.
d. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection where external overload
protection is not provided and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for
signaling and stopping motor at starter.
e. Noise Rating: "Quiet."
f. Efficiency: Motors shall have a minimum efficiency per governing State or Federal
codes, whichever is higher.
g. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, special features and similar information.
D. Starters and Electrical Devices:
1. Motor Starter Characteristics:
a. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet
locations shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs.
b. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the
driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.
2, Manual switches shall have pilot lights and all required switch positions for multi -speed
motors. Overload Protection: Melting alloy or bi-metallic type thermal overload relays,
sized according to actual operating current (field measured).
3. Magnetic Starters:
a. Heavy duty, oil resistant, hand -off -auto (HOA), or as indicated, and pilot lights,
properly arranged for single speed or multi -speed operation as indicated.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 21
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
b. Trip -free thermal overload relays, each phase, sized according to actual operating
current (field measured).
c. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with
control requirements of Division 23 Controls sections.
d. Built-in primary and secondary fused control circuit transformer, supplied from load
side of equipment disconnect.
e. Externally operated manual reset.
f. Under -voltage release or protection for all motors over 20 hp.
4. Motor Connections: Liquid tight, flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords
are specifically indicated.
E. Low Voltage Control Wiring:
1. General: 14 gauge, Type THHN, color coded, installed in conduit.
2. Manufacturer: General Cable Corp., Alcan Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp.,
Senator Wire and Cable Co., or Southwire Co.
F. Disconnect Switches:
1. Fusible Switches: For equipment 1/2 HP or larger, provide fused, each phase; heavy
duty; horsepower rated; spring loaded quick -make, quick -break mechanism; dead front
line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring
reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating
lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN" position; arc quenchers; capacity and
characteristics as indicated.
2. Non -Fusible Switches: For equipment less than 1/2 horsepower, switch shall be
horsepower rated; toggle switch type with thermal overload quantity of poles and voltage
rating as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master mechanics and shall result
in an installation consistent with the best practices of trades.
B. Install work uniform, level and plumb, in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any
diagonal, or otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by
Architect.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of
articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or
covered in these Specifications.
1. If the contractor must deviate from the manufacturer's recommendations provide a letter
from the manufacturer indicating the clearance to be provided is acceptable for scheduled
performance and maintenance.
3.3 INSTALLATION
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 22
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Coordinate the work between the various Mechanical Sections and with the work specified
under other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper
supervision or failure to make proper and timely provisions, the alternations shall be made to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and at the Contractor's cost. Coordinate wall and ceiling work
with the General Contractor, and his subcontractors in locating ceiling air outlets, wall registers,
etc.
B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or
defected materials.
3.4 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
A. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors, and associated work, installer shall meet at
project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and
testing agency representatives, (if any), installers of other work with requirements specified.
B. Installation of Building Attachments: Install building attachments at required locations within
concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Install additional building attachments
where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed. Fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength
less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through opening at top of inserts.
C. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports, and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including, but not limited to, proper placement of inserts, anchors, and other
building structural attachments.
D. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on
trapeze type hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together
by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for
smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not
support piping from other piping.
E. Install hangers within 12 inches of every change in piping direction, end of pipe run or
concentrated load, and within 36 inches of every major piece of equipment. Hangers shall be
installed on both sides of flexible connections. Where flexible connection connects directly to a
piece of equipment only one hanger is required.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install
hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
G. Support sprinkler piping and gas independently of other piping.
H. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are
copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 23
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
I. Hanger Spacing in accordance with following minimum schedules (other spacings and rod sizes
may be used in accordance with the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual using a safety factor
of five):
1. Copper Pipe:
Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing Rod Size
1/2" to 2" 6 feet 3/8"
2. Plastic/Fiberglass Pipe:
Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing Rod Size
1/2" to 2" 4 feet 3/8"
3. Caulked Bell and Spigot and Glass Pipe: Provide hanger for each section of pipe, located
at shoulder of bell. Where an excessive number of fittings are installed between hangers,
provide additional reinforcing.
3. Provisions for Movement:
1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connecting equipment.
3. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements:
a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers, (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation.
b. Shields: Where low compressive strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated
on cold or chilled water piping, install shields or inserts.
c. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated install protection
saddles.
K. Installation of Anchors:
1. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent excessive stresses and to prevent transfer of
loading and stresses to connected equipment.
2. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to
structure.
3. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and
forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.
4. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal
pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends.
L. Equipment Supports:
1. Provide all concrete bases, unless otherwise furnished as work of Division 03. Furnish to
Division 03 Contractor scaled layouts of all required bases, with dimensions of bases, and
location to column centerlines. Furnish templates, anchor bolts, and accessories
necessary for base construction.
2. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from
structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide
factory -fabricated tank saddles for tanks.
M. Adjusting:
1. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 24
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment
to proper level and elevations.
3. Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 ROOF CURBS, EQUIPMENT RAILS, PIPE PORTALS
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with other trades so units are installed when roofing is being installed.
C. Verify roof insulation thickness and adjust raise of cant to match.
3.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with Division 26 work to provide complete systems as
required to operate all mechanical devices installed under this Division of work.
B. Installation of Electrical Connections: Furnish, install, and wire (except as may be otherwise
indicated) all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, etc., motors and controls in accordance with
the following schedule and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions
and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL,
NEC, and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these
Specifications.
C. Division 23 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled mechanical equipment
which is specified in Division 23 Specifications or scheduled on Division 23 Drawings. The
specific division of responsibilities between Division 23 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this
equipment is as follows:
1. Division 23 Mechanical Responsibilities:
a. MOTORS: Furnish and install all motors necessary for mechanical equipment.
b. MAGNETIC STARTERS: Furnish all magnetic starters whether manually or
automatically controlled which are necessary for mechanical equipment. Furnish
these starters with all control relays or transformers necessary to interface with
mechanical controls. If the starter is factory installed on a piece of Division 23
equipment, also furnish and install the power wiring between starter and motor.
c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Provide all VFD's associated with mechanical
equipment. If the drive is installed on a piece of factory assembled equipment the
wiring between motor and drive is to be provided as part of the factory equipment.
d. DISCONNECTS: Provide the disconnects which are part of factory wired Division
23 equipment. Factory wiring to include wiring between motor and disconnect or
combination starter/disconnect.
e. CONTROLS: Division 23 Contractor (including the temperature controls
subcontractor) is responsible for the following equipment in its entirety. This
equipment includes but is not limited to the following:
1) Control relays necessary for controlling Division 23 equipment.
2) Control transformers necessary for providing power to controls for Division 23
equipment.
3) Line voltage thermostats.
4) Low or non -load voltage control components.
BASIC HV.AC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 25
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5) Remote bulb thermostats.
6) Non -life safety related valve or damper actuators.
7) Float switches.
8) Solenoid valves, EP and PE switches.
9) Refrigeration controls. (Division 26 provides power to refrigeration panels.)
f. FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT:
1) Fire/Smoke Dampers: Division 23 is responsible for providing and physically
installing the damper and for installing any required control interface wiring to
Division 23 controls.
a) Where fire/smoke dampers are part of an integrated smoke control system,
Division 23 is responsible for providing dampers with necessary end
switches for proof of closure. (See Section 233113.)
b) Where these dampers are not part of an integrated area wide smoke detection
system, Division 23 is responsible for providing each fire/smoke damper
with a dedicated duct detector installed per the requirements of the building
code. (See Section 233113). If not integral with the damper assembly, the
detector is to be installed by Div. 23 but wired for damper control by Div. 26.
2) Fire Sprinkler System: Division 23 is responsible for providing necessary
controls including flow switches and alarm bells.
3) Specialized fire suppression systems: Division 23 is responsible for providing
necessary system controls and any required control interface wiring to these
controls. Division 26 is responsible for bringing power to point of connection
with the system.
D. Division 26 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled mechanical equipment,
which is specified in Division 23 Specifications or scheduled on Division 23 Drawings. The
specific division of responsibilities between Division 23 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this
equipment is as follows:
I. Division 26 Electrical Responsibilities:
a. MOTORS: Provide the power wiring for the motors.
b. MAGNETIC STARTERS: Except where magnetic starters are factory installed on
Division 23 factory assembled equipment, Division 26 is to install magnetic starters
furnished by Division 23 and install the necessary power wiring to the starter and
from the starter to the motor. In the case of factory installed starters, Division 26 is
to install the necessary power wiring to the starter.
c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Physically mount all VFD's, which are not
specified to be installed on Division 23 factory assembled equipment. Provide the
necessary power wiring to the VFD and from the VFD to the motor except in the case
of factory installed VFD's where wiring between the motor and VFD is to be by
Division 23. Where disconnects are installed between a VFD and a motor provide
the interlocking wiring between the disconnect and VFD to insure that the drive is
shutdown simultaneously with motor.
d. DISCONNECTS: Provide all disconnects necessary for Division 23 mechanical
equipment which are not provided as part of factory wired Division 23 equipment.
Provide power wiring to all disconnects. In addition provide power wiring between
motor and disconnect when the disconnect is not factory installed. See also Variable
Frequency Drive above for special wiring requirements.
e. CONTROLS: Division 26 Contractor is responsible for providing power to control
panels and control circuit outlets.
f. FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT:
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 26
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1) Fire/Smoke Dampers: Division 26 is responsible for power wiring to the damper
and as follows:
a) Where these dampers are part of an integrated smoke control system
Division 26 is responsible for providing the detectors and for all fire
detection system wiring necessary to integrate dampers and related end
switches into the system.
b) Where these dampers are not part of an integrated area wide smoke detection
system, Division 23 is responsible for providing each fire/smoke damper
with a dedicated duct detector installed per the requirements of the building
code. (See Section 233113). If not integral with the damper assembly, the
detector is to be installed by Div. 23 but wired for damper control by Div. 26.
2) Fire Sprinkler System: Division 26 is responsible for providing power wiring to
fire protection controls including flow switches and alarm bells.
3) Specialized fire suppression systems: Division 26 is responsible for providing
power wiring to suppression system and its controls.
2. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation,
as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment
with other work.
3.. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match
conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power
supplies and installed equipment.
4.. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and operational
facilities, unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner,
or Architect/Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing
facilities. When necessary, schedule momentary outages for replacing existing wiring
systems with new wiring systems. When that "cutting -over" has been successfully
accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.
5. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation
resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced.
6. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation
properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.
Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also
avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.
E. Motors and Motor Control Equipment: Conform to the standards of the NEMA. Equip motors
with magnetic or manual line starters with overload protection. Motor starters and line voltage
controls shall be installed under Electrical Section but located and coordinated as required under
this Section of the work. Starters shall be combination type with non -fusible disconnect
switches. All single phase fractional horsepower motors shall have built-in overload protection.
3.7 PAINTING
A. All painting shall be provided under this Division work, unless otherwise specified under
Section 099100: Painting. Painting schemes shall comply with ANSI A13.1. Paint all exposed
materials such as piping, ductwork, equipment, insulation, steel, etc. Exposed gas piping inside
and outside the building shall be painted with two coats of "Rust-O-Leum" Yellow. The inside
surface of visible ductwork above diffusers/grilles shall be painted flat black. Exposed copper
indirect waste piping serving food service equipment shall be painted metallic chrome.
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008Glumac
230500 - 27
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. All exposed work under Division 23 shall receive either a factory finish or a field prime coat
finish, except:
1. Exposed copper piping.
2. Aluminum jacketed outdoor insulated piping.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. General: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting, or
other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to
installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
B. Piping System Identification:
1. Install pipe markers on each system indicated to receive identification, and include
arrows to show normal direction of flow.
2. Locate pipe markers as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each
pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter
non -accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points which permit view of concealed
piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced horizontally at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run, with
minimum of one in each room. Vertically spaced at each story transversed.
C. Underground Piping Identification: During backfilling/topsoiling of each exterior underground
piping system, install continuous underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over
buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common
trench and do not exceed overall width of 16", install single line marker.
D. Ductwork Identification: A minimum of every 20 feet for all ductwork 12 inch or more in
diameter or width.
E. Mechanical Equipment Identification: Locate engraved plastic laminate signs on or near each
major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide signs for the
following:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.
2. Meters, gauges, thermometers, and similar units.
3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
4. Packaged HVAC central -station and zone -type units.
F. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between
multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. Equipment signs shall include an
identification of the area or other equipment served by the equipment being labeled.
3.9 VIBRATION AND DYNAMIC BALANCING
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 28
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Vibration tolerances shall be as specified by the "International Research and Development
Corporation", Worthington, Ohio, measured by the displacement, peak to peak, as follows:
l.. All Fans: Below severity chart labeled "FAIR", maximum velocity of 0.0785 in/sec,
peak.
•-• and Electric Motors: Below severity chart labeled "SLIGHTLY ROUGH",
maximum vibration velocity of 0.157 in/sec, peak.
Compressors: Same as pumps.
B. Correction shall be made to all equipment, which exceeds vibration tolerances specified above.
Final vibration levels shall be reported as described above.
3.10 TESTING
A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment,
including test pumps, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Test all rotational
equipment for proper direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing, certify to the Architect,
in writing, that the specified tests have been performed and that the installation complies with
the specified requirements and provide a report of the test observations signed by qualified
inspector.
B. Ductwork: Test all air quantities as specified in Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing. Pressure tests per SMACNA.
C. Registers and Diffusers: Test for proper operation of manually operated control feature. Test
all air quantities as specified in Section 230593 — Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
D. Ductwork Specialties: Test all operable ductwork specialties for proper operation. Check all
fire, smoke and fire/smoke dampers to ensure that they are 100% open.
E. Temperature Control: Test all control functions to assure that all systems are controlling as
specified or as otherwise necessary and that all controls are adjusted to maintain proper room
temperatures. The manufacturer's representative shall perform all tests.
END OF SECTION 230500
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 29
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. .All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
230500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified herein.
1.2 WORK RELATED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 230500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 230900: Controls and Instrumentation
C. Section 233113: Air Distribution
D. Division 26: Electrical.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Scope: Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work required by this Section is indicated on
the drawings, in schedules, and by the requirements of this Section, and Section 230500 -Basic
Mechanical Requirements.
B. Systems: Testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this Section shall include, but not be
limited to, the following systems:
1. Air handling systems including supply, return and exhaust.
2. Air distribution ductwork including supply, return and exhaust.
3. Automatic temperature control system.
4. General exhaust systems.
5. Domestic hot water supply and return.
6. Instruction of Owner's personnel for future balancing of systems.
C. Reference Standards
1. ASHRAE-Standard 111--1988 Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration
Systems.
2. ASHRAE —2003 HVAC Applications Handbook: Chapter 37 --Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing.
3. AABC--National Standards for Total System Balance.
4. NEBB--Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental
Systems.
5, •SMACNA--HVAC Systems --Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
6.. Sheet Metal Industry --Testing, Adjusting, Balancing Bureau (TABB) Certified
Technician Standards, Procedures and Specifications.
7.. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with the following:
a. S1.4Specification For Sound Level Meters.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
b. S 1.11 Specification For Octave -Band and Fractional -Octave -Band Analog and Digital
Filters.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractors Qualifications: A specialist certified by the National Environmental Balancing
Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) with at least 5 years of experience
in those testing, adjusting and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project,
who is not the installer of the system to be tested and is otherwise independent of the project.
B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed by a certified NEBB technician or a
certified AABC technician under direct field supervision of a Certified NEBB Supervisor or a
Certified AABC Supervisor.
C. Penalty: The Contractor shall submit the name of the organization he proposes to employ for
approval within 30 days after contract award. If the Contractor fails to submit the name of an
acceptable agency within the specified time, a firm may be selected to accomplish the work, and
this selection shall be binding upon the Contractor at no additional cost.
D. Retainages: In addition to any other sums retained or withheld pursuant to the provisions of this
Contract, the amount of dollars will be withheld from payments to the contractor until such time
as the work has been completed and accepted. In no event will this amount be paid to the
Contractor prior to 60 days following acceptance of the project; during such time, the
Contractor shall investigate and correct any reported deficiencies unless such deficiencies are a
result of unauthorized tampering by building occupants.
E. Calibration of Testing Instruments: All measurement instruments used for testing, adjusting,
balancing, and commissioning shall be calibrated. The time between the most recent calibration
data and the final test report date shall not be over 6 months
F. Testing and balancing agency, as part of its contract, shall act as authorized inspection agency
responsible to Consulting Engineer and Owner, and shall list all items that are installed
incorrectly, require correction, or have not been installed in accordance with contract Drawings
and Specifications, pertaining to air distribution, cooling and heating systems. The testing and
balancing agency is required to provide written reports of all deficiencies and proposed
recommendations to the Owner' Representative, Contractor, Architect and Engineer.
G. The testing and balancing agency shall provide with his bid a performance guarantee covering
all phases of the work as herein specified.
H. The General and mechanical contractors shall cooperate with the selected testing and balancing
agency in the following manner:
1. Provide sufficient time before final completion dates so that tests and balancing can be
accomplished.
2. The various system installers, suppliers and contractors shall provide all required
materials, labor and tools to make corrections when required without undue delay. Install
balancing dampers as required by testing and balancing agency.
3. The contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and
equipment into full operation and shall continue the operation of the same during each
working day of testing and balancing.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
4. Testing and balancing agency shall be kept informed of any major changes made to the
system during construction, and shall be provided with a complete set of Record
Drawings.
5. The General Contractor shall make space and other facilities available to the testing and
balancing agency to enable their work to progress. The General Contractor shall
schedule the work of other trades to avoid conflicts with this work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to the Submittals requirements of Division 01.
B. Forms: The Contractor shall deliver a complete copy of either NEBB or AABC standard forms
for testing and balancing work associated with the project. These forms shall serve as specific
guidelines for producing final test report. Hybrid or non -standards forms are not acceptable.
Data shall include, but not be limited to, a title page with building information, instrument lists,
air flows, water flows, temperatures, sound levels, capacities, nameplate data.
C. Test Reports: Provide six (6) certified test reports, signed by the test and balance supervisor
who performed the work. The final reports shall include identification and types of instruments
used, and their most recent calibration date, and key plans identifying all inlets and outlets.
Final test reports shall be typed. Hand written reports are not acceptable.
D. Maintenance Data: Include, in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports and
identification of instruments.
E. Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit the certified individual qualifications of all persons
responsible for supervising and performing the actual work and the name of the certifying
engineer. Provide a reference list of five (5) similar size projects with contact person and
telephone number.
1.6 AGENDA
A. Agenda: A preliminary report and agenda shall be submitted and approved prior to the start of
testing and balancing work.
1. Review plans and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected systems, and
submit a report indicating any deficiencies in the systems that would preclude the proper
adjusting, balancing, and testing of the systems.
2. The agenda shall include a general description of each air and water system with its
associated equipment and operation cycles for heating and cooling.
3. The agenda shall include a list of all air and water flows to be performed at all
mechanical equipment.
4. The agenda shall incorporate the proposed selection points for sound measurements,
including typical spaces as well as sound sensitive areas such as conference rooms.
5. The agenda shall also include specific test procedures and parameters for determining
specified quantities (e.g. flow, drafts, sound levels) from the actual field measurements to
establish compliance with contract requirements. Samples of forms showing application
of procedures and calculations to typical systems shall be submitted.
6. Specific test procedures for measuring air quantities at terminals shall specify type of
instrument to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and factors for:
a. Air terminal configuration.
b. Flow direction (supply or exhaust).
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 3
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
c. Velocity corrections.
d. Effective area applicable to each size and type of air terminal.
e. Density corrections.
7. The agenda shall include identification and types of measurement instruments to be used,
and their most recent calibration date.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. General: Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until the following
conditions have been met.
1. Work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work
yet to be completed on the tested equipment.
2. Work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt
and discarded building materials.
3. All architectural openings (doors, windows, and other openings) which may affect the
operation of the system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced shall be at their normal states.
4. All related mechanical systems which may affect the operation of the system to be tested,
adjusted, and balanced shall be at their normal operating conditions.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST HOLES
A. Test holes shall be provided in ducts, housings and pipes as necessary for the proper air and
water measurements and to balance systems. At each location where ducts or plenums are
insulated, test holes shall be provided with an approved extension with plug fitting.
2.2 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Material: Seal, patch and repair ductwork, piping and equipment drilled or cut for testing
purposes.
1. Plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
2. Piping shall be capped with materials the same as the piping system.
3. Insulation shall be neatly hemmed with metal or plastic edging, leaving test points visible
for future testing.
2.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Standards: Utilize instruments and equipment of type, precision, and capacity as recommended
in the NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems" and AABC manual MN -1.
B. Test Instruments: All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration
histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Each test instrument shall be
calibrated by an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. A representative has the right to
request instrument recalibration, or the use of other instruments and test methodology, where
accuracy of readings is questionable.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 4
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Additional Instruments: Permanently installed measuring instruments, such as temperature and
pressure gauges, shall be checked against transfer standard instruments. Any instrument which
does not meet specification requirement shall be replaced or recalibrated.
D. Cone Instruments: The Contractor shall employ manufactured enclosure type cones, capable of
air volume direct readings, for all diffuser/grille/register air flow measurements. The readout
meters shall meet calibration requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURES AND INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL
A. Requirements: All systems and components thereof shall be adjusted to perform as required by
drawings and specifications.
B. Test Duration: Operating tests of heating and cooling coils, fans, and other equipment shall be
of not less than four hours duration after stabilized operating conditions have been established.
Capacities shall be based on temperatures and air and water quantities measured during such
tests.
C. Instrumentation: Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the
approved agenda.
1. All instruments shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's certified
instructions.
2. All labor, instruments, and appliances required shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Permanently installed instruments used for the tests (e.g., flow meters and Btu meters)
shall not be installed until the entire system has been cleaned and ready for operation.
3.2 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
A. The testing and balancing agency shall direct the placement of all duct mounted smoke
detectors.
1. Obtain information from the Contractor who is to furnish the smoke detectors on the
proper device placement and installation limitations and on the proper differential
pressure across the sampling tubes of the duct detectors.
2. Based on the submitted manufacturer's installation guidelines indicate the proper
mounting location to the installing Contractor.
B. After the installation of all smoke detectors test them again in the final installation position and
report differential pressures.
3.3 A.IR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Adjustments: Adjust all air handling systems to provide approximate design air quantity to or
through, each component, and to maintain stable and comfortable interior temperatures, free of
drafts or stagnant conditions. Adjusting and balancing of all systems shall be conducted during
periods of the year approximating maximum seasonal operation.
B. Equalizers: Equalizing devices shall be adjusted to provide uniform velocity across the inlets
(duct side for supply) of terminals prior to measuring flow rates.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Balance: Flow adjusting (volume control) devices shall be used to balance air quantities (i.e.,
proportion flow between various terminals comprising system) to the extent that their
adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound (i.e., in excess of specified limits).
1. Balancing between runs (submains, branch mains, and branches) generally shall be
accomplished by flow regulating devices at, or in, the divided -flow fitting.
2. Restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at terminals shall be minimal.
3. Final measurements of air quality shall be made after the air terminal has been adjusted to
provide the optimum air patterns of diffusion.
D. Fan Adjustment: Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan
speeds or axial -flow fan wheel blade pitch. Damper restriction of a system's total flow may be
used only for systems with direct -connected fans (without adjustable pitch blades), provided
system pressure is less than 1/2 -inch W.G. and sound level criteria is met.
E. Air Measurement: Where air quantity measuring devices are specified in other sections such
systems shall be used as a cross-check of portable measuring equipment.
1. Except as specifically indicated herein, pitot tube traverses shall be made of each duct to
measure air flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques
shall conform to the ASHRAE "Handbook Fundamentals Inch Pound Edition."
2. For ducts serving modular office areas with movable partitions, which are subject to
change, pitot tube traverses may be omitted provided the duct serves only a single room
or space and its design volume is less than 2000 cfrn. In lieu of pitot tube traverses,
airflow in the duct shall be determined by totaling volume of individual terminals served,
measured as described herein.
3. Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000 (fpm/cfm), air
quantity may be determined by measurements at terminals served.
F. Test Holes: Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows,
bends, take -offs, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow
measurements.
G. Air Terminal Balancing: Generally, measurement of flow rates by means of velocity meters
applied to individual terminals, with or without cones or other adapters, shall be used only for
balancing. Measurement of air quantities at each type of air terminal (inlet and outlet) shall be
determined by the method approved for the balancing agenda. Laboratory tests shall be
conducted to prove of methodology when so directed. Such tests shall be conducted in
conformance with applicable ASHRAE or American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
codes and shall be made at no cost.
H. Air Motion: Air motion and distribution shall be as specified and indicated on drawings. The
Contractor at no additional cost shall, in addition to air motion measurements, make smoke tests
wherever requested to demonstrate the air distribution from air terminals.
I. Air System Test and Balance Procedure: Perform the following tests, and balance each system
in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Test and adjust blower RPM to design requirements.
2. Test and record motor full load amperes.
3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at fans.
4. Test and record system pressures, suction and discharge.
5. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air, CFM.
6. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 6
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
7. Test and record entering air temperatures.
8. Test and record leaving air temperatures.
9. Adjust all supply, return and exhaust air ducts to proper design CFM.
10. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return.
11. Test and adjust duct systems and each diffuser, grille, and/or register to within 10% of
design requirements.
12. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location and area.
13. Size, type and manufacturer of VAV boxes, diffusers, grilles, registers and all tested
equipment shall be identified and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment shall be
used to make required calculations.
14. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required FPM velocity
and test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustment.
15. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, setting adjustments of
automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. Testing
agency shall check all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. Room
thermostats shall be checked for cooling and heating response.
16. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas.
17. Adjust overall system balances to allow all self-closing exterior doors to close from any
open position. Maximum interior air pressure in a 100% outside air intake mode shall not
exceed 0.05" static pressure relative to the outside air pressure.
18. As part of the work of this contract, the HVAC contractor shall make any changes in the
pulleys, belts and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance as
recommended by air balance agency, at no additional cost to Owner.
19. After air balancing is completed and RPM determined, HVAC Contractor shall provide
fixed pitch pulleys.
20. All mixing boxes, VAV air valves, control dampers, smoke dampers and similar devices
which operate at 100% shut off shall be tested for leakage.
21. Variable Air Volume Fan Systems: The primary balancing mode is 100% outside air
with all terminal boxes on a full call for cooling. Also check and record performance at
minimum outside air with all terminal boxes on call for full cooling and at minimum
outside air with all terminal boxes on call for full heating. Verify that the systems are
operating on a stable part of the fan curves in each mode. Record final duct static
controller settings.
3.4 AIR SYSTEM DATA
A. Report: The certified report shall include for each air handling system the data listed below.
1. Equipment (Fan or Factory Fabricated Station Unit):
a. Installation data
1) Manufacturer and model
2) Size
3) Arrangement, discharge and class
4) Motor hp, voltage, phase, cycles, and full load amps
5) Location and local identification data
b. Design data
1) Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications.
c. Fan recorded (test) data
1) cfm
2) static pressure
3) rpm
4) motor operating amps
TESTING, .ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5) motor operating bhp
2. Duct Systems:
a. Duct air quantities (maximum and minimum) - main, submains, branches, outdoor
(outside) air, total air, and exhaust:
1) duct size(s)
2) number of pitot tube (pressure measurements)
3) sum of velocity measurements (Note: Do not add pressure measurements)
4) average velocity
5) recorded (test) cfm
6) design cfrn
b. Individual air terminals
1) terminal identification supply or exhaust, location and number designation
2) type size, manufacturer and catalog identification applicable factor for
application, velocity, area, etc., and designated area
3) design and recorded velocities - fpm (state "core," "inlet," etc., as applicable)
4) design and recorded quantities - cfm (deflector vane or diffusion cone settings)
3.5 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Preparation:
1. Open all valves to full open position. Close coil bypass stop valves. Set mixing valve to
full coil flow.
2. Remove all strainers and clean same. Reinstall.
3. Examine water system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned.
4. Check pump rotation.
5. Check expansion tank to determine they are not air bound and the system is completely
full of water.
6. Check all air vents at high points of water systems and determine that all are installed and
operating freely.
7. Check operation of automatic bypass valve.
8. Check and set operating temperatures of all equipment at design requirements.
9. Complete air balance must have been accomplished before actual water balance begins.
B. Adjustment: All heating, cooling and condensing water systems shall be adjusted to provide
required quantity to or through each component.
C. Metering: Water quantities and pressures shall be measured with calibrated meters.
1. Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metering fittings and pressure gauges shall be used to
measure water flow rates and balance systems. Systems shall be adjusted to provide the
approved pressure drops through the heat transfer equipment (coils except room units,
converters, etc.) prior to the capacity testing.
2. Where flow metering fittings are not installed, in air/water type heat transfer equipment,
flow balance shall be determined by measuring the air side energy differential across the
heat transfer equipment. Measurement of water temperature differential shall be
performed with the air system, adjusted as described herein, in operation.
D. Automatic Controls: Automatic control valves shall be positioned for full flow through the heat
transfer equipment of the system during tests.
E. Flow: Flow through bypass circuits at three-way valves shall be adjusted to equal that through
the supply circuit, when the valve is in the bypass position.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 8
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
F. Distribution: Adjustment of distribution shall be effected by means of balancing devices
(cocks, valves, and fittings) and automatic flow control valves as provided; service valves shall
not be used.
1. Where automatic flow control valves are utilized in lieu of Venturi tubes, only pressure
differential need be recorded, provided that the pressure is at least the minimum
applicable to the tag rating.
G. Special Procedures: Where available pump capacity (as designed) is less than total flow
requirements of individual heat transfer units of system served, full flow may be simulated by
the temporary restriction of flow to portions of the system; specific procedures shall be
delineated in the agenda.
H. Water System Test and Balance Procedure: Perform the following tests, and balance each
system in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Pump operating suction and discharge pressures and final total dynamic head.
2. List all mechanical specifications of pumps.
3. Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor.
4. Water metering device readings.
3.6 WATER SYSTEM DATA
A. R.eport: The certified report for reach water system shall include the data listed below.
1. Pumps:
a. Installation data
1) manufacturer and model
2) size
3) type drive
4) motor hp, voltage, phase, and full load amps
b. Design data
1) gpm
2) head
3) rpm and amps
c. Recorded data
1) discharge pressures (full -flow and no -flow)
2) suction pressures (full -flow and no -flow) operating head
3) operating gpm (from pump curves if metering is not provided) no-load
4) amps
5) full -flow amps
6) no -flow amps
3.7 SOUND TEST PROCEDURES
A. Scope: Tests of sound levels shall be made at each selection point included in the agenda.
B. Timing: Sound level measurements shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied, or
when activity in surrounding areas and background noise level in areas tested are at a minimum
and relatively free from sudden changes in noise levels.
1. Measurements shall be taken with all equipment turned off, except that being tested.
2. The required sound levels shall be measured at any point within a room not less than 6
feet from an air terminal or room unit, and not closer than 3 feet from any floor, wall, or
ceiling surface.
TESTING, .ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 9
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Meters: Sound levels shall be measured with a sound meter complying with ANSI S1.4. The
"A" scale shall be used to measure over all sound levels. To determine the specified octave
band levels, the above sound level meter, set on "C" scale, shall be supplemented by an octave
band analyzer complying with ANSI SI.11.
D. Equipment Components: The "Equipment Component" of room sound equals LPt-C. The
"Equipment Component" of room sound (noise) levels shall be determined for each of eight
octave bands as follows:
1. Measure room sound pressure level "LPb" with equipment to be tested shut off.
2. Measure room sound pressure level "LPt" with equipment to be tested turned on.
3. Calculate LPt-LPb; if this value is less than 1, applicable test must be rerun with lower
background level (LPb) unless LPt is within sound pressure level specified for
equipment.
4. Determine "c" from the table below.
LPt-LPb (db)
c (db)
1
7
2
4
3
3
4 to 4- '/z
2
5to5-1/2
1—'/Z
6 to 7- '/
1
8 t 12
'/1
over 12
0
3.8 SOUND LEVEL DATA
A. Report: certified report shall record data on sound levels, taken at each selected location, as
follows:
1. Source of sound and location.
2. Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to measuring instrument.
3. "A" scale readings equipment being tested turned off (ambient) equipment being tested
turned on (operating conditions).
4. Readings at each specified octave band frequency equipment being tested turned off
(ambient) equipment being tested turned on (operating conditions).
5. "Equipment Components" of sound (noise) levels with applicable calculations per
"Sound Test Procedures".
6. Graph showing relationship between pressure levels specified and recorded readings
B. Retest: Subsequent to any correctional construction work, such as acoustic corrections,
measurement shall be made to verify that associated air and water quantities, as previously
measured, have not been disrupted.
1. Certified report shall record all sound data, and their locations, after final adjustments of
air and water systems involves.
3.9 CERTIFIED REPORTS
A. Submittals: Six (6) copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system
performance, air motion (fpm), and sound pressure levels, shall be submitted prior to final tests
and inspection.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 10
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Instrument Records: Types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments shall be
included.
C. Reports: Reports shall conspicuously identify items not conforming to contract requirements,
or obvious malfunction and design deficiencies.
D. Certification: Certification shall include checking of adherence to agenda, of calculations, of
procedures, and evaluation of final summaries.
3.10 FINAL COMMISSIONING TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Scope: Test shall be made to demonstrate that capacities and performance of air and water
systems comply with contract requirements.
1. At the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall recheck, random selection of data
(water and air quantities, air motion, and sound levels) recorded in the certified report. In
addition, all courtrooms, auditoriums, and conference rooms shall be rechecked.
2. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the commissioning team.
3. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis
of certified report.
4. Selections for recheck (specific plus random), in general, will not exceed 25 percent of
the total number tabulated in the report, except that special air systems may require a
complete recheck for safety reasons.
B. Retests: If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of 10 percent or more from, or a sound
level of 2 db or more greater than, that recorded in the certified report listings, as 10 percent or
more of the rechecked selections, the report shall be automatically rejected. In the event the
report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new certified
reports submitted, and new inspection tests made, all at no additional cost. Retainage time shall
be based on the date of the final acceptance of the certified report.
C. Marking of Settings: Following final acceptance of certified reports, the settings of all valves,
splitters, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked by the Contractor
so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Devices shall not be marked until
after final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230593 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and
Section 230500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified
herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall include, but not necessarily be
limited to, providing insulation for the following:
1. Ductwork
a. All supply air ductwork, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
b. All return air ductwork, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
c. Acoustical duct lining, in vertical/horizontal supply and return ducts within twenty
feet (20') of air handling equipment and where otherwise shown on drawings.
d. Outside air ductwork in return plenums, mechanical rooms and in freezing climates
e. Exhaust air ductwork in cold air plenums.
f. Vapor/moisture ductwork.
g. Insulation to protect fire rated exhaust systems
2, Piping:
a. Heating hot water supply and return piping.
b. Chilled water supply and return piping.
c. Condenser water supply and return piping.
d. Steam and condensate return piping.
e. Heat recovery piping
f. Process piping
g. Valves, pumps, air separators, strainers and fittings in insulated piping systems.
3. Hot and cold equipment.
a. Generator exhaust systems.
4. Plenums and equipment rooms, as noted.
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this Section include the following:
1. Flexible elastomeric closed cell insulation
2. Fiberglass duct insulation.
3. Natural fiber duct liner.
4. Insulation jackets.
5. Insulation accessories.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 220501: Plumbing.
B. Section 230500: Basic Materials and Methods.
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Section 232113: HVAC Piping, Valves and Specialties.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Ambient: The air temperature to be maintained in a conditioned room. Typically between 70°F
and 78°F.
B. Insert: Spacer placed between the pipe support system and the piping to allow for the space
required for insulation.
C. Insulation Group (IG): Definition of Insulation Materials and Operating Temperatures.
D. Insulation Shield: Buffer material placed between the pipe support system and the insulation to
prevent the insulation material from crushing.
E. Jacket: Protective covering over the pipe insulation; may be factory applied such as "all service
jacket" or field applied to provide additional protection; of such materials as canvas, PVC,
aluminum or stainless steel.
F. Piping Insulation: Thermal insulation applied to prevent heat transmission to or from a piping
system.
G. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Insulation jacket material that impedes the transmission of water vapor.
H. Freezing Climate: Where outdoor design temperature is less than 33°F, as stated in ASHRAE
fundamentals under 99% column for winter design conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Provide products conforming to the requirements of the following:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Manufacture and test insulation in
accordance with the ASTM Standards, including:
a. B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plat.
b. C165 - Recommended Practice for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal
Insulation.
c. C167 - Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal
Insulations.
d. C177 - Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission.
e. Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus.
f. C195 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
g. C196 - Specification for Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Thermal Insulating
Cement.
h. C302 - Test Method for Density of Preformed Pipe -Covering -Type Thermal
Insulation.
i. C303 - Test Method for Density of Preformed Block -Type Thermal Insulation.
j. C305 - Test for Thermal Conductivity of Pipe Insulation.
k. C356 - Test for Linear Shrinkage of Preformed High -Temperature Thermal
Insulation.
1. C411 - Test for Hot -Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation.
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
m. C423 — Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
n. C449 - Specification of Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
o. C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
p. C533 - Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
q. C534 - Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation
in Sheet and Tubular Form.
r. C547 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
s. C552 - Specification for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
t. C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket -Type Pipe Insulation (Industrial
Type).
u. C592 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket -Type Pipe Insulation (Metal -
Mesh Covered).
v. C612 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
w. C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation.
x. C921 - Practice for Determining Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal
Insulation.
y. C1104 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Sorption of
Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation.
z. C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation.
aa. C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation
Materials and Facings..
bb. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
cc. E119 - Test for Fire Resistance.
dd. G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials
to Fungi.
ee. G22 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials
to Bacteria.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE): Provide and install pipe and duct insulation in accordance with the
following ASHRAE Standard:
a. 90 Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Manufacture insulation in accordance with
the following NFPA standards:
a. 255 Test Methods, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. Do not provide materials with flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the
effects of moisture or high humidity.
C. Flame/Smoke Rating: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings,
sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed
index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) Method. In addition, the products,
when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing; or satisfactory certified test report from an
approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not
exceed those specified.
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Corrosiveness: Provide insulation such that when tested in accordance with the following test,
the steel plate in contact with the insulation shows no greater corrosion than sterile cotton in
contact with a steel plate for comparison.
1. Test Specimen: Two specimens shall be used, each measuring 1" by 4" by
approximately '/z" thick.
2. Apparatus: Provide a humidity test chamber in which two polished -steel test plates, 1"
wide, 4" long and 0.020" thick, shall be placed. Plates shall be clear finish, cold -rolled
strip steel, American quality, quarter hard, temper No. 3, weighing 0.85 lb/sq. ft.
3. Procedure: The steel test plates shall be rinsed with cp benzol until their surfaces are free
from oil and grease and allowed to dry. One piece of cold -rolled steel shall be placed
between the two insulation specimens and secured with tape or twine. The test specimen
and uncovered plate shall be suspended vertically in an atmosphere having a relative
humidity of 95% (plus or minus 3%), and a temperature of 120°F (plus or minus 3°F), for
96 hours, and then be examined for corrosion.
E. Insulation thickness shall be the greater standard of that specified here or the State energy
conservation requirements.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number,
K -value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
Also furnish necessary test data certified by an independent testing laboratory. Submit samples.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of
mechanical insulation. Include this data and product in maintenance manual.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coating to the site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.
B. Store and protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not
install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Johns Manville, Owens -Coming, Knauf, Armstrong, Pittsburgh -Corning, Certainteed, Halstead,
Rubatex, 3M FireMaster, Pabco, Reflectix, or approved equal. Manufacturer and insulation
types listed below indicate a minimum acceptable level of quality required for each
classification.
2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATIONS
A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: Johns Manville Microlite Xc, formaldehyde -free Type 75 Flexible
Blanket:
1. Application: Insulation wrap for ductwork, or other HVAC systems.
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 4
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. 'K' Value: ASTM C553-92, 0.27 Btu.in./(hr•f129°F) at 75°F installed full thickness.
3. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft.
4. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK (Foil -Scrim -Kraft) aluminum foil faced reinforced with
fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire-resistant kraft.
5. Installation: See Part 3 below.
B. Rigid Fiberglass Board: Johns Manville Linacoustic R-300, Type II duct board:
1. Application: Lining insulation for HVAC plenums and ductwork.
2. 'K' Value: ASTM C1071, 0.23 Btu•in./(hr•ft2.°F) at 75°F.
3. Density: 3.0 Ib/cu ft.
4. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK (Foil -Scrim -Kraft) aluminum foil faced reinforced with
fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire-resistant kraft.
5. Installation: See Part 3 below.
C. Natural Fiber (Cotton) Duct Liner: Reflectix #HVNF, Flexible Blanket with Anti -Microbial
Treatment:
1. 'K' Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 Btu•in./(hr•ft2•°F) at 75°F.
2.. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.75 or higher based on "Type A mounting."
3. Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min.
4. Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type compliant with ASTM C916.
5. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened.
D. Field Applied Jackets (For Interior Applications):
1. All longitudinal seams shall be located on bottom of ductwork
2. PVC Plastic: Johns Manville Zeston 2000. One piece molded type fitting covers and
jacketing material, gloss white. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive color matching
vinyl tape.
2.3 PIPE INSULATIONS
A. Flexible Elastomeric Closed Cell Thermal Insulation: Armacel, Rubatex k -flex ECO, closed -
cell, halogen free, elastomeric insulation. Comply with ASTM -C177, ASTM E 84 and UL 181.
1. `K' Value: 0.27 at 75°F.
2. Density: 3.0 to 6.0 lbs./cu.ft.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 260°F.
4. Seal all seams and joints with contact adhesive.
B. Field Applied Jackets (For Interior Applications):
1. All longitudinal seams shall be located on bottom of pipes.
2. PVC Plastic: Johns Manville Zeston 2000. One piece molded type fitting covers and
jacketing material, gloss white. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive color matching
vinyl tape.
3 Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq. yd. plain weave cotton, treated with dilute fire
retardant lagging adhesive.
4.. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016" thick sheet, [smooth/embossed] finish, with longitudinal slip
joints and 2" laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Secure aluminum jackets with 3/8" or 'A" stainless steel bands on 12" centers.
C. Removable Covers:
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Provide removable covers on pumps, valves, air separators, vents, fittings, flanges,
strainers, traps, etc., where periodic maintenance or removal of insulation may is
required.
2. Use of premolded fittings with PVC covers is acceptable.
3. Use of lace -on type insulating blankets is acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that piping and ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with specifications
before applying insulation materials. All piping and ductwork shall be inspected by Owner's
Representative prior to installation of insulation. Any insulation applied prior to inspection
shall be removed and new insulation applied at no additional cost to Owner. Notify Owner's
Representative five (5) working days prior to insulation installation.
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of foreign material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes and
industry standards.
2. Remove and replace any insulation that has become wet or damaged during the
construction process.
3. Continue insulation and vapor barrier at penetrations and duct supports, except where
prohibited by code. Instances where this is required include:
a. Ductwork support angle or struts. To prevent crushing of low density insulation,
provide separator or high density insulation at point of support. Vapor barrier to
continue unbroken at point of support.
B. Ductwork —Insulation on the Duct Exterior:
1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature (below room
temperature) with vapor retardant jacket. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and
penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant adhesive.
2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature (above room
temperature) with or without vapor retardant jacket. Where service access is required,
bevel and seal ends of insulation.
3. All exposed exterior metallic ductwork exposed or covered with cladding is to be built
with a crown to shed moisture.
4. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations except
where prohibited by code.
5. The insulation shall be firmly wrapped around the ducts with all joints lapped a minimum
of 2". The vapor barrier shall be sealed with FSK or metallic pressure sensitive tape.
Installed thickness shall not exceed 25% compression. Secure insulation with 16 gage
soft annealed black or galvanized wire spaced not more than 12" on centers for
straight runs of duct and 6" on centers for elbows and fittings
6. The underside of duct work 24" or greater in width shall be secured with mechanical
fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18" on center. The protruding ends of the
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 6
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
7. For ductwork exposed in mechanical equipment rooms below 7' or in finished spaces,
finish with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket or aluminum or stainless steel jacket.
8. For interior vapor/moisture duct applications, install fiberglass insulation unless
specifically indicated otherwise on drawings. Install to meet manufacturer's
requirements and as required by local code authorities.
9. For exterior applications, provide insulation with a weather protection jacket.
10. For exterior vapor duct applications, install fiberglass insulation with weatherproof
jacket..
C. Duct Liner:
1. Adhere insulation to sheet metal with a UL listed adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied to
the sheet metal with a minimum coverage of 90%.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners as indicated by SMACNA or
manufacturer. Pin length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer.
3. All exposed edges of the liner must be factory or field coated. Unless factory coated, all
transverse edges and longitudinal joints of the duct liner shall be coated. For systems
operating at 4,000 fpm or higher, a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading
edges.
4. Repair liner surface penetrations with UL listed adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated on plans are net inside dimensions required for airflow.
Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
D. Piping Insulation:
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations unless otherwise specified.
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient
temperature with vapor retardant jackets with self sealing laps. Insulate complete system.
4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self
sealing lap or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at
equipment, flanges, and unions.
5. Provide insert between support shield and piping on piping 11/4" diameter or Larger.
Fabricate of Johns Manville Thermo -12, or other heavy density insulating material
suitable for temperature. Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths:
a. 11/4" to 2'h" pipe size 10" long
6.. Use of metal saddles is acceptable as specified in Section 15050. Fill interior voids with
segments of insulation matching adjoining pipe insulation.
7. Use of pipe hangers designed as an insulation coupling is acceptable in lieu of saddles
and other devices. Klo-Shure coupling or equal.
8. For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 7 feet
above finished floor, finish with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket and fitting
covers, or aluminum or stainless steel jacket.
9. Where pumps, valves, strainers, etc., with insulation require periodic opening for
maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily
removed and replaced without damage. Use of premolded covers or lace -on type
insulation blankets is required.
10. For exterior applications:
• a. Provide weather protection jacket. Insulated pipe lengths, pumps, fittings, joints, and
valves shall be covered with aluminum jacket or stainless steel jacket. Jacket seams
shall be located on bottom side of horizontal piping. All lateral joints shall be
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
caulked with a minimum 20 -year silicone sealant (clear). All longitudinal joints,
except those at the bottom of a horizontal pipe run, shall be caulked with a minimum
20 -year silicone sealant (clear).
b. Apply weather -resistant protective finish such as WB Armaflex to flexible
elastomeric insulation. Insulation seams shall be located on the bottom side of
horizontal piping. All lateral and longitudinal joints to be sealed with low V.O.C.,
UV inhibitive adhesive, such as Armaflex 520 BLV adhesive.
11. For underground installations, install per manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
12. When maintenance or service access for equipment will result in foot traffic over floor
mounted insulated piping the contractor is to fabricate a permanent removable walkway
to prevent damage to the piping and insulation.
3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. All insulation thicknesses shall meet or exceed state energy code and mechanical code
requirements as noted below. Minimum thermal resistance in range of 4.2 to 4.6 per inch of
thickness. Insulation thicknesses are based on fiberglass insulation and may be adjusted for
equivalent insulation values for materials with superior "K" factors.
B. All air distribution system ducts and plenums, but not limited to, building cavities, mechanical
closets, air handler boxes, and support platforms uses as ducts or plenums, shall be installed,
sealed , and insulated to meet the requirements of the code. Portions of supply -air and return -air
ducts conveying heated or cooled air located in one or more of the following spaces shall be
insulated to a minimum level of R-8.
1. In a space between the roof and an insulated ceiling.
2. In a space directly under a roof with fixed vents or opening to the outside or
unconditioned spaces
3. In an unconditioned crawlspace.
4. In other unconditioned spaces.
C. Flexible Fiberglass
D. Thicknesses in the above table shall have insulation values as follows: 1 1/2 " = R-6, 2" = R-
8.0, 3" = R-12. Greater thicknesses are permitted to achieve identical values if space constraints
allow.
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 8
•
•
•
THICKNESS
(inches)
FINISH
REMARKS
Supply ducts within building
envelope
1-1/2
FSK
Supply or return duct installed
as exposed ductwork in the
occupied space.
0
Except where noted on
drawings for acoustical
reasons
Return ducts within building
envelope
1-1/2
FSK
Supply and return ductwork
located as described in 3.3.B
above.
2
Exhaust ducts within 10 ft. of
exterior openings
2
FSK
D. Thicknesses in the above table shall have insulation values as follows: 1 1/2 " = R-6, 2" = R-
8.0, 3" = R-12. Greater thicknesses are permitted to achieve identical values if space constraints
allow.
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 8
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac
507048GEN
E. Rigid Fiberglass
April 30, 2008
CD Owner Review
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
F. Duct Liner:
THICKNESS
(inches)
FINISH
REMARKS
Outside air intake ducts
1-1/2
FSK
F. Duct Liner:
3.4 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. All insulation thicknesses shall meet or exceed state energy code requirements as noted below.
Increase thickness '/2" if exposed to exterior ambient air. Minimum thermal resistance in range
of 4.2 to 4.6 per inch of thickness. Insulation thicknesses are based on fiberglass insulation and
may be adjusted for equivalent insulation values for materials with superior "K" factors.
B. Elastometric Foam (Closed Cell):
THICKNESS
(inches)
FINISH
REMARKS
Where indicated
1" unless
otherwise
noted on
plans
Linacoustic
Within 20' of Air Handling
Unit in supply and return
ducts
1
Refectix
Natural Fiber
Provide aluminum jacket on
exterior insulated piping.
3.4 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. All insulation thicknesses shall meet or exceed state energy code requirements as noted below.
Increase thickness '/2" if exposed to exterior ambient air. Minimum thermal resistance in range
of 4.2 to 4.6 per inch of thickness. Insulation thicknesses are based on fiberglass insulation and
may be adjusted for equivalent insulation values for materials with superior "K" factors.
B. Elastometric Foam (Closed Cell):
END OF SECTION 230700
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 9
PIPE SIZE
(inches)
THICKNESS
(inches)
REMARKS
Condensate drain pipes
All Sizes
1/2
Refrigerant suction and hot -gas
piping
All Sizes
3/4
Provide aluminum jacket on
exterior insulated piping.
Refrigerant liquid piping
All Sizes
3/4
Provide on all piping
concealed in structure and
close proximity to likely
human contact.
END OF SECTION 230700
HVAC INSULATION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230700 - 9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 23 08 00 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Commissioning:
1. Commissioning is a systematic process of verification and documentation that ensures
that the selected building systems have been designed, installed, and function properly,
efficiently, and can be maintained in accordance with the contract documents in order to
satisfy the design intent and operational requirements.
B. Commissioning during construction, acceptance, and warranty phases is intended to achieve
following objectives:
1. Verify and document equipment is installed and started per manufacturer's
recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards.
2.. Verify and document equipment and systems receive complete operational checkout by
installing contractors.
3. Verify and document equipment and system performance.
4. Verify completeness of operations and maintenance materials.
5. Ensure owner's operating personnel are trained on operation and maintenance of building
equipment.
C. Commissioning process does not take away from or reduce responsibility of system designers or
installing contractors to provide finished and fully functioning product.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 230500 — Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
B. Section 260500 — Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
1.3 COMMISSIONING PROCESS
A. Following activities describe commissioning tasks during construction in order of occurrence.
1. Commissioning Plan: The plan shall require tests mandated by this section be performed
and the results recorded. The plan shall require preparation of preliminary and final
reports of test procedures and results as described herein. At a minimum, the plan shall
identify the following for each test:
a. A detailed explanation of the original design intent.
b. Equipment and systems to be tested, including the extent of tests.
c. Functions to be tested (for example calibration, economizer control, etc.)
d. Conditions under which the test shall be performed (for example winter and summer
design conditions, full outside air, etc.).
e. Measurable criteria for acceptable performance.
2. Systems Testing and Balancing:
a. General:
1) All HVAC systems shall be balanced in accordance with generally accepted
engineering standards. Air and water flow rates shall be measured and adjusted
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
23 08 00-1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
to deliver final flow rates within 10% of design rates, except variable flow
distribution systems need not be balanced upstream of the controlling device (for
example, VAV terminal unit or control valve).
2) A written balance report shall be provided to the Owner.
3) Refer to specifications for further systems balancing requirements.
b. Air Systems Balancing:
1) Air systems shall be balanced in a manner to first minimize throttling losses then,
for fans with system power of greater than 1 hp, fan speed shall be adjusted to
meet design flow conditions.
c. Hydronic Systems Balancing:
1) Hydronic systems shall be proportionately balanced in a manner to first minimize
throttling losses, then the pump impeller shall be trimmed or pump speed shall be
adjusted to meet design flow conditions. Each hydronic system shall have either
the ability to measure pressure across the pump, or test ports at each side of each
pump.
2) Exceptions:
a) Pumps with pump motors of 10 hp or less.
b) When throttling results in no greater than 5% of the nameplate horsepower
draw above that required if the impeller was trimmed.
3. Functional Performance Testing: Develop specific equipment and system functional
performance test procedures.
a. Equipment function performance testing shall demonstrate the correct installation and
operation of each component, system and system -to -system intertie relationship in
accordance with approved plans and specifications. This demonstration is to prove
the operation, function and maintenance serviceability for each of the commissioned
systems. Testing shall included all modes of operation, including:
1) All modes as described in the Sequence of Operation
2) Redundant or automatic back-up mode
3) Performance of alarms
4) Mode of operation upon a loss of power and restored power.
b. HVAC controls systems shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components,
equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with
approved plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be functionally
tested to ensure they operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications.
4. Preliminary Commissioning Report: A preliminary report of commissioning test
procedures and results shall be completed and provided to the Owner. The preliminary
commissioning report shall identify:
a. Deficiencies found during testing required by this section, which have not been
corrected at the time of the report preparation and the anticipated date of correction.
b. Deferred tests, which cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to
climatic conditions.
c. Climatic conditions required for performance of the deferred tests, and the anticipated
date of each deferred test.
5. Post Construction Commissioning: Post construction commissioning shall be provided to
the building owner prior to date of final acceptance. Refer to specifications for further
commissioning requirements. Post construction commissioning shall include, as a
minimum, review and approval of Operation and Maintenance Materials, Record
Drawings and Systems Operation Training.
a. Operation and Maintenance Materials: The O&M materials shall be in accordance
with industry accepted standards and shall include, at a minimum, the following:
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
23 08 00-2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1) Submittal data stating equipment size and selected options for each piece of
equipment requiring maintenance.
2) Operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment requiring
maintenance, except equipment not furnished as part of this project. Required
routine maintenance actions shall be clearly identified.
3) Names and addresses of service agency.
4) HVAC controls systems maintenance and calibration information, including
wiring diagrams, schematics and control sequence descriptions. Desired or field
determined set points shall be permanently recorded on control drawings at
control devices or, for digital control systems, in programming comments.
5) A complete written narrative of how each system and piece of equipment is
intended to operate including:
a) A detailed explanation of the original design intent.
b) The basis of design (how the design was selected to meet the design intent).
c) A detailed explanation of how new equipment is to interface with existing
equipment or systems (where applicable).
d) Suggested control set points.
e) Sequence of operations is not acceptable as a narrative for this requirement.
b. Record Drawings: Record drawings shall include, as a minimum, the location and
performance data on each piece of equipment, general configuration of duct and pipe
distribution system, including sizes and the terminal air and water design flow rates
of the actual installation.
c. Systems Operation Training: The training of the appropriate maintenance staff for
each equipment type and or system shall include, as a minimum, the following:
1) System/equipment overview (what it is, what it does and which other systems
and or equipment does it interface with).
2) Review of the available O&M materials.
3) Review of the Record Drawings on the subject system/equipment.
4) Hands-on demonstration of all normal maintenance procedures, normal operating
modes and all emergency shutdown and start-up procedures.
6. Final Commissioning Report: A complete report of test procedures and results shall be
prepared and filed with the Owner. The final commissioning report shall identify:
a. Results of the functional performance tests.
b. Disposition of all deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective
measures used or proposed.
c. All function performance test procedures used during the commissioning process
including measurable criteria for test acceptance, provided herein for repeatability.
1) Exception: Deferred tests, which cannot be performed at the time of the report
preparation due to climatic conditions.
7. Acceptance Requirements:
a. Refer to specifications for further commissioning requirements.
b. Buildings or portions thereof, required by this Code to comply with this section, shall
not be issued a certificate of occupancy until such time that the building official
determines that the preliminary commissioning report required by WSEC Section
1416.2.6.2 has been completed.
1.4 COMMISSIONING SCOPE: EQUIPMENT TO BE COMMISSIONED IN THIS PROJECT
CHECKED.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
23 08 00-3
Glumac
507048GEN
April 30, 2008
CD Owner Review
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
System
Equipment
Check
HVAC System
Variable frequency drives
X
Packaged Rooftop Units
X
Split System HP Units
X
Exhaust fans
X
HVAC control system
X
Electrical System
Sweep or scheduled lighting controls
X
Lighting occupancy sensors
X
Fire and smoke alarm systems
X
Fire protection systems
X
Other
Service water heaters & recirc pumps
X
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required
functional performance testing to be provided by Division Contractor for equipment being
tested.
B. Testing equipment to be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test or measure system
performance as required by Project Manual.
C. Datalogging equipment or software required to test equipment to be provided by CC but shall
not become property of Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPORTING
A. Provide all required documentation to satisfy WSEC Section 1416.
3.2 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Objectives and Scope:
1. Demonstrate each system is operating according to documented design intent and
Construction Documents.
2. Functional performance testing comprises tests to verify components, equipment,
systems, and interfaces between systems operate correctly and includes operating modes,
interlocks, control sequences, and responses to emergency conditions.
3. Verification procedures are directed, witnessed, and documented by General Contractor
(GC).
B. Development of Test Procedures:
1. Develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of
each piece of equipment and system.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
23 08 00-4
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Provide test procedures to Contractors and Sub's who review the tests for feasibility,
safety, equipment and warranty protection prior to execution.
3. Submit tests to Owner for review.
4. Test procedure forms to include the following information:
a. System and equipment or component name(s).
b. Equipment location and ID number.
c. Date.
d. Project name.
e. Participating parties.
f. Instructions for setting up test, including special cautions, alarm limits, etc.
g. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute test.
h. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with date passed and initials boxes.
i. Section for comments or notes.
C. Execution of Functional Performance Tests:
1. Test Methods: Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by
direct manipulation of system inputs (i.e. heating or cooling sensors), manipulation of
system inputs with building automation system (i.e. software override of sensor inputs),
trend logs of system inputs and outputs using building automation system, or short-term
monitoring of system inputs and outputs using stand alone data loggers.
a. Combination of methods may be required to test complete sequence of operations.
2. Setup: Each test procedure is performed under conditions that simulate normal operating
conditions as closely as possible.
a. Sub executing test provides necessary system modifications to produce specified
conditions (flows, pressures, temperatures, etc) necessary to execute test and, at
completion of test, returns affected building equipment and systems to their pre-test
conditions.
3. Sampling: Multiple identical pieces of non -life -safety or non-critical equipment may be
functionally tested using sampling strategy approved by Owner.
4. Test values: After three attempts at testing, if specified sample percentage, failures are
still present, remaining units are tested at Contractors' expense.
D. Coordination and Scheduling: Subs provide sufficient notice to GC regarding completion
schedule for pre -functional checklists and startup of equipment and systems.
1. Schedule functional tests through Owner, Contractor and affected Sub's ensuring the
following sequential priorities are followed:
a. Equipment is not "temporarily" started (for heating or cooling), until pre -start
checklist items and manufacturer's pre -start procedures are completed and moisture,
dust and other environmental and building integrity issues have been addressed.
b. Functional performance testing does not begin until pre -functional, start-up and TAB
is completed for given system.
c. Controls system and equipment it controls are not functionally tested until points
have been calibrated and pre -functional checklists are completed.
E. Problem Solving:
1. Recommend solutions to deficiencies identified during functional testing. Contractor,
Subs and A/E team to resolve, correct and retest deficiencies.
3.3 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS
A. Documentation:
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
23 08 00-5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Subs witness and document results of functional performance tests using forms
developed for that purpose.
a. Prior to testing, forms are provided to GC and Owner for review and approval.
B. Non -Conformance:
1. Subs record results of functional test on procedure or test form.
a. Deficiencies identified during verification testing are documented on standard form
and reported to Owner, Contractors and sub's.
b. Deficiency Report: Include details of components or systems found to be non-
compliant with parameters of test plans.
c. Report details, adjustments or alterations required to correct system operation, and
identify responsible party.
2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during tests and deficiency and
resolution documented on procedure form.
3. Make every effort to expedite testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not
compromising integrity of procedures.
4. Identified deficiency resolution:
a. No dispute on deficiency and responsibility to correct it:
1) GC documents deficiency and adjustments or alterations required to correct it.
2) Sub corrects deficiency and notifies GC that equipment is ready to be retested.
3) GC reschedules test and test is repeated.
b. Dispute about deficiency or who is responsible:
1) Deficiency is documented on non-compliance form and copy given to Owner and
Contractor.
2) Resolutions are made at lowest management level possible and additional parties
are brought into discussions as needed.
a) Final interpretive authority is with A/E team.
b) Final acceptance authority is with Owner.
3) GC documents resolution process.
4) Once interpretation and resolution have been decided, appropriate party corrects
deficiency and notifies GC that equipment is ready to be retested.
a) GC reschedules test and test is repeated until satisfactory performance is
achieved.
C. Cost of Retesting:
1. Sub's:
a. Responsible for costs to retest pre -functional or functional test, if they are responsible
for deficiency.
b. If not responsible for deficiency, cost recovery for retesting costs to be negotiated
with GC.
D. Approval:
1. GC makes formal approval of functional performance test after review.
2. GC recommends acceptance of each test to Owner.
3. Owner gives final approval on each test.
3.4 DEFERRED TESTING
A. Unforeseen Deferred Tests: Functional testing that cannot be completed due to building
structure, required occupancy condition, or other deficiency may be delayed upon approval of
Owner.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 23 08 00-6
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Tests are conducted in same manner as seasonal tests as soon as possible.
B. Seasonal Testing: Seasonal variation in operations or control strategies may require additional
testing during opposite season to verify performance of HVAC system and controls.
1. During warranty period: Seasonal testing and other deferred testing is completed as
required to fully test sequences of operation.
a. GC coordinates these activities.
2. Tests are executed and documented, with deficiencies corrected by appropriate Subs.
? . Final adjustments to O&M manuals and Record Drawings due to testing are also
completed.
END OF SECTION 23 08 00
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
23 08 00-7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
2.30500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Submit shop drawings of the entire control system components fully coordinated with
major equipment suppliers' requirements. Provide proposed programming logic
sequences of control functions on each system.
2. Installation of control components other than valves, dampers and sensing wells as
required for a complete and workable system.
3. This Contractor shall furnish, install and coordinate the interlock and control wiring as
specified and/or required for a complete and workable control system.
4. Controls dampers are specified and furnished in Section 233113 of these specifications.
Provide damper actuators, wiring and conduit as required to operate all dampers as
shown.
5. Upon completion of the installation, data entry and programming, provide complete
validation and adjustment of specified control system through period of testing and
Owner's acceptance. The control contractor shall perform a point-to-point check out of
all newly installed points to verify point existence, proper end to end connection and
correct SI units with the Owners Representative.
6. The entire program and sequence of operation with the final points list shall be verified
by the Control Contractor, the Owners Representative, and signed by both parties. A
copy of the final program, sequence of operation, and points list shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval and inclusion with the operation and maintenance manuals.
7.. Owner training on operation of the control system.
8. One-year warranty on workmanship and materials.
9. Interlocking of electrical systems and motors as shown on Drawings, except where
specifically shown on electrical drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Sources of 120 -volt electrical power as indicated on the Electrical drawings and specifications
for control system components furnished by this section. The controls contractor shall be
responsible for all additional electrical distribution from these connection points to the control
panels and other controls devices.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Manufacturers are subject to compliance with requirements contained herein and on the
Drawings. Control systems shall be provided by one of the following manufacturers, no other
manufacturers will be considered for this work:
1. Johnson Controls, Inc.
2. Siemens (Landis and Staefa)
3. Alerton
B. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products that have been tested, listed, and labeled by
Underwriter Laboratories (UL) and comply with NEMA standards.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval the following materials:
1. Wiring diagrams.
2. Sequence of operation, control logic and control points list.
3. Controls service contract.
4. Operations and maintenance manuals.
5. Temperature sensors, with bypass buttons where shown.
6. Pressure sensors.
7. Duct smoke detectors.
8. Actuators.
9. Control valves (Note that service valves are specified in Section 230500 of these
documents)
10. Dampers (Note that dampers are specified in Section 233113 of these documents)
11. Miscellaneous Devices.
12. Airflow measuring elements.
13. Control panels and controllers.
14. Other components such as relays, solenoid valves, restrictors, etc., complete material
submittal.
15. Parts list for each system control.
1.6 LAYOUT DRAWINGS
A. Prior to the start of installation, submit to the Owner's Representative for approval layout
drawings coordinated with all building systems, and lists of materials, fixtures, and equipment
to be incorporated in the work. The layout drawings shall consist of plans and diagrams to
show clearly the locations and size of major items of equipment and controls. The general
arrangement of the systems to be installed, coordination with other work, and all requirements
for installation shall be met.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged components; remove from project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. All components used shall be serviceable, repairable, and replaceable by qualified temperature
control technicians using non-proprietary parts, tools, and instruments.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. All control devices shall have identification means attached to the front or most visible surface.
Room thermostat having no special purpose other than to control local temperature shall not be
identified.
B. Small Devices: Milled laminate plates secured with epoxy cement.
2.3 FIELD DEVICES
A. Provide instrumentation as required for monitoring, control or optimization functions. All
devices and equipment shall be approved for installation in the City of Portland.
B. Room Temperature Sensors
1. Blank face standard room sensor except where plans or specifications call for override
buttons, setpoint adjustment, or displays.
2. Liquid i
3. Duct (si
Temperature monitoring range
+20/120°F (-13° to 49°C)
Output signal
Changing resistance
Accuracy at Calibration point
+0.5°F (+/- 0.3°C)
Set Point and Display Range
55° to 95° F (13° to 35°C)
Temperature monitoring range
+30/250°F (-1°/121°C)
Output signal
Changing resistance
Accuracy at Calibration point
+0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
Temperature monitoring range
+20/120°F (-7°/49°C)
Output signal
Changing resistance
Accuracy at Calibration point
+0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
4. Duct Averaee temperature:
Temperature monitoring range
+20° +120°F (-7°/+49°C)
Output signal
4 — 20 mA DC
Accuracy at Calibration point
+0.5°F (+0.3°C)
Sensor Probe Length
25' L (7.3m)
5. Outside air temperature:
6. Liquid
Temperature monitoring range
-58°+122°F (-50°C to +50°C)
_
Output signal
4 — 20 mA DC
Accuracy at Calibration point
+0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
Ranges
0-5/30 inches H2O
0-25/150 inches H2O
0-127/750 inches H2O
Output
4 — 20 mA DC
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 3
Glumac
507048GEN
April 30, 2008
CD Owner Review
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
Calibration Adjustments
Zero and span
Accuracy
+-0.2% of span
Linearity
+-0.1% of span
Hysteresis
+-0.05% of span
7. Differential pressure:
a. Unit for fluid flow proof shall be Penn P74.
Range
8 to 70 psi
Differential
3 psi
Maximum differential pressure
200 psi
Maximum pressure
325 psi
b. Unit for air flow shall be Siemens Building Technologies SW 141.
8. Static pr
Set point ranges:
0.5" WG to 1.0" WG (124.4 to 248.8 Pa)
1.0" WG to 12.0" WG (248.8 to 497.6 Pa)
Range
0 to .5" WG (0 to 124.4 Pa)
0 to 1" WG (0 to 248.8 Pa)
0 to 2" WG (0 to 497.7 Pa)
0 to 5" WG (0 to 1.2 kPa)
0 to 10" WG (0 to 2.5 kPa)
Output signal
4 - 20 mA VDC
Combined static error
0.5% full range
Operating Temperature
-40° to 175°F (-40°C to 70.5°C)
9. Air Pressure Sensor:
Range
0 to 0.1 in. water (0 to 24.9 Pa)
0 to 0.25 in. water (0 to 63.2 Pa)
0 to 0.5 in. water (0 to 124.5 Pa)
0 to 1.0 in. water (0 to 249 Pa)
0 to 2.0 in. water (90 to 498 Pa)
0 to 5.0 in. water (0 to 1.25 kPa)
0 to 10.0 in. water (0 to 2.49 kPa)
Output signal
4 to 20 mA
Accuracy
+1.0% of full scale
10. Insertion Flow Meters (Equal to Onicon Series F-1200
Sensing Method
Impedance Sensing
Accuracy
+2% of Actual Reading
_
Maximum Operating Pressure
400 PSI
Output Signal
4 - 20 mA
Bi-directional
Where required
11. Pressure to Current Transducer
Range
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) or
3 to 30 psig (21 to 207 kPa)
Output signal
4 - 20 mA
Accuracy
+ 1% of full scale (± 0.3 psig)
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac
507048GEN
April 30, 2008
CD Owner Review
12. Control Valves (all control valves shall have electric actuators
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
Electric Control
Rangeability
40:1
Flow Characteristics
Modified. Equal percentage
Control Action
Normal open or closed as selected
Medium
Steam, water, glycol
Body Type
Screwed ends 2" and smaller,
flanged
Valves 2 V2 and larger
Body Material
Bronze for cast bodies
Brass acceptable for forged valves
Body Trim
Bronze for cast bodies
Brass acceptable for forged valves
Stem
Stainless steel for globe valve
Brass acceptable for ball valves
Actuator
0-10 VDC, 4-20 MA or 2 position
24 VAC/120VAC
a. All automatic temperature control valves in water lines shall be provided with
characterized throttling plugs or ball and shall be sized for minimum 25% of the
system pressure drop or 5 psi, whichever is less.
b. Positive positioning relays shall be provided on pneumatic control when required to
provide sufficient power for sequencing.
c. Two position valves shall be line size.
d. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way pattern as shown, constructed for tight
shut-off and shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials.
Valves shall be constructed to satisfactorily operate and close against a maximum
pump head pressure plus 50%. Valves with sizes up to and including 2" shall be
"screwed"; 2-'h" and larger valves shall be "flanged" configuration. Control valves
shall be sized for maximum pressure drop of 5.0 psig at rated flow (except as noted).
e. Valve design shall produce a true equal percentage flow characteristic. Globe valve
or characterized ball valves are acceptable in the '/2" to 2" range size.
f. See Section 232113 for additional valve specifications including acceptable
manufacturers or packagers of valve/actuator assemblies.
g. Valve actuators shall be rated for at least 125% of the motive power necessary to
operate the valves over their full range of operation against the total and differential
pressures shown, including torque required to seat or unseat resilient seated butterfly
valves.
1:3. Actuators
a. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Listed under Standard 873 or Canadian
Standards association Class 4813 02 and have NEMA type 2 housings -- water and
moisture resistant. Spring return actuators mounted near outdoor air streams shall
have a semi -permeable membrane to remove moisture from inside actuator.
b. Actuators shall be applied according to the manufacturer's application instructions.
See execution for additional requirements.
c. Each actuator shall be factory tested before shipment at 110% of guaranteed
minimum torque.
d. Damper actuators shall be rated and tested for at least 125% of the maximum motive
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
power necessary to operate against the pressure shown.
e. Overload Protection: Actuators shall provide protection against actuator burnout
using an internal current limited circuit or digital motor rotation sensing circuit.
Circuit shall insure that actuators cannot burn out due to stalled damper or
mechanical and electrical paralleling. End switches to deactivate the actuator at the
end of rotation or use of magnetic clutches are not acceptable.
f. Actuators shall be properly sized to provide sufficient torque to position the damper
or valve throughout its operating range.
g. For power failure and safety applications a mechanical spring return mechanism shall
be used. Capacitors or other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable
except a "central emergency backup power source".
h. Actuators shall be direct coupled (over the shaft) enabling them to be mounted
directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The clamp
holding the damper shaft shall use a V -bolt and toothed V -clamp causing a cold -weld
effect for positive griping. Single bolt or setscrew type fasteners are not acceptable.
i. Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to
increase torque where required.
j. Spring return actuators should be capable of mounting directly onto a jackshaft up to
1.05" diameter.
k. Provide spring return actuators for AHU economizer dampers.
1. Provide spring return and end switches on all 100% OSA dampers.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A. Thermostats
1. Room thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity.
2. They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a temperature
change of one-tenth of one degree. (Provide all thermostats with limit stops to limit
adjustments as required.)
3. Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
4. In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable partitions without
overlap.
5. Mount the thermostat covers with tamper -proof socket head screws.
B. Freezestats:
1. Install freezestats as indicated on the plans and provide protection for every square foot
of coil surface area with one linear foot of element per square foot of coil.
a. Upon detection of low temperature, the freezestats shall stop the associated supply
fans and return the automatic dampers to their normal position. Provide manual
reset.
C. Firestats:
1. Provide manual reset, fixed temperature line voltage type with a bi-metal actuated switch.
2. Switch shall have adequate rating for required load.
D. Current Sensing Relay:
1. Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay which changes
switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point value of current in the
monitored A/C circuit.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 6
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation under load as
an "on" state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded running motor as an "off'
state. A motor with a broken belt is considered an unloaded motor.
3. Provide for status device for all fans and pumps.
E. Carbon Dioxide Sensors
1. General: Sensor for IAQ demand control.
2. Sensor: Non -dispersive infrared sensing technology. Sensor chamber shall be
manufacturer with a non -corrosive material (i.e. gold plating) that does not affect
sampling.
3. Detection range: 0 to 3000 ppm. +/- 5% and +/- 50 ppm. Annual drift 20 ppm nominal
4. Analog Output: 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc..
2.5 WIRE AND CABLE, TRANSFORMERS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Wire and Cable General: Wire and cable jacket material shall be flame retardant PVC, or
fi uoraopolymer as required for the application per NFPA 70. Multiconductor cable shall have
an outer jacket. Wire and cable not indicated as GFE shall be provided.
B. Control Wiring
1. Digital Functions: Control wiring for digital functions shall be 18 AWG minimum with
600 -volt insulation.
2. Analog Functions: Control wiring for analog functions shall be 18 AWG minimum with
600 -volt insulation, twisted and each pair shielded, 2, 3, or 4 wire to match analog
function hardware.
C. Sensor Wiring: Sensor wiring shall be 20 AWG minimum twisted and shielded, 2, 3, or 4 wire
to match analog function hardware.
D. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be insulated, modular, feed -through, clamp style with
recessed captive screw-type clamping mechanism, suitable for rail mounting, and shall have end
plates and partition plates for separation or shall have enclosed sides.
E. Transformer: Step-down transformer shall be utilized where control equipment operates at
lower than line circuit voltage. Transformer, other than transformers in bridge circuits, shall
have primaries wound for the voltage available and secondaries wound for the correct control
circuit voltage. Transformer shall be sized so that the connected load is 80 % of the rated
capacity or less. Transformer shall conform to UL 508 and NEMA ST1.
F. Nonconducting Wiring Duct: UL listed nonconducting wiring duct in control panels shall have
slotted sides, snap -on duct covers, fittings for connecting ducts, mounting clips for securing
ducts, and wire -retaining clips. Wire shall be sequenctially labeled on both ends for
identification with point address.
G. sequences. Each positive positioner shall provide a mechanical feedback mechanism and an
adjustable operating range and starting point. Positioners shall be capable of applying actuator's
full rated motive power to maintain the position called for by the control signal.
2.6 D1DC CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. General: This specification defines the minimum equipment and performance requirements for
a Direct Digital Control (DDC) building control system
B. Scope of Work: The Control Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories,
wiring and instrument piping required for a complete and functioning system.
1. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured
for this and/or other systems and shall not be custom designed especially for this project.
All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.
2. The building control system shall possess a fully modular architecture, permitting
expansion through the addition of more stand-alone control units, temperature sensors,
pressure sensors, actuators, and/or operator terminals.
3. Supervision and checkout of the system shall be by local branch engineers and
technicians directly employed by the Control Contractor.
C. Warranty: The building control system, including all hardware and software components shall
be warranted for a period of one year following the date of beneficial use. Any manufacturing
defects arising during this period shall be corrected without cost to the owner.
D. Building Control System: The building control system specified herein shall be a Direct Digital
Control system which can, without additional equipment, perform all of the automatic
temperature control and energy management functions as required on the accompanying plans.
Direct Digital Control shall be defined as a control technique through which the process
variable is continuously monitored by a digital computer which accomplished loop control by
calculating a control solution for output to a control device.
E. The system, as specified, shall independently control the building's HVAC equipment to
maintain a controlled environment in an energy efficient manner. The building operator shall
communicate with the system and control the sequence of operation to maintain 78 degrees
Fahrenheit during the summer (user defined period) and 70 degrees Fahrenheit during the
winter (user defined period).
2.7 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A. The Facility Management System shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions
including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and
historical data collection and archiving.
B. The facility management system shall consist of the following:
1. Standalone DDC panels
2. Standalone application specific controllers (ASCs)
C. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and
functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels, and operator
devices.
D. System architectural design eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting
and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own
specified control, alarm management, operator I/O, and historical data collection. The failure of
any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control
strategies at other operational devices.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 8
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and
alarm reports directly to any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network without
dependence upon a central processing device. Standalone DDC panels shall also be able to send
alarm reports to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a central processing
device.
2.8 COMMUNICATIONS
A. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify via an auto -dial
telephone line modem connections.
B. Dial -Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow
standalone DDC panels to communicate with remote operator stations on an intermittent basis
via telephone lines.
1. Dial -Up Standalone DDC Panels: Auto -Dial panels shall automatically place calls to
workstations to report critical alarms, or to upload trend and historical information for
archiving.
a. Standalone DDC Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the
initiation of calls. Non-critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a
group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests an upload of all alarms.
b. The auto -dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no -
answers", and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when
communications cannot be established with primary devices.
2.9 Modem characteristics: dial-up communications shall make use of 52k baud modems and voice
grade telephone lines. Each standalone DDC panel may have its own modem, or a group of
standalone DDC panels may share a modem.
2.10 STAND-ALONE DDC PANELS
A. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi -tasking, multi-user, real-
time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware
with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output
modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of
this specification and the attached point list.
B. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system
and data bases including:
1.. Control processes
2.. Energy Management Applications
3. Alarm Management
4. Historical/Trend Data for all points
5. Maintenance Support Applications
6. Custom Processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Dial -Up Communications
9. Manual Override Monitoring
C. Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 230900 - 9
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements
4. Analog Outputs for valve and position control, and capacity control of primary
equipment
5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring
D. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through
the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and
actuators.
E. The system architecture shall support 10% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels, and
all point types included in the initial installation.
F. Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two RS -232C serial
data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator 110 devices such as
industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable
DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of
portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems,
printers, or network terminals.
G. Hardware Override Switches: As indicated in the point schedule, the operator shall have the
ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via
local, point discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points
and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable
whether the panel is powered or not.
H. Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status of position of all
overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that
automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity
information for daily and monthly reports.
I. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each
binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the
need for an operator I/O device.
J. Integrated On -Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self -diagnostics,
communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall
provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated
failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at
each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.
K. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well
as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE
Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be
run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.
L. Powerfai] Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shut down
of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.
Non -Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and
battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a
minimum of 72 hours.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 10
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full
operation without manual intervention.
Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of
reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS -232C port, or via
telephone line dial -in.
2.11 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A. General
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of
the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
B. Control Software Description:
1. Pre -Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the
following pre -tested control algorithms:
a. Two Position Control
b. Proportional Control
c. Proportional plus Integral Control
d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control
e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning
2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting
the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand
situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between
successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall
analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy
scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
C. Energy Management Applications: DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of
the following energy management routines:
- Time of Day Scheduling
- Calendar Based Scheduling
- Holiday Scheduling
- Temporary Schedule Overrides
- Optimal Start
- Optimal Stop
- Night Setback Control
- Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer)
- Peak Demand Limiting
- Temperature Compensated Load Rolling
- Fan Speed/CFM Control
- Outside Air Intake CFM Monitoring
- Heating/Cooling Interlock
- Cold Deck Reset
- Hot Deck Reset
- Hot Water Reset
- Compressor Sequencing
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and
shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building
equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification.
D. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job -
specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control
routines.
1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom
process:
a. Any system -measured point data or status
b. Any calculated data
c. Any results from other processes
d. User -Defined Constants
e. Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exp, etc.)
f. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
g. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
a. Time interval
b. Time of day
c. Date
d. Other processes
e. Time programming
f. Events (e.g., point alarms)
3. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or
calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.
a. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all
other DDC panels on the local are network.
4. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages
and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message
to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution to
a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer of pager.
5. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be self -
documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via
graphic flowcharts and English language descriptors.
E. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm
reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed,
independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from
being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either
operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device.
1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the
point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator
response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each
DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system
shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting
for each point. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes
need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and
analysis at a later date.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 12
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user -defined list
of operator devices, or PCs used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be
automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-
line.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user
shall be able to print, display or store a 65 -character alarm message to more fully
describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. Each standalone DDC panel
shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250 Alarm Messages. Each message may
be assignable to any number of points in the panel.
5. Auto -Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate
a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by
time -stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or
until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.
F. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be
provided to automatically sample, store, and display system date in all of the following ways.
1. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store Point History Files for
all analog and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History routine shall continuously
and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples
for all points shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately
analyze equipment performance and all problem -related events for the past day. Point
History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a
continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point.
2. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels shall also provide high
resolution sampling capability with an operator -adjustable resolution of 10-300 seconds
in one -second increments for verification of control loop performance.
3. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary date shall
also be assignable to user -definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator -
specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute
of 2 hours, in one -minute intervals, shall be provided. Each standalone DDC panel shall
have a dedicated buffer for trend date, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000
data samples.
4. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC panels,
and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based
upon either user -defined intervals, manual command, or when the trend buffers become
full. All trend data shall be available in disk file form for use in 3rd Party personal
computer applications.
G. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store
runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of this
specification.
1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
H. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and
store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user -selected analog and
binary pulse input -type points.
1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9
units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons, etc.).
2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 13
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the
number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be
performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.12 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Basic Interface Description:
1. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator Workstation interface software shall
minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English
language point identification, and industry standard PC application software.
2. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the
use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to menu
selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment of change setpoints from
graphical displays through the use of a mouse of similar pointing device.
3. Multiple, Concurrent Displays: The Operator Interface shall provide the ability to
simultaneously view several different types of system displays in overlapping windows to
speed building analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the ability to
simultaneously display a graphic depicting an air handling unit, while displaying the
trend graph of several associated space temperatures to allow the user to analyze system
performance. If the interface is unable to display several different types of displays at the
same time, the FMS contractor shall provide at least two operator stations.
4. Password Protection: Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to
allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and data base manipulation
capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password.
a. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including portable or
panel -mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password
definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be
updated and downloaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users
shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually.
b. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported:
1) Level 1 = Date Access and Display
2) Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides
3) Level 3 = Level 2 + Database Modification
4) Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation
5) Level 5 = Level 4 + Password Add/Modification
c. A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported at each DDC panel.
d. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective
passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or
panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access
level of the password used to log -on.
e. User -definable, automatic log -off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to
prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.
5. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform
commands including, but not limited to, the following:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 230900 - 14
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a. Start-up of shutdown selected equipment
b. Adjust setpoints
c. Add/Modify/Delete time programming
d. Enable/Disable process execution
e. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point
f. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point
g. Enable/Disable Trending for each point
h. Override PID Loop setpoints
i. Enter temporary override schedules
j. Define Holiday Schedules
k. Change time/data
1. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits
m. Enter/Modify analog warning lights
n. View limits
o. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter
p. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load
6. Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and directed
to either CRT displays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the
user to easily obtain the following types of reports:
a. A general listing of all points in the network
b. List all points currently in alarm
c. List of all off-line points
d. List all points currently in override status
e. List of all disabled points
f. List all points currently locked out
g. List of all items defined in a Follow -Up file
h. List all Weekly Schedules
i. List all Holiday Programming
j. List of Limits and Deadbands
k. Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user -
selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the
hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions
shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system
information.
B. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and
energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and
modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.
1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary
to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions:
a. Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels
b. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations
c. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers
d. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and
tuning constants
e. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point
f. Add/Delete/Modify control loops
g. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications
h. Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar -based programming
i. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 15
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
j. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point
k. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes
1. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-references to
point data
m. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition
n. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords
o. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages
2. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition
shall be self -documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and
application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be provided
in logical, graphical flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily
interpreted and modified at any time in the future.
3. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all standalone DDC panel databases
shall be stored in at least one personal computer operator workstation. Continuous
supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel data bases shall be provided. In the event
that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for any reason, the
system shall automatically download a new copy of the respective data base to restore
proper operation. Data base back-up/Download shall occur over the local area network
without operator intervention. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute
downloads of any of all portions of a DDC panels data base.
C. Standalone DDC panel Local or Portable Operator's Terminals: Each DDC panel shall be
capable of supporting an operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and
historical data display, and program additions and modifications.
1. There shall be a provision for both permanently mounting the standalone DDC panel
Operator Terminal, or using it as a portable handheld unit.
2. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of 6 points
with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic
displays depicting entire mechanical systems.
3. The operator functions provided by the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall include, but
not limited to, the following:
a. Start and Stop Points
b. Modify Setpoints
c. Modify PID Loop Setpoints
d. Override PID Control
e. Change Time/Date
f. Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling
g. Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling
h. Enter Temporary Override Schedules
i. Define Holiday Schedules
j. View Analog Limits
k. Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits
1. Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits
m. Enter/Modify Analog Differentials
n. View Point History Files
4. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points in
the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This
capability shall not be restricted to a subset of predefined "global points", but shall
provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal and any DDC panel
in the network.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 16
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Operator access at all DDC panel Operator Terminals shall be identical to each other, as
well as identical to the PC or Laptop Operator Workstations. Any password changes
shall automatically be downloaded to all controllers on the network.
6. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to eliminate
the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be
provided consistent with a user's password clearance and the types of points being
displayed, to eliminated the possibility of operator error.
7. A multi -function touchpad shall be provided for point and command selection, as well as
parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the DDC panel Operator
Terminal shall change and limit touch pad functions based upon an operator's password
clearance, the function being performed, and types of points being displayed. Screen
displays shall clearly indicate only valid touchpad functions.
8. Context -Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help" manuals and tutorials shall be
provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general system
operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently
displayed menus.
9. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network devices.
the same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access points
at the DDC panel Operator's Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look -up tables.
10. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the DDC panel Operator's Terminal shall allow a
user to view a Point History field for system points. Pint History fields shall provide a
record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 30 -minute intervals, or a record
of the last ten status changes for binary type points.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Control component shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Control
components shall be grouped wherever possible, and installed within local control panels. See
plans for locations.
B. Controls Contractor shall supervise the installation of control valves, dampers, temperature
sensors, pressure sensors, actuators and sensing wells.
C. Conduit and wiring for the temperature control system not specifically shown on the electrical
prints shall be installed by electricians and mechanics employed by the Temperature Control
Contractor. All wiring must be in accordance with local and national electrical codes. All
electrical conduit wiring and wiring methods shall be in full compliance with requirements of
the electrical section.
D. Provide and install duct smoke detectors as required. The Balancing Contractor shall direct the
Controls Contractor on the proper location for installing the smoke detectors.
E. Thermostats or sensors mounted on outside walls shall be mounted on 1/4" minimum thickness
cork or rigid fiberglass.
F. Identify each item mounted on the face of a control panel with an engraved phenolic label (1/4"
high engraved letters minimum). Identify each item of control equipment (except room sensors
and thermostats).
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 17
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. All control adjustments shall be accessible without use of a ladder.
H. All thermostats or temperature sensors in the conditioned space shall have blank locking covers.
I. Airflow measuring arrays installed in fan inlet volutes must be designed to withstand velocities
encountered in this location. Mounting system is to be warranted against failure and consequent
fan damage.
3.2 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. A weather shield shall be used if located outside. Ambient temperature rating of 122°F shall not
be exceeded through any combination of medium temperature or surrounding air. Appropriate
air gaps, thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or insulation shall be provided as
necessary.
B. Water shall not be allowed to contact actuator or internal parts. Location of conduits in
temperatures dropping below dew point shall be avoided to prevent water from condensing in
conduit and running into actuator. Cords or conduit shall incorporate a drip leg if condensation
is possible.
C. Application Requirements:
1. Airtight dampers shall be fully closed and leakage minimized during mounting of
actuators. Both drive signal and spring return shall fully close dampers.
2. Where spring return actuators are required for freeze protection, the power circuit to the
actuators shall be disconnected by hard wire interlock to the freeze -stat. Use of a signal
input to the program to initiate spring return is not acceptable. Use of the control signal
to drive the actuators closed in not acceptable.
3. Face and bypass shall be proportional spring return closed to face position.
4. Outside air dampers shall be proportional control (2-10vdc or 4-20ma), with mechanical
spring to return damper to the normally closed position on power failure.
5. Relief air dampers shall be proportional control (2-I0vdc or 4-20ma), with mechanical
spring to return damper to the normally closed position on power failure.
6. Return air dampers shall be proportional control (2-10vdc or 4-20ma), with mechanical
spring to return damper to the normally open position on power failure.
7. Exhaust air dampers shall be On/Off control, spring return to normally closed position.
8. Combustion air intake dampers shall be On/Off control, spring return to open position.
9. Inlet vane actuators shall be floating or proportional control (2-10vdc or 4-20ma), non -
spring.
10. Provide sufficient torque as velocity, static, or side seals require per damper
manufacturer's recommendation. In all cases torque shall be a minimum 5 -in -lb per sq ft
for opposed blade dampers and 7 -in -lb per sq ft for parallel blade dampers. No individual
damper section may exceed 20 sq ft.
D. Terminal box actuator control:
L Each VAV box actuator control loop shall be individually tuned using the parameters set
up in Control Logic above. Where height truculence in the sensor flow control loop is
causing dithering (rapid oscillation) of actuator control loop, the sensor loop shall be
corrected mechanically and/or with software averaging as necessary.
2. VAV box CFM control point shall be accurate to ±25 CFM to avoid excessive actuator
movements. Actuator movements shall be limited to not more than 2 per minute. CFM
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 18
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
minimum controller set point shall be 25 CFM higher than calculated and scheduled by
Engineer.
3.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. It shall be the Control Contractor's responsibility to coordinate requirements with equipment
suppliers, and furnish and install all control devices necessary to provide the control sequence
specified, where not furnished by others. This is to include control transformers, room or
insertion thermostats, and other devices without limitation.
3.4 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION
A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the control hardware
and software has been established, the Control Contractor shall provide on-site operator
instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction during normal working
hours shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware,
software, and accessories.
B. At a time mutually agreed upon during system commissioning as stated above, the System
Contractor shall give instruction to the Owner's designated personnel on the operation of the
Control systems and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions
specified. Operator orientation of the control system shall include, but not limited to, the
overall operation program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total
integrated system), commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator
intervention required in responding to the System's operation.
C. The training shall be in three sessions as follows:
1. Twenty -Four Hour Initial Training - three day training after system is started up and at
least one week before first acceptance test. Manual shall have been submitted at least
two weeks prior to training so that the Owner's personnel can start to familiarize
themselves with the system before classroom instruction.
2. First Four Hour Follow-up - approximately two weeks after initial training, and before
Formal Acceptance. These sessions will deal with more advanced topics and answer
questions.
3. Two Day Warranty Follow -Up - 8 hours in no less than 4 hour increments, to be
scheduled at the request of the Owner during the warranty period. These sessions shall
cover topics as requested by the Owner, including how to install additional points and
add local control modules.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Provide the Owner with the manual containing all instructions for operations and maintenance
of all components at least 30 days prior to substantial completion and/or at least 15 days prior to
Initial Training sessions.
B. Manual will contain all copies of AS -BUILT control drawings and schematics.
C. Manual shall contain manufacturer's catalog data and shop drawings for all control components.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 19
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Post a copy of the final sequence of operation and control drawings, under glass, in the
mechanical room adjacent the main control panel.
E. Provide the list of spare parts in the manual.
END OF SECTION 230900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230900 - 20
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 230902 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and
Section 230500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified
herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Furnish complete and operational VFD systems as shown on the plans. All work to be
furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division 01,
and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Variable frequency drives (VFDs).
2. Controls and control connections.
3. Electrical power connections.
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 230500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 230593: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
C. Section 230900: Controls and Instrumentation
D. Section 232123: Pumps and Hydronic Specialties
E. Section 233412: Air Handling Equipment
F. Division 26: Coordination of interface items between the Mechanical equipment and controls
and the Electrical Work specified in Division 26.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier of VFD shall be solely responsible for assuring that the VFD shall work properly with
the motor(s) being controlled. VFD supplier shall provide all materials and labor required to
replace motors, bearing, shafts, etc. that may be incompatible with VFD or become damaged by
VFD at no additional cost to the owner. VFD supplier shall reimburse Architect and Engineer
at their standard hourly rates for their involvement in resolving failures due to their VFDs.
B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years experience building similar equipment for
controlling the speed for induction motors and at least one hundred successful installations with
a variety of VFD sizes and applications.
C. To insure quality and minimize failures the VFD(s) and connected motor(s) shall be by one
manufacturer. To reduce the known problem of bearing failures by "fluting" the VFD switching
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230902 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
rates shall be 6-8 Khz wherever possible. Manufactured VFDs at switching rates of 12-15 Khz
shall be accompanied by an additional extended warranty to cover bearings and motors to a
period of ten (10) years. Should it be impossible to provide matched motor and VFD's provide a
shaft grounding system for the driven motor. Acceptable manufacturer is Shaft Grounding
Systems in Albany, Oregon (Representative: DP&A Sales 541-997-4068) or Aegis Shaft
Grounding Ring (www.est-aegis.com/cse).
D. To insure quality and minimize infantile failures at the job site, the VFD shall be burned in at
the factory at an ambient of 104°F minimum for at least 8 hours. The VFD shall be operating a
dynamometer and the load speed shall be cycled during the test. All optional and special
features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.
E. Codes and Standards: Provide VFDs conforming to the requirements of the latest addition of
the following:
1. ANSI/EIA 508Electrical Performance Standards for Television Broadcast Transmitters
2. UL508. all VFD equipment provided under this section must be labeled as UL508
approved.
3. ANSI/IEEE 518Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize Electrical
Noise Inputs to Controllers from External Sources.
4. ANSI/IEEE 519-1992: IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electrical power systems.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval the following materials:
1. VFD supplier shall provide reference list showing at least ten years of prior
manufacturing experience in production of VFDs and a list of at least twenty successful
installations with a variety of VFD sizes and applications.
2. Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, and maintenance and operational
instructions for variable frequency drives. Indicate electrical service and special
requirements. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, repair data, and parts listing.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Protect units against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged
units. Remove damaged equipment from site.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide two-year (24 months) warranty under provisions of Division 01. Provide extended ten
(10) year warranty on motors and bearings as described above, if applicable. The warranty shall
include parts, labor, travel costs, and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide
factory authorized service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230902 - 2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. ABB, Reliance, or approved equal by Square D, Safetronics, Toshiba, Yaskawa, Danfoss-
Graham, or Allen-Bradley. Connected motors should be by the same manufacturer whenever
possible.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Furnish a complete VFD as scheduled on the plans. Refer to plans for locations of variable
speed controllers. Each fan or pump motor shall have a dedicated VFD unit. All standard and
optional features shall be included within the VFD enclosure unless otherwise specified. The
VFD enclosure shall be provided to match the environment requirements where the VFD will be
mounted and operated. Provide NEMA rated enclosure as required.
B. The adjustable frequency controller shall convert three-phase, 60 Hz utility power to adjustable
voltage and frequency, three-phase, AC power for stepless motor speed control from 10% to
100% of the motor's 60 Hz speed.
C. The VFD shall include a converter and an inverter section. The converter section shall convert
fixed frequency and voltage AC utility power to a DC voltage. Drive shall utilize a single
surface mount micro -processor.
D. The VFD shall be of the pulse width modulation (PWM) type. VFDs shall be provided with an
advanced flux vector frequency control to limit noise at drive and motor.
E. Drive manufacturer or sales representative shall evaluate electrical system of the project. Any
additional protective equipment such as line filters, reactors or input isolation transformers
required to prevent interference from drive with other electrical equipment in the building shall
be included as part of the bid. No additional expense shall be incurred by Owner for provision
or installation of these devices if required for electrical system operation after drive has been
purchased. Units shall include factory mounted input line reactors.
F. The VFD maximum output current rating shall be 110% of the motor nameplate full load
current. VFD shall be able to start into a rotating load in either direction without trip.
G. The VFD and options shall be tested to ASNI/EIA Standard 508 and listed by a nationally
recognized testing agency such as UL or ETL.
H. The VFD and options shall comply with the applicable requirements of the latest standards of
ANSI, IEEE, and the National Electrical Code.
I. Power line noise shall be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch depth as defined in
ANSI/IEEE Standard 519.
J. The drive efficiency shall be 97% (minimum) and have a fundamental power factor of 0.98 at
all speeds.
2.3 BASIC FEATURES
A. The VFD shall be housed in a NEMA enclosure appropriate to the mounting location.
1. NEMA 12 enclosure shall be used for dusty locations, plenum mechanical rooms,
penthouses, or air stream mounting.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 ,Glumac
230902 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. NEMA 3R is required for all locations exposed to falling rain, snow or ice or to indoor
locations subject to falling water.
3. If NEMA 1 enclosure is suitable it shall be louvered, vented through cabinet using a
removable louver/filter, and equipped with an integral cooling fan with thermostat
control, and arranged so that units can be mounted back to back on a frame and/or side to
side on a wall. Venting fans shall be supplied in enclosure if required. If a different
NEMA enclosure is indicated the enclosure shall provide means of maintaining the drive
at temperature acceptable to the drive manufacturer in exterior ambient temperatures.
Enclosure shall be complete with no requirements for low voltage wiring. Factory
mounted main circuit breaker disconnect shall be included.
B. The following operator controls shall be located on the front of the enclosure:
1. Door mounted operator digital controls consisting of auto/manual switch, start/stop
switch with reset and manual speed control. In the auto position, the drive will start/stop
from a remote contact closure and motor speed is determined by the follower signal. In
the manual position, motor speed is determined by manual speed selection. Manual
potentiometers are not acceptable.
2. Power on pilot light to indicate that the VFD is being supplied by the power line.
3. Fault digital display to indicate that the VFD has tripped on a fault condition. The drive
shall retain in memory the last three (3) fault conditions that caused the drive to trip.
Indication should include but not be limited to the following: Under voltage, over
voltage, overcurrent, over temperature, phase loss, phase imbalance and external trip.
4. Digital display to indicate voltage, current, frequency or RPM. Selectable by the
operator while the VFD is running.
C. VFD shall be provided with two (2) each form C dry contacts for indication of run and fault
starters. In addition each drive shall have an analog output signal 0 to 10vDC (or 4-20mA )to
indicate drive speed (percent of full load).
D. While in the remote mode, the VFD will attempt at least five (5) restarts after a power outage,
drive fault or external fault before requiring manual reset. After ten minutes of runtime, the
restart attempts return to zero. The VFD shall display a countdown timer when auto restart is
being attempted, or incorporate programming to select number of restarts, number of faults per
time period, and time between restarts.
2.4 PROTECTIVE FEATURES
A. Protection against input transient voltage spikes.
B. Overload protection for the motor. If power input or output is interrupted while the control is in
operation, no damage shall result. The unit shall be able to operate without any equipment
connected to the inverter output. The drive must protect itself against all phase -to -phase short
circuits and ground faults.
C. Protection against input power undervoltage, overvoltage and phase loss.
D. Protection against output current overload and overcurrent.
E. Protection against over -temperature within the VFD enclosure.
F. Protection against overvoltage on the DC bus.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230902-4
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Drive shall have an auxiliary contact to permit a remote trip.
H. I)C bus discharge circuit and warning light for protection of service personnel or meet UL
requirements for DC bus discharge.
I. Drive shall be capable of operating and insensitive to imbalance or out -of -rotation incoming
power phase.
J. Lockable main fused input disconnect shall be factory mounted as specified on the drawings or
as required by the application.
2.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Maximum speed, adjustable to 100% base speed.
B. Minimum speed, adjustable to 10% base speed.
C. Acceleration time, adjustable 1 to 360 seconds (minimum) factory set at 20 seconds.
D. Deceleration time, adjustable 1 to 360 seconds (minimum) factory set at 20 seconds.
E. Current limit, adjustable 50 to 110%.
F. Adjustable speed lock -outs for three (3) operating ranges.
G. Capable of following 0-5MA, 4-20MA, 10-50MA, 0-4v c, 0-8vDc, 0-10vDC grounded or ungrounded
signal as required to interface with the building control system.
2.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. The VFD shall be designed to operate within the following service conditions:
1.. Ambient temperature, 32°F -104°F.
2. Relative humidity, 5-95%, non -condensing.
3. Elevation to 3,300 feet without derating.
4. AC line voltage variation, -10% to +10% of nominal.
2.7 SPECIAL FEATURES
A. All control wiring, and accessories shall be factory installed in the drive casing so that only the
connection of the remote auxiliary start/stop and override contacts is required to provide
override control as described above.
B. All drives shall be equipped with fail safety speed control (adjustable 20-100%), factory
installed and wired, that operates as follows: If the drive is on (in either normal or override
mode) and no signal is detected from the building control system, the drive shall operate at a
preset adjustable speed. On resumption of the building control system signal, the drive shall
operate as normal. Fail safe speed shall be adjusted through digital keyboard mounted on the
outside drive cabinet.
C. Drives shall be protected with input line reactors factory mounted.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230902 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Provide drive with a communications board enabling it to communicate with the building
management system (BMS) over a serial RS -485 interface or with a BACNET, LonWorks,
Modbus, Profibus or BMS proprietary interface.
2.8 BYPASS
A. Provide a manual 3 -contactor bypass consisting of a door interlocked main fused disconnect
padlockable in the off position, a built-in motor starter and a three position
DRIVE/OFF/BYPASS/TEST switch controlling three contactors. In the DRIVE position the
motor is operated at an adjustable speed from the VFD. In the OFF position, the motor and
VFD are disconnected. In the BYPASS position, the motor is operated at the full speed from
the AC power line and power is disconnected from the VFD so that service can be performed.
Include motor thermal overload and fuse or circuit breaker protection while in bypass operation.
B. Service personnel shall be able to defeat the main power disconnect and open the bypass
enclosure without disconnecting power using a specially designed tool and mechanism while
meeting all local and national code requirements for safety.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify that mounting surface is ready to receive work. Mount the VFD(s) on the wall or at
supports in locations identified on the drawings. Provide a layout drawing of VFD locations to
electrical installer.
B. if the disconnect for the equipment powered by the VFD is in a location where it is probable
that it will be placed in an off position prior to shutting down the VFD, the contractor is to
provide electrical protection for the VFD. This may be in the form of a conduit and wire
interlock between disconnect and drive or internal protection integral to the VFD.
C. Coordinate wiring and control with Control Contractor. Control installers shall install all wiring
associated with control signals into the VFD and for interlock control wiring between
disconnects and VFDs.
D. Electrical installer shall install all line voltage power wiring and conduit from electrical
switchgear and from the VFD to the disconnect at the controlled motor. The only exception to
this is when the motor and drive are factory installed on a packaged piece of equipment. In that
case the wiring from drive to motor is to be installed in the factory to meet the requirements
herein. Coordinate with Division 26 work.
E. Line length between VFD and driven motor shall be as short as possible. Line length shall not
exceed twenty (20) feet without prior approval from Engineer.
F. Input and output power wiring shall be installed in separate grounded conduit. In addition,
control wiring shall be installed in its own separate grounded conduit.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230902 - 6
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Use symmetric motor cable between the VFD and motor, with low inductance shield or conduit,
and with all joints joined with bonding straps. MC metal clad 3 phase type cable per NEC 334-
1, UL approved, 3 phase conductors and 3 ground conductors. Sheath to be continuous
corrugated aluminum. Manufacturer and type to be BICC 2 kV rated Drives Cable, Anixter
series 7V, or approved equal.
H. Use cable connectors with 360 degree connections to the armor conduit at both ends of motor
cable. Verify electrical path from inverter cabinet entry plate to armor / conduit to motor
terminal box.
I. Install an auxiliary high frequency bonding connection for potential equalization between VFD
frame and building steel.
J. Unless absolutely necessary do not install disconnect between VFD and connected motor. VFD
is to be furnished with a lockable disconnect.
K. Installation in "Fan Wall " Air Handlers: When a single VFD supplies multiple fans, assemble
and prewire units at the factory, installing conduit and conductors between the fan motor, VFD,
and terminal strips. Wiring from the VFD output terminals to the fan motor shall be Belden
VFD Cable installed in conduit (295XX Series).
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S START-UP SERVICES
A. The manufacturer shall provide start-up service in the form of a factory trained service
technician. The service technician shall verify correct installation, verify control wiring, verify
power wiring, start-up the drive, and check for proper operation. The service technician shall
provide final adjustments to meet the specified performance requirements. Harmonic test with
scope shall be also performed at the job site and results submitted to the Owner's
Representative. Fully staffed parts and service personnel shall be within four hours travel from
the jobsite.
B. Carrier Frequency Set up:
1. Set initial carrier frequency at 2 kHz.
2. Manually raise VFD speed output from 10 Hz to 60 Hz by 10 Hz increments, allowing at
least 15 seconds between each adjustment. If excessive motor noise is heard at any
speed, raise carrier frequency by 2 kHz increments until motor noise is no longer
excessive. Do not set carrier frequency higher than 10 kHz.
3. If excessive motor noise continues to be heard at or below 10 kHz, inform owner. If the
motor is provided by the VFD manufacturer, either repair, replace, or provide 5 year
extended warranty on the effected motor.
C. Lockout of resonant frequencies:
1. With carrier frequency set per the above specification, manually and slowly raise VFD
speed output from 10 Hz to 60 Hz by 1 Hz increments. If excessive motor, frame, or
driven load noise is heard at any speed, lock out that frequency.
2. Each frequency skip shall be programmed with as narrow a bandwidth as possible, while
still avoiding the most objectionable range of resonant frequencies. Each frequency skip
bandwidth shall not exceed 5 Hz without approval by Engineer.
D. Training:
1. Provide 1 hour training session to the owner's representative.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230902 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Training to include
a. Demonstration of operation of bypass switch and door -mounted disconnect switches.
Explain emergency operation.
b. Demonstrate operation of operator keypads for viewing data and setting parameters.
c. Demonstrate operation in manual mode, including setting of specific speeds.
d. Explain the drive parameters that might require operator adjustment.
e. Describe troubleshooting techniques and warranty procedure.
END OF SECTION 230902
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230902 - 8
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 23 09 093 — SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
1.1 GENERAL
A. As a minimum, all points of control will be provided and monitored via the Building
Management System (BMS). The Controls Contractor will provide the necessary gateways to
provide these control and monitoring points.
1.2 PACKAGED GAS/ELECTRIC CONSTANT VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNITS [RTU]
A. NOTES: The following is a typical sequence for a unit specified with control provided by the
BAS/EMS DDC contractor. This is a sequence for a packaged rooftop unit with 100% OSA
capability, gas furnace section, dx cooling with hot gas reheat, supply and economizer exhaust
fan.
1. General: A separate stand-alone DDC controller will be provided to control each air
handling unit.
2. Scheduling: Unit supply fan will start and stop according to the owner's time schedule.
3. During occupied periods, supply fans will run continuously. If more than three systems
are scheduled for the same start time, stagger start-ups of each system by no less than 30
seconds.
4. During the unoccupied cycles, the supply fans will cycle ON and the heating will be
activated whenever the space sensors sense 60°F or below (night low -limit).
5. Temperature Control:
a. A discharge air sensor is to provide for heating/cooling anticipation and economizer
low limit.
b. Provide individually adjustable heating and cooling space set points with an
adjustable deadband range of 3F to 6F. Space temperature deviation above the
cooling setpoint or below the heating setpoint will generate a demand signal to
control the system. On a call for cooling, the economizer is to be modulated for free
cooling. An adjustable damper position switch will provide a signal to the system to
activate or deactivate the economizer exhaust fan. The exhaust volume is to be
controlled by a discharge damper modulating to maintain building static pressure in
the zone. (Note that for units larger than 15 tons, the pressure is to be controlled by
modulating the fan speed).
c. If space demand requires additional cooling, mechanical cooling stages will be
energized. The economizer will start to modulate closed if discharge temperature
drops below 62F. At 50F discharge, the economizer will be at minimum position.
d. On a call for heating, furnace heating stages will be energized as needed to meet
setpoint.
e. The economizer will start to modulate closed if mixed air temperature drops below
53F. At 45F, the economizer will be at minimum position.If the temperature still
drops below 45F, close the outside air damper to prevent freezing.
f. Night Setback Cooling:
1) Optimal start process or night setback cooling shall enable the cool down
sequence.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
23 09 93-1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2) During evening unoccupied hours, night setback cool down mode is to be
enabled up to 2 hours before occupancy when the OSA temperature is 55F
(adjustable).
3) During night cool down, the supply and return fans turn on, the oustside, return
and exhaust dampers modulate to achieve the cool down setpoint and the
compressors locked out to discharge setpoint of 63 F (adjustable). Unit to turn on
when room temperature is 85F and turn off at 80F.
B. Optimal Start:
1. The unit shall start prior to scheduled occupancy based on the time necessary for the
zones to reach their occupied setpoints. The start time shall automatically adjust based
on changes in outside air temperature and zone temperatures.
2. Design criteria: 84F dry bulb in the summer and 25F in the winter.
C. Life Safety:
1. Mount smoke detectors in the supply air fan discharge. If smoke detector trips, both fans
will stop. The minimum and maximum outside air damper, the return air damper, and the
exhaust air damper will close. The fan shutdown function will be hard wired.
2. Emergency Power Operation (Optional)
a. Upon sensing of a contact closure signal from the emergency power system
indicating start of generator and transfer of building power to emergency power
system, lock -out all mechanical cooling/compressor operation. Div. 16 will provide
aux. contact at the automatic transfer switch located in the main building electrical
room.
D. Suggested Point List (Sequence of Operations may require additional control points, which
takes precedence):
1. Mixed air dampers AO
2. Mixed air temperature AI
3. Cooling Stage 1 DO
4. Cooling Stage 2 DO
5. Gas Heat Stage 1 DO
6. Gas Heat Stage 2 DO
7. Return Air Smoke Detector (if applicable) DI
8. Filter Status DI
9. Supply fan start/stop DO
10. Supply fan Status DI
11. Economizer fan start/stop DO
12. Economizer fan status DI
13. Relief damper control AO
14. Space pressure Al
1.3 BUILDING PRESSURE RELIEF [REF]
A. Volume and pressure control:
1. General: All variable speed drives will start their respective fans at low speed and will
ramp up to operating speed slowly upon fan start up.
2. Return fan capacity:
a. Building Pressure Control Method: The return will be controlled to maintain building
pressure at a constant and slight positive pressure of 0.02"w.g. Building pressure
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 09 93-2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
sensors will be located as indicated on the plan. Building pressure will be maintained
so that no sensing location exceeds the setpoint. Return fan capacity control will be
via variable frequency drive. The outside reference probe will be located on the roof
away from any structures that will effect or cause deflection of air currents. The
outside reference probe will be a fine screened mesh located inside a weather tight
enclosure with several drain holes in the bottom. Probe will not be located on a wall.
b. Return Duct Safety: A duct mounted static pressure sensor/controller will be
provided in the return/exhaust duct of the air handling unit as a negative pressure
limit to override the return fan capacity control. Locate the sensor in the return
ductwork immediately before the air handling unit. This shut down will be
hardwired and not a software mediated event.
B. Suggested Point List (Sequence of Operations may require additional control points, which
takes precedence):
1. Relief fan on/off DO
2. Relief fan VFD control AO
3. VFD trouble contact DI
4. Relief fan Status DI
5. Building Static Pressure AI
1.4 TYPICAL PACKAGED SPLIT -SYSTEM HEAT PUMP (FCU -1.1 & HP -R.1)
A. NOTES: The following is a typical sequence for a unit specified with limited BMS interface to
a packaged control system. This is a sequence for a packaged split -system unit with dx
cooling/heating, supply fan. The packaged split -system unit supplier to provide basic controls
with interface to the DDC system as described below.
B. General: A separate stand-alone DDC controller will be provided to control each fan coil unit.
C. Scheduling: Unit supply fan will start and stop according to the owner's time schedule.
D. During occupied periods, supply fans will run continuously.
E. During the unoccupied cycles, the supply fans will cycle ON and the heating will be activated
whenever the space sensors sense 60F or below (night low -limit).
F. Temperature Control
1.. Unit shall be controlled via duct thermostat mounted in the return air duct of the ATM
Vestibule with a cooling setpoint of 74F (adjustable) and a heating setpoint of 68F
(adjustable).
2. Provide individually adjustable heating and cooling space set points with an adjustable
deadband range of 3F to 6F. Space temperature deviation above the cooling setpoint or
below the heating setpoint will generate a demand signal to control the system. On a call
for cooling, the economizer is to be modulated for free cooling.
3. If space demand requires additional cooling, mechanical cooling stages will be energized.
The economizer will start to modulate closed if discharge temperature drops below 62F.
At 50F discharge, the economizer will be at minimum position.
4. On a call for heating, heating cycle will be energized as needed to meet setpoint.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 09 93-3
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Suggested Point List (Sequence of Operations may require additional control points, which
takes precedence):
1. Unit Start/Stop DO
2. Unit Status DI
3. Cooling Status DI
4. Heating Status DI
5. Fan Status DI
6. Space Temperature AI
7. Trouble Alarm DI
1.5 GENERAL TOILET EXHAUST FAN (TEF -R.1)
A. General: The exhaust fans for general uses, public and staff toilet rooms and toilet/shower
combinations are to run continuously during the occupied periods and remain OFF during
unoccupied and morning warmup periods. Fans will be started and stopped by the BMS from
time of day scheduling at the Operator's Terminal.
B. Suggested Point List (Sequence of Operations may require additional control points, which
takes precedence):
1. Fan Start/Stop AO
2. Fan Status AI
3. Trouble Alarm DI
1.6 THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED EXHAUST FAN (AEF -1.1)
A. ATM Room
1. Exhaust Fan Control: A local line voltage room thermostat will cycle the electrical
rooms exhaust fan to maintain space temperatures to control at 78F (adjustable). Monitor
space temperature and alarm over temperature at central operator's terminal.
B. Suggested Point List (Sequence of Operations may require additional control points, which
takes precedence):
1. Room Temperature AI
2. Exhaust Fan Status DI
3. Trouble Alarm DI
END OF SECTION 23 09 93
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 09 93-4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 233113 - AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
230500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Ductwork - Rigid, Flexible and Fabric
2. Ductwork Specialties
3. Flexible Connections
4. Sealants, Adhesives and Tapes
5. Flashings
6. Bird Screens
7. Duct Access Panels and Doors
8. Control Dampers
9. Backdraft Dampers
10. Louvers
11. Diffusers, Grilles, and Registers
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 230500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 230593: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
C. Section 230700: Mechanical Insulation
D. Section 230900: Controls and Instrumentation
E. Division 26: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Provide products conforming to the requirements of the following:
1. ARI 885-98 "Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application
of Air Terminal and Air Outlets."
2. AMCA-210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
3. ANSI S1.23 - Designation of Sound Power Emitted by Machinery and Equipment.
4. ASC -A7001 - Standard for Duct Sealants.
5. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. Type 304 or 304 stainless steel.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
. Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
6. ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -
Coated (Galvanized) Hot -Dip Process. G90 zinc -coated.
7. ASTM A527/A527M - Standard Specification for Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality.
8. TIMA AAC-101 - Standard for fiberglass duct liner with erosion proof facing.
9. UL 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connections, Class 1.
B. Conform to NFPA 90A "Standards for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems".
C. Provide and construct ductwork systems in conformance with the latest editions of the
following documents:
1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible - 1995" (HDCS)
2. ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook "Duct Construction" chapter
3. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook "Duct Design" chapter
D. Alternatives: The SMACNA standards and publications referenced in this Section of the
specifications establish ductwork construction requirements.
E. All ductwork and equipment shall be seismically supported and braced per the SMACNA
"Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems".
F. Flame/Smoke Rating: All materials, including sealants and adhesives, exposed within plenum
shall have a flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed index of 50 or less, as tested
by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction, submit for approval on all materials and equipment:
1. Ductwork - Rigid, Flexible and Fabric
2. Ductwork Specialties
3. Flexible Connections
4. Sealants, Adhesives and Tapes and calculated leakage estimate based on Class 3 (3
cfm/sq.ft). leakage.
5. Flashings
6. Bird Screens
7. Duct Access Panels and Doors
8. Backdraft Dampers
9. Control Dampers
10. Diffusers, Grilles, and Registers
11. Fire and Smoke Dampers
a. Submit a schedule of selected dampers listing the following information for each
damper: Location, nominal size, free area velocity, and pressure drop at free area
velocity.
12. Sound Traps
13. VAV Boxes
14. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113-2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Certifications: Provide a duct schedule, certified by an officer of the sheet metal fabrication
subcontractor, that the ductwork conforms to SMACNA standards, and for each sheet metal
system furnished on the project include:
1. System name.
2. Duct material.
3. Duct gauge.
4. SMACNA rectangular reinforcement number.
5. SMACNA intermediate reinforcement number.
6. SMACNA transverse reinforcement number.
7. Rod diameter and type.
8. Sealant type.
9. Attachment method.
10. Duct system design pressure.
C. Construction IAQ Management Plan: Collaborate with the general contractor to submit and
implement an IAQ Management Plan for the construction process meeting the requirements of
the SMACNA IAQ Guidelines. This plan should address the protection of the ventilation
system components during construction and cleanup of contaminated components after
construction is complete. SMACNA IAQ Guideline recommends control measures in five
areas. The IAQ Management Plan should address how compliance has been achieved in these
required five areas as follows:
1. HVAC Protection
a. Shutdown of return side of existing HVAC system in areas effected by heavy
construction.
b. Provision of temporary filters if existing or new systems must remain operational
during construction.
c. Dampering of supply and returns and sealing of openings in areas subject to
construction dust.
1 Source Control
a. How will reduction of contaminants be reduced at the source?
b. What steps will be taken to employ low emitting products and sealants.
c. How will air handling equipment be cycled off when not needed.
3. Pathway Interruption
a. Describe how the construction space will be ventilated as required to dilute
contaminants.
b. Describe how occupied spaces adjacent to construction areas will be kept at positive
pressure relative to spaces under construction.
4. Housekeeping: Describe how the following housekeeping objectives will be
implemented:
a. Reduction of dust generated by work will be suppressed.
b. Maintaining a frequent cleaning frequency for dust and particulates.
c. Remove spills or excess applications of solvent -containing products as soon as
possible.
d. Remove accumulated water and keep work areas as dry as possible.
e. Protect insulation materials from exposure to moisture.
5. Scheduling: Describe how overlap of construction activity and ongoing building
occupancy activities will be minimized.
D. Field Manual: Submit one copy of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible". Maintain a second copy on the project site.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Any ductwork installed without prior approval by the specifier, shall be replaced at the expense
of the contractor.
F. The contractor must comply with the enclosed specification in its entirety. If on inspections, the
specifier finds changes have been made without prior approval, the contractor will make the
applicable changes to comply with this specification, at the contractor's expense.
G. At the discretion of the specifier, sheet metal gauges, and reinforcing may be checked at various
times to verify all duct construction is in compliance.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged components. Remove damaged products from project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK
A. All interior ducts shall be constructed with G-60 or better galvanized steel (ASTM 527) LFQ,
chem treat. Exterior ductwork or duct exposed to high humidity conditions shall be G-90 or
better galvanized steel LFQ, chem treated. Construct all ducts and plenum of gauges, and with
joints, bracing, reinforcing, and other construction details in accordance with the latest
construction standards previously listed. Metals shall be manufactured by United States Steel,
Kaiser, Rolok or equal.
B. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are net, inside, clear dimensions. For internally lined
ducts, add lining thickness to determine metal duct dimensions.
C. Ducts shall be constructed of material gauges and reinforcement per SMACNA pressurization
classifications to meet 150% of the pressure requirements for external static pressure scheduled
on drawings for the fans serving each system. Where differences exist between SMACNA and
the prevailing building code, the gauge or construction method of the submitted ductwork shall
be the more stringent of the two standards. See also Part III Execution for matrix of
requirements.
D. All ductwork, fittings, grilles/diffuser, etc, shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel in,
and around, magnetically/electrically sensitive rooms. Refer to all construction documents for
location of these critical rooms.
2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Joints — Sealing
1. Duct tape is not allowed. Rolled elastomeric duct sealants are not allowed.
2. Solvent -based and oil-based sealants are not allowed.
3. Seal all transverse joints - this includes mechanical joints similar to Ductmate on all
supply, return, exhaust and outside air intake ducts.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 4
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
4. All sealant systems for outdoor application to be suitable for use in exposure to water.
Vulcum 801 and 351.
5. All sealant systems for indoor application to be meet VOC limits as specified in South
Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168 limiting VOC's to 100 g/1. Sealants
by Hardcast, Ductmate, Mon -Eco Industries, United McGill or equal, as recommended
for ductwork application.
6. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, suitable for high
velocity and high pressure applications, UL 181B -M listed, UL 723 classified, and
complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
a. Outdoor Application: Not permitted where subject to moisture exposure.
b. Indoor Application: Hardcast Iron Grip, Ductmate PROseal, Mon -Eco EZ Seal 44-
44, or equal.
7. Two -Part Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral
compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermally with tape to form
hard, durable airtight seal. Hardcast Two Part II, McGill Uni-Cast, or equal.
B. Joints - Rectangular Ducts
1. Slip drive joints, standard seams, flanges or welding as required by SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards for system static pressure. Ductmate, MEX Industries, or
equal are acceptable joint methods, but must be sealed as described previously.
Transverse joints shall be constructed per Figure 1-4 for types T-8 through T-25. T-1 and
T-5 slip joints are NOT allowed. Joint T-2, T-3, T-6 and T-7 reinforced slip joints are
allowed below 2" static pressures.
C. Joints - Round
1. Exposed Ductwork: Slip drive and sheet metal screws.
2. Concealed Ductwork: Sheet metal screws.
D. Elbows
1. Construct long radius elbows with centerline not less than 1.5 times the duct width.
Shorter radius elbows may be used where required to fit in restricted spaces, or as shown.
Provide single thickness turning vanes on all short rectangular radius elbows less than
25" wide. Provide double thickness turning vanes for short rectangular radius elbows 25"
wide and greater. Number of vanes per SMACNA. Elbows with square throat and radius
heel are NOT allowed.
E. Transitions
1. Construct transitions with minimum slope of 1 to 5 ratio and in conformance to
SMACNA.
F. Branch Connections
1.. Provide 45° entry boots or radius taps for rectangular duct take -offs and conical or
bellmouth taps for round duct take -offs. Straight 90° taps are not allowed, except where
round take -off duct size equals round branch duct size. Provide volume dampers at take-
offs for balancing if not specifically noted as provided at outlet or inlet. Provide
insulation guards at transitions to lined ductwork.
2.3 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" 1995 Edition. This shall
be subsequently referred to as the SMACNA Manual. All ductwork must comply with all local,
code requirements. Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Diagonally cross break
all panels on ducts 30 inches wide and larger, or bead using automatic bead machine with beads
at 12 inches on center or less. All connections shall utilize 45° boot take -offs. Bullhead tees
and straight taps are not permitted. All ductwork shall be aluminum or stainless steel in, and
around, magnetically/electrically sensitive rooms.
2.4 ROUND DUCTWORK
A. Round and oval ductwork shall be constructed to SMACNA round ductwork requirements of
galvanized sheet steel. Spiral lock seams, only, to 50" diameter. Larger than 50" may be
welded longitudinal or spiral lock seam. Lap or snap lock seams are not permitted for round
ductwork of any size. Provide beaded sleeve joints or flanges with gasket joints. Elbows shall
be 5 -gore mitered and welded. All elbows shall be long radius type with centerline radius to
duct diameter of 1.5, exceptions will only be allowed at restricted space locations. All
connections shall utilize welded conical tees, aluminum conical fitting with damper by
Flexmaster #CBD, or 45° boot take -offs by Flexmaster #STOD. Spin -in type or other types of
butt tees, bullhead tees or straight taps are not permitted. Flat oval shall be utilized in space -
restricted areas. All ductwork shall be aluminum or stainless steel in, and around,
magnetically/electrically sensitive rooms.
2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Flexible one -inch thick insulated round ductwork may be utilized where shown on the Drawings
and at the last seven (7') feet to each air outlet and inlet, unless shown otherwise on the plans.
Maximum of only one 90° bend in any length. No intermediate joints are allowed. Connect
each end with stainless steel screw operated drawbands. Support duct to maintain smooth shape
without sagging. All connections shall utilize welded conical tees, aluminum conical fitting
with damper by Flexmaster #CBD, or 45° boot take -offs by Flexmaster #STOD. Spin -in type
or other types of butt tees, bullhead tees or straight taps are not permitted.
B. Flexible ductwork for low pressure systems with static pressure at or below 2" w.g. positive
pressure shall be a trilaminate of aluminized foil, fiberglass insulation, and aluminized
polyester, mechanically locked to galvanized steel helix without adhesives, exterior 1"
fiberglass insulation and fire retardant plastic outer jacket. Flexmaster #Type 5 or approved
equal.
C. Flexible ductwork for medium and high pressure systems with static pressures above 2" w.g.
through 10" w.g. positive pressure shall be a heavy coated fiberglass cloth fabric mechanically
locked to galvanized steel helix without adhesives, exterior 1" fiberglass insulation and fire
retardant plastic outer jacket. Flexmaster #Type 4 or approved equal.
D. Flexiblealuminum ductwork for use in magnetic/electrically sensitive room environments, such
as MRI rooms, in low pressure systems with static pressure at or below 2" w.g. positive pressure
shall be a trilaminate of aluminized foil with aluminum helix with exterior 1" aluminum jacket
fiberglass insulation. Flexmaster #TL -V or approved equal.
2.6 PRODUCT CONVEYING VAPOR/MOISTURE DUCTWORK
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 6
i
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Ductwork serving Type II Kitchen hoods and dishwasher exhaust hoods or connections, shall be
constructed of 20 gauge stainless steel ductwork with longitudinal seam at top of horizontal runs
and all joints sealed watertight. Slope duct back to point of air inlet. Ductwork may be
constructed of aluminum and of other gauges with pre -approval, and as allowed by SMACNA
guidelines and local jurisdiction.
B. Ductwork for humidifiers shall be constructed of 20 gauge stainless steel ductwork with
longitudinal seam at top of horizontal runs and all joints sealed watertight. Duct length shall be
as required by humidifier manufacturer, or as shown on drawings whichever is greater, to allow
for full absorption of water vapor. This portion of duct shall include an integral drain pan and
drain line connection.
C. Ductwork serving shower rooms or other wet areas shall be constructed similar to ductwork
serving dishwashers as noted above or may be fabricated of aluminum ductwork. Where
shower room exhaust ducts connect to a general exhaust riser, the non-ferrous ductwork with
sealed joints need only extend to point of connection to the general exhaust riser.
D. Environmental exhaust ductwork serving domestic clothes dryers shall be constructed of metal
and shall have smooth interior surface. Provide backdraft damper at discharge to atmosphere.
2.7 DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES
A. Volume and Splitter Dampers: Galvanized sheet metal blade and frame with Ventfabrics Inc.,
Ventlok operating hardware. For accessible dampers, provide #641 self -locking dial regulators
and #644 self-locking dial regulators for insulated ductwork, #637 square end bearing, and #635
spring end bearing, as applicable. For inaccessible dampers, provide #666 or #677 concealed
locking damper regulator with bearings as above. For static pressures above 3" W.G., provide
#640 HiVel dial regulator and #609 HiVel end bearing for accessible dampers. Regulators shall
extend to and through ceiling with neatly installed hardware at the finished ceiling. For
inaccessible dampers requiring adjustment through diffusers use Young Regulator, Bowden
cable control system.
B. Multi -louver Volume Dampers: 16 gauge galvanized steel frame. Opposed, 6" wide, 16 gauge
galvanized steel blades. Concealed linkage in frame. Ruskin #CD35/OBD or equal.
C. Flexible Connections: Provide flexible connectors at the discharge and inlet of fans, air
handlers, rotating mechanical equipment, and where shown on the Drawings for proper
vibration isolation. Neoprene impregnated glass cloth with 24 gauge galvanized metal frame.
Neoprene -only connectors are not allowed. Minimum dimensions - 3" metal, 3" fabric, 3"
metal. Ventfabrics #Ventglas or approved equal by Duro Dyne, Q Industries, consolidated
Kinetics, Ductmate Proflex or Elgen.
D. Ducts through roof shall be 16 gauge (or minimum of 2 gauges heavier than attaching
ductwork), flashed and counterflashed, and provided with storm collars to secure a watertight
construction.
E. Bird Screens: 14 gauge, 'A", galvanized wire mesh, set in a galvanized steel frame, screw set.
2.8 DUCT ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113-7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. In sheet metal work, hollow core double construction of same or heavier gauge material as duct
in which installed. Use no door smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller
than 24" by 24" where personnel must pass through infrequently. Use 24" by 60" minimum for
filters and more frequent maintenance. Use Ventlok or approved hinges and latches on all
doors; 100 Series hinges and latches on low pressure system doors up to 18 " maximum
dimension, 200 Series on larger low pressure system doors and 333 Series on high pressure
systems. Construct doors up to 18 " maximum dimension with one inch overlap fit and gasket
with 3/4" by 1/2" sponge rubber, fit larger doors against 1'/2" by 1/4" flat stock or angle frame and
gasket with %" by '/a" sponge rubber or felt. Door swing to be opposite airflow. CESCO, Vent
Products, Air Balance, Ductmate Sandwich or equal. Access doors smaller than 12" x 12" can
be used for visual inspection of dampers, etc. on small ductwork less than 12" wide but must be
of maximum size that will fit on duct with 6" x 6" as minimum size. All access doors smaller
than 12" x 12" must be approved by Engineer for the specific application prior to ordering.
2.9 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. General: Low leakage dampers are to have a maximum leakage rate of 3 cfm/ft2 at 1.0 in w.g.
pressure difference when tested to AMCA Standard 500.
B. Damper Type One: Airfoil Low Leakage Dampers
1. Application: Commercial supply, return, and general exhaust air systems up to 3,000 fpm
velocity.
2. Frames to be 5" x 1 "x 16 gauge steel channel
3. Blades to be 6" wide, 14 gauge galvanized steel design.
4. Axles to be '/2" diameter plated steel.
5. Bearings to be stainless steel sleeve type pressed into frame.
6. Linkage to be concealed in frame
7. Crank lever for operator to be provided.
8. Provide with mill finish on blades and frame.
9. Silicone rubber blade seals.
10. Flexible metal jamb seals.
11. Maximum temperature rating to be 300°F.
12. Manufacturer: Ruskin #CD60, Swartout, NCA PBD/OPD-AF-101, American Warming,
Air Balance, Greenheck or approved equal.
2.10 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Damper Types:
1. Heavy Duty Backdraft Dampers: Provide counterweight type complete with frame, end
bearings, counterbalance assembly, blades, and linkage. Pressure drop to be no more
than 0.24"w.g. at 1000 fpm. Install at outside air intakes, exhaust outlets, and where
shown on Drawings. Pacific Air Products #PRD-100AL, Ruskin #CBD2, NCA, or equal
by Swartout, American Warming or Vent Products.
2. Nonmetallic Backdraft Damper: Provide complete with 16ga frame, neoprene coated
fiberglass blades, galvanized expanded metal grill. Ruskin NMS2.
B. Application Requirements:
1. Generator Discharge Damper: Heavy Duty Backdraft Damper. Size at no more than
1000 fpm velocity.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 8
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Outside Air Intakes except where a control damper is required — Heavy Duty Backdraft
Damper.
2.11 LOUVERS
A. Louvers are generally to be provided under Division 10. Where louvers are not covered on
architectural plans and specifications, contractor is to provide under the following specification:
1. Louvers to be 6" deep, 35° drainable fixed blade design, constructed of galvanized steel
or extruded aluminum, or as specified on the plans.
2. Frames to be constructed of 6" deep channel.
3. Provide with ''/z" x '/2" galvanized mesh birdscreen mounted on backside of louver.
4. Finish/color per architect/engineer's review.
5. Manufacturer: American Warming, Industrial Louver, Vent Products, NCA, Swartout,
Ruskin ELF6375DX Louvers & Dampers or equal.
2.12 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be selected to provide proper air distribution for the
intended occupant application. All supply air devices shall be selected to provide a maximum
air velocity of 50 fpm at three feet above the floor, unless otherwise noted. Manufacturer's
representative shall carefully review Architectural and Mechanical drawings and ensure
diffuser/grille/register selections will provide proper air distribution at NC 25 or less.
Manufacturer at no additional expense to the Owner shall replace diffusers, grilles, and registers
not providing proper distribution or excessive noise at scheduled airflow.
B. All frames shall be selected to fit the ceiling type. Verify with Architectural Drawing. Each
diffuser, grille and register shall be individually capable of balancing via duct mounted
balancing dampers or attached opposed blade dampers. Provide unit opposed blade damper
where individual duct mounted balancing dampers are not provided.
C. Sizes, capacities and patterns shall be as shown on the Drawings. Manufacturer: Metal Aire,
Titus, Krueger, Anemostat, Carnes, Price or Tuttle&Bailey.
2.13 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS (DSD)
A. Duct mounted photoelectric smoke detector. One required for each heating or cooling system
supplying air in excess of 2,000 cfm, for systems serving more than one occupancy type, and
for control of each combination fire/smoke damper when not controlled by Div. 26 area wide
detection system. Coordinate with Div 16. work and electrical installer for power to smoke
detector. Detector shall be mounted in the supply air ductwork downstream of the air handler
and filters, or upstream of combination dampers. Coordinate with control installer to assure that
detector shall shut down the air -moving equipment when smoke is detected and close associated
damper actuator(s). Sensor shall be selected to operate with air velocity rating from 100 to
4000 fpm. Provide with metal sampling tube. Provide remote test and reset station at ceiling or
as otherwise indicated. Duct smoke detector shall be installed in compliance with the applicable
mechanical or building code. Coordinate with Section 230900 and 230593 work. System
Sensor #DH100LP series or approved equal.
B. Additional requirements for duct smoke detectors include requirements per Section 6.4 of
NEPA-90A. Provide one duct smoke detector at each story to the connection to a common
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
return and prior to any recirculation or fresh air inlet connection in air return systems having a
capacity greater than 15,000 cfm and serving more than one story.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCTWORK AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Ductwork is generally diagrammatically indicated and shall be generally installed as indicated.
Do not scale Drawings for exact location of ducts. Install ducts to best suit field conditions and
cooperate with other trades. Do not penetrate Structural members without consent of Architect
or Structural Engineer. Check with Structural drawings prior to locating any penetrations. Duct
sizes are indicated as net inside dimensions on the Drawings. The indicated dimensions shall be
altered at the job site for the purpose of avoiding interferences and clearance difficulties to other
dimensions producing the same air handling characteristics, provided such altered dimensions
are approved by the Architect. Ducts shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition
of codes and standards identified in Part 1 and as shown on the Drawings.
1. Clean and pretreat surfaces before application of sealant. Conform to the manufacturer's
cleaning procedures. Install sealants in conformance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Vertical ducts or horizontal ductwork penetrating fire rated ceilings, roofs, walls and
floors shall be fire separated with UL listed and labeled fire dampers. Provide additional
fire dampers indicated on the Drawings and as otherwise required by the IBC and
building inspector. Provide approved firestopping between damper frames and firewalls.
Install fire dampers in accordance with NFPA Standards, requirements of the State Fire
Marshal, and applicable codes. Ensure that fire dampers are installed in the open
position.
3. Provide 16 gauge metal sleeve with 1" clearance and pack space around ducts through
walls tight with fiberglass, and seal with Schuller Duxseal or approved 3M fire proof
caulking, as required. For exposed ducts through walls, provide flat, sheet metal
escutcheon to conceal fiberglass and wall opening.
4. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Install flush, squared, tightly sealed, and entirely
covering sheet metal ductwork and gaskets. Thread sheet metal mounting screws tightly
into sheet metal. All frames shall be selected to fit the ceiling type. Verify with
Architectural Drawing. Each diffuser, grille and register shall be individually capable of
balancing via duct mounted balancing dampers or attached opposed blade dampers.
Provide unit opposed blade damper only where individual duct mounted balancing
dampers are specifically noted as not provided. Duct connections shall fit securely to
necks or collars behind face area. Provide all necessary transition pieces and duct collars
to make connections from ductwork to neck sizes. Where ducts connect directly to necks
or collars provide a minimum straight duct section of two times the duct diameter to the
last elbow. Where minimum straight duct sections are not physically possible provide
sheet metal plenum sized for approximately 500 fpm air velocity with duct tapped
directly to side of plenum. Where building walls, floors and ceilings form portions of
duct or plenum, provide gasketed angles or channels at junction points, securely bolted
and sealed to building structure.
5. Install turning vanes in all mitered elbows in all ducts, so that tips are parallel with the
sides of the ducts. Vanes shall be single thickness type. Tips of acoustical turning vanes
on outside radius shall be flush with acoustical lining.
6. Provide flexible connections to completely isolate fans from direct contact with all sheet
metal work.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 10
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
7. Provide access panels or doors, as required, for access to valves, controllers, fire dampers
and humidifier dispersion tubes. Access doors required in Product Conveying
Vapor/Moisture Ductwork (see applicable paragraph above) shall not be installed in the
bottom of the duct or in a manner to allow leaks.
8. Volume Dampers: Provide manual volume dampers in all low pressure supply, return and
exhaust branch ductwork to grilles, diffusers, inlet and outlet openings to facilitate
balancing of systems. These are to be provided as part of contract whether shown on
plans or not. Where ceilings are not accessible, provide access door or remote damper
operator.
9. Splitters and splitter dampers shall not be installed in medium or low pressure supply
ductwork to VAV systems.
B. Hangers and Supports: Securely fasten all ductwork to the building construction by means of
hangers, supports, guides, anchors, and sway braces to maintain duct alignment, to prevent
sagging, and to prevent noise and excessive strain on ductwork due to movement under
operating conditions.
1. Maximum spacing between hangers shall not exceed eight (8) feet.
2. Adequately mount and anchor all material and equipment as required. Include lateral
bracing as required to prevent horizontal, seismic movement. Refer to IBC and
architectural Drawings for seismic requirements.
3. Do not support ductwork from fans or any other pieces of equipment.
4. Powder driver fasteners shall not be used to support rectangular ducts of 40" maximum
dimension. Powder driven fasteners shall not be allowed in existing facilities where
electronic equipment is located.
5. Support round duct, 30" and larger, with two hangers at each support point.
6. Hangers and supports shall conform to SMACNA section "Hangers and Supports". Nail
inserts, hangers and supports to formwork before slabs are poured. Cut off or remove
nails, strap -ends and other projections, flush with concrete after forms are removed.
7. Support vertical ducts, passing through floors with two continuous angles screwed to the
duct and bearing to the floor and conforming to SMACNA section "Riser Support -From
Floor". Blocking or shimming ducts will not be permitted.
C. Other:
1. Fans: Align fans, motors, and drives. Install fans to render bearings accessible for
lubrication without dismantling fans or ducts. Provide extended bearing oilers as
required. Mount all fans on vibration isolators as specified.
2.. Insulation: Properly and neatly apply insulation on all material and equipment and
apparatus, as specified, including all fittings. Apply insulation over clean, dry surfaces,
with adjoining sections firmly butted together and canvas smoothly pasted over. When
vapor barriers are specified, install continuous overall external surfaces of the entire
system.
3. Duct Sizing: Where duct sizes are not specifically shown on the plans or must be
modified due to physical limitations, supply ducts may be sized at a maximum velocity of
1,500 fpm or 0.08" sp friction per 100 feet, whichever provides the larger duct, and
return/exhaust/intake ducts may be sized at a maximum velocity of 1,000 fpm or 0.06" sp
friction per 100 feet, whichever provides the larger duct.
4. Humidifiers: Humidifier installation shall be approved by manufacturer and coordinated
with all other systems. Condensate piping shall include p -traps as recommended by the
humidifier manufacturer. Insulate exposed piping as required by the code
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Access Floor Diffusers: The mounting ring for floor mounted diffusers are to be affixed
to the floor tiles using a clamp insert or other method approved for use with the floor
diffuser.
6.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION AND SEALING CRITERIA
A. 15880 — Unless called out otherwise on drawings the pressure classification of ductwork shall
be as follows:
Duct system: Location
Outdoor air From ambient intake
intake to AHU
Downstream of air
Low press terminal units to
Supply Air grilles, registers or
diffusers.
Low press From AHU to grilles,
Supply Air registers or diffusers.
Low press From return grilles to
Return air AHU
From grille to grille,
Transfer air or acoustic boots or
"z" bends
Relief air From AHU to
discharge at ambient
General From grille to exhaust
exhaust fan
General From exhaust fan to
exhaust discharge at ambient
Build to
Working Build to SMACNA
pressure SMACNA seal class:
pressure class
-1" wc -2" wc B
low pressure +1" wc B
low pressure +1" wc B
Low pressure -1" wc B
Low pressure +0.5" wc C
+I"wc +2"wc B
-1" wc -2" wc B
+1" wc +2" wc B
B. 15880 — The default leakage classification of ductwork is as follows:
Duct working press. Low pressure - +/-
+/-1" — +/-3" +/-4" — +/-10" wc
class: 0.5"wc
SMACNA Seal Class C B A
Sealing Applicable Transverse joints Transverse and Joints, seams, and all
only longitudinal Joints wall penetrations
Rectangular sheet
metal SMACNA 24 12 6
Leakage Class
Round sheet metal
SMACNA Leakage 12 6 3
Class
3.3 CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Giumac
233113 - 12
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Note that installation of control dampers is a part of the mechanical contractor's work regardless
of whether they are specified in this section or as part of products to be selected by the Control
Contractor.
B. When electric actuators are provided, dampers shall be installed to allow direct over the shaft
mounting of actuators. No connecting rods and stand off brackets shall be necessary.
C. Dampers shall be installed straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions.
Dampers shall move freely without undue stress due to twisting, racking (parallellogramming),
bowing, or other installation error.
D. Blades shall close completely. Leakage shall not exceed manufacturer's specifications at rated
static.
E. Structural support shall be provided as necessary for all multi -section dampers.
F. Where blankoffs or structural supports obstruct duct or air passages, the decrease in free area
shall not exceed 15% of the damper face area unless otherwise specified here or on plans.
G. No individual damper section may exceed 20 sq. ft.
3.4 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
A. All HVAC equipment and machinery shall be anchored to withstand forces generated by
earthquake motions. As a minimum, equipment and equipment frames shall be designed to
withstand a force of 100% of the weight of the equipment and frame acting at its center of
gravity. Anchorage of the equipment and/or frame to the structure shall be for a force of four
times gravity also acting at the center of gravity.
B. Piping and ductwork connecting to equipment shall be seismically braced per SMACNA
"Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems".
C. The seismic calculations shall be the responsibility of contractor.
3.5 EQUIPMENT
A. Install equipment as shown on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
recommendations.
3.6 SUPPLY DIFFUSER AND REGISTER LOCATIONS
A. Coordinate location of supply outlets with ceiling mounted smoke detectors. Locate outlets or
outlet distribution so as to prevent airflow from inhibiting the operation of smoke detectors.
Locate ceiling outlets a minimum of 3'-0" from smoke detectors.
3.7 PAINTING
A. Where the interior surfaces of ductwork are visible through the blades of supply outlets, return
inlets, and exhaust inlets - paint the interior visible surfaces with one coat of flat black paint.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 13
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Do not insulate or conceal ductwork before inspection by Owner's Representative, Architect or
Engineer. If ductwork is insulated and concealed prior this inspection the Contractor shall
remove insulation and ceiling to permit inspection at no additional cost to the Owner. The
Contractor shall replace the insulation and ceiling after final inspection at no additional cost to
the Owner.
13. Ductwork Deflection Criteria:
1. Maximum inward and/or outward deflection at sheetmetal panels shall be 3/4" under
maximum static pressure operating conditions. Additional intermediate stiffening angles
shall be installed where deflections exceed 3/4".
2. Maximum inward and/or outward deflection at sheetmetal elbows and joints shall be '/4"
under maximum static pressure operating conditions. Additional stiffening angles shall
be installed where deflections exceed 1/4".
C. Acceptance of duct systems shall be contingent upon conformance with the requirements
specified in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing".
3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean the inside of plenums, casings, enclosures, fans, and accessible ductwork before starting
fans. Blowout coils and condensate piping with compressed air. Install a clean set of filters in
each system prior to testing and balancing. Proceed with testing and balancing. All dampers
shall be locked in place.
END OF SECTION 233113
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233113 - 14
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 233413 - FANS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
2.30500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 1, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Spun Aluminum and Steel Housed Centrifugal Exhaust Fans
a. General Duty Spun Aluminum Exhaust fan
2. Small Cabinet Fans (Ceiling Mounted and Inline)
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 230500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 230593: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
C. Section 230700: Mechanical Insulation
D. Section 230900: Controls and Instrumentation
E. Section 233113: Air Distribution
F. Division 26: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide air handling units that are the standard product of an
equipment manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such units who issues complete
catalog information on such products. Units shall not be fabricated by the Contractor.
B. Certifications: Provide certified ratings of units based on tests performed in accordance with
ARI 430, "Central -Station Air Handling Units."
C. Codes and Standards: Provide air handling units conforming to the requirements of the latest
addition of the following:
1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):
a. 99 standards Handbook
b. 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating [Unit shall bear AMCA Certified
Rating Seal]
c. 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans [Unit shall bear AMCA
Certified Rating Seal]
FANS AND VENTS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233413 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
d. 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
e. 500 Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
b. 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
c. 900 Test Performance of Air Filter Units
3. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
a. 350 Sound Rating of Non -Ducted Indoor Air -Conditioning Equipment
b. 410 Forced -Circulation Air -Cooling and Air -Heating Coils
c. 430 Central -Station Air -Handling Units
d. 440 Room Fan -Coil Air -Conditioners
4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
a. 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Except for motors, provide
electrical components required as part of air handling units, which comply with NEMA
Standards.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Provide air handling unit internal
insulation having flame spread rating not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not
higher than 50:
a. 70 National electrical Code
b. 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
c. 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA):
Comply with applicable SMACNA standards including "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Except for motors, provide electrical components
required as part of air handling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air handling units showing
dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly indicated,
motor electrical characteristics, and finishes of materials, installation instructions, sound and
vibration test report, and bearing life calculations.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight loadings, required
clearances, field connection details and methods of support. Draw to a scale of 1/4" per one
foot. Include field fabricated mixing boxes, dampers and duct connections.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product
data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in operating and maintenance manuals.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters
are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver unit to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
FANS AND VENTS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233413 - 2
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Store and protect equipment and products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
Do not install damaged unit - remove from project site.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year (12 months) warranty. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs,
and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service.
1.9 SAFETY PROVISIONS
A. Provide all open drives and fan wheels subject to maintenance and potential entanglement with
protective guards or screens meeting OSHA requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. Construction, Rating and Testing: Provide fans constructed and factory tested in accordance
with the Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA). All fan wheels shall be statically
and dynamically balanced. Size and capacity as indicated on the Drawings. Provide extended
bearing lubrication fittings where necessary to assure accessibility of all lubrication points.
B. Motors and Drives: Provide premium efficiency drip -proof motors with temperature rise not
greater than 40 degrees C above ambient temperature. Provide belt drive assembly capable of
150% of the motor rated horsepower on one less than the total number of belts, for belt drives
with two or more belts. All drives shall have adjustable sheaves to allow adjustment of±20%.
Provide two speed, two winding motors where indicated on schedules.
C. Accessories: Provide, as indicated on the Drawings and specified in other paragraphs of this
Section, all related accessories to match the fan section, including access sections, diffusion
sections, transition sections, flexible connections, vibration eliminators, and belt guards.
D. Submissions: For shop drawings include complete dimensional and physical data, CFM, SP,
FTP, discharge arrangement, rotation, class, base details, and fan curves.
2.2 SPUN ALUMINUM AND STEEL HOUSED CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS
A. Manufacturer: Models as scheduled manufactured by Greenheck, Carnes, Cook, Penn or
approved equal.
B. General Duty Spun Aluminum Exhaust Fan
1.. Direct Drive: Spun aluminum exhaust fans shall be direct drive type.
a. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and
shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running
tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing
shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure
and a birdscreen.
b. Motors shall be mounted out of the airstream on vibration isolators. Fresh air for
motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment through a large space
between the fan shroud and the motor cover. Motors shall be readily accessible for
FANS AND VENTS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233413 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
c. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for
ease of electrical wiring.
d. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance.
Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's engraved metal nameplate
containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification.
2. Belt -drive: Spun aluminum exhaust fans shall be belt driven type.
a. Fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall
include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running
tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing
shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure
and a birdscreen.
b. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load, and
furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drive frame assembly shall
be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration
isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the
motor compartment through a large space between the fan shroud and the motor
cover. Motors and drives shall be readily accessible for maintenance.
c. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed,
lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum L10
life in excess of 100,000 hours (L50 life of 500,000 hours) at maximum cataloged
operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.
Pulleys shall be of the cast type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor
shafts. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.
d. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a
junction box installed within the motor compartment. A conduit chase shall be
provided through the base to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring.
e. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance.
f. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's engraved metal nameplate
containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification.
2.3 SMALL CABINET FANS (CEILING MOUNTED AND INLINE CABINET)
A. Duct mounted cabinet fan
1. Manufacturer: Greenheck CSP -A, Panasonic, Cook, Penn, Cames of equivalent
performance.
2. General: Provide centrifugal direct drive type inline fan. The fan wheel(s) shall be of the
forward curved centrifugal type and dynamically balanced.
3. Noise Data: Provide sone or octave band noise values at the required air delivery.
4. Fan Housing: The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. The
housing interior shall be lined with 1/2 inch acoustical insulation. The outlet duct collar
shall include an aluminum backdraft damper on all sizes and shall be spring loaded on
larger units above 200 cfm.
a. Integral backdraft damper shall be totally chatterproof with no metal -to -metal
contact.
b. Entire fan, motor and wheel assembly shall be easily removable without disturbing
the housing.
c. Outlet shall be adaptable for horizontal or vertical discharge.
5. Motor speeds shall not exceed 1100 RPM and all fan motors shall be suitably grounded
and mounted on rubber -in -shear vibration isolators.
FANS AND VENTS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233413 - 4
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
6. Grille: For 300 cfin and smaller fans the grille shall be constructed of high impact
polystyrene and for larger sizes the grille shall be constructed of aluminum. Grilles shall
be non -yellowing.
7. The access for wiring shall be external. The motor disconnect shall be internal and of the
plug in type. The motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
E. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance and
shall be UL/cUL Listed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate motor starters with Div. 26 and control contractor.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Examine site to verify if site is ready to receive work. Provide layout drawings of air handlers
and fan locations to electrical installer.
D. Lnstall unit on vibration isolators.
E. Install 3" flexible duct connection at inlets and outlets of units.
F. Control installers shall install all wiring associated with control signals into the fan starters.
G. Electrical installer shall install all line voltage power wiring and conduit. Coordinate with
Division 26 work.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S START-UP SERVICES
A. The manufacturer shall provide start-up service in the form of a factory trained service
technician. The service technician shall verify correct installation, verify unit mounting, verify
fan rotation, verify spring isolator adjustments, verify control wiring, verify power wiring, start-
up the fans, and check for proper operation. The service technician shall provide final
adjustments to meet the specified performance requirements. Fully staffed parts and service
personnel shall be within four hours travel from the job site.
END OF SECTION 233413
FANS ANI) VENTS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
233413 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD OwnerReview New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
230500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Packaged unit.
2. Controls and control connections.
3. Electrical power connections.
4. Roof mounting frame and base.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 230500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 230593: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
C. Section 230700: Mechanical Insulation
D. Section 230900: Controls and Instrumentation
E. Section 233113: Air Distribution
F. Division 26: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide packaged units that are the standard product of an
equipment manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such units who issues complete
catalog information on such products. Units shall not be fabricated by the Contractor.
B. Codes and Standards: Provide air handling units conforming to the requirements of the latest
addition of the following:
1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):
a. 99 Standards Handbook
b. 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating [Unit shall bear AMCA
Certified Rating Seal]
c. 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans [Unit shall bear AMCA
Certified Rating Seal]
d. 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
e. 500 Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
b. 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
c. 900 Test Performance of Air Filter Units
3. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
a. 210 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
b. 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment
4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
a. 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Except for motors, provide
electrical components required as part of air handling units, which comply with NEMA
Standards.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Provide unit internal insulation having
flame spread rating not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50:
a. 70 National electrical Code
b. 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
c. 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems
7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA):
Comply with applicable SMACNA standards including "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Except for motors, provide electrical components
required as part of units, which have been listed and labeled by UL.
1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products
other than those scheduled or shown on the drawings as a basis of design:
1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design,
detailing, structural supports, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution.
3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed
substitute.
B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are
equivalent or superior to specified item.
C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in
the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for packaged units showing
dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly indicated,
motor electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, installation instructions, sound and
vibration test report, and bearing life calculations.
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. :Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product
data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in operating and maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division 1.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters
are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Protect units against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged
units - remove from project site.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide general one year (12 months) warranty with five (5) year warranty on compressors.
The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs, and living expenses incurred by the
rnanufacturer to provide factory authorized service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
• 2.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING/COOLING UNIT (GAS/ELECTRIC 3 TO 6 TONS)
•
A. General:
1. Outdoor rooftop mounted, electrically controlled heating and cooling unit utilizing a
reciprocating compressor for cooling duty and gas combustion for heating duty. Unit
shall discharge supply air downward or horizontally as shown on contract drawings.
2. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standards 210240 and 270. Designed in
accordance with UL Standard 465.
3. Unit shall be designed to conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
4. Unit shall be UL tested and certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 Standards and
CSA or CGA certified as a total package.
5. Roof curb shall be designed to conform to NRCA Standards.
6. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
B. Equipment (Standard):
1. General:
a. Factory assembled, single piece heating and cooling unit. Contained within the unit
enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-22) and
special features required prior to field start-up.
2. Unit Cabinet:
a. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a
prepainted baked enamel finish on all externally exposed surfaces.
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
b. Indoor blower compartment interior cabinet surfaces shall be insulated with a
minimum 1/2" thick, flexible glass fiber insulation, coated on the air side. Aluminum
foil faced glass fiber insulation shall be used in the furnace compartment.
c. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing.
d. Filters will be accessible through a hinged access door, and will require no panel or
screw removal.
e. Holes shall be provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to facilitate
maneuvering and overhead rigging.
f. Unit shall have a factory installed internal condensate drain trap made of a non-
corrosive material, providing a minimum 3/4" connection.
3. Fans:
a. Indoor blower (evaporator fan):
1) Fan shall be direct or belt driven as shown on the equipment drawings. Belt
drive shall include an adjustable pitch motor pulley.
2) Fan wheel shall be double inlet type with forward curved blades.
3) Bearings shall be sealed, permanently lubricated ball bearing type for longer life
and lower maintenance.
b. Indoor blower shall be made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish and shall be
dynamically balanced.
c. Outdoor (condenser) fan shall be of the direct driven propeller type and shall
discharge air vertically upward.
d. Outdoor fan shall have aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel spiders
and dynamically balanced.
e. Induced draft blower shall be of the direct driven, single inlet, forward curved
centrifugal type, made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish and dynamically
balanced.
4. Compressor:
a. Fully hermetic type, intemally protected.
b. Factory rubber shock mounted and internally spring mounted for vibration isolation.
c. Equipped with a factory installed crankcase heater to minimize liquid refrigerant
accumulation in compressor during shutdown and prevent refrigerant dilution of oil.
5. Coils:
a. Evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded
to seamless copper tubes with all joints brazed.
b. Tube sheet openings shall be belled to prevent tube wear.
c. Evaporator coil shall be of the full -face active design, degreased at the factory.
6. Heating Section:
a. Induced draft combustion type with energy saving direct spark ignition system and
redundant main gas valve.
b. The heat exchanger shall be of the tubular section type constructed of a minimum of
20 -gauge steel coated with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum silicone alloy for corrosion
resistance.
c. Burners shall be of the in -shot type constructed of aluminum coated steel.
d. All gas piping shall enter the unit cabinet at a single location.
7. Refrigerant Components: Refrigerant circuit components shall include:
a. Acutrol feed system.
b. Filter drier.
c. Service gauge connections on suction, discharge and liquid lines.
8. Filter Section:
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 4
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a. Standard filter section shall consist of factory installed low velocity, disposable 2"
thick glass fiber filters of commercially available sizes.
b. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 320 fpm at nominal airflows.
c. Filter section should use only one size filter.
9. Controls and Safeties:
a. Unit Controls: Unit shall be complete with self-contained low voltage control circuit
protected by a manually resettable circuit breaker.
b. Safeties:
1) Unit shall incorporate a solid state compressor protector which provides reset
capability at the space thermostat, should any of the following standard safety
devices trip and shut off compressor:
a) Compressor over temperature, overcurrent.
b) Loss of charge/low pressure switch.
c) Freezestat, evaporator coil.
d) High-pressure switch.
2) Heating section shall be provided with the following minimum protections:
a) High temperature limit switch.
b) Induced draft motor centrifugal switch.
c) Flame rollout switch (manual reset).
d) Flame proving controls.
10. Operating Characteristics:
a. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 115° F ambient outdoor temperature
per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210/240.
b. Compressor with standard controls shall be capable of operation down to 25° F
ambient outdoor temperature.
c. Unit provided with fan time delay of 55 seconds to prevent cold air delivery before
heat exchanger warms up.
11. Electrical Requirements: All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single factory
predrilled location.
12. Motors:
a. Compressor motors shall be cooled by suction gas passing through motor windings
and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection.
b. Indoor blower motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings and inherent
automatic reset thermal overload protection.
c. Outdoor totally enclosed motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings, and
inherent automatic reset thermal overload protection.
d. Induced draft motor shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and inherent
automatic reset thermal overload protection.
C. Special Features and Options:
1. Provide the following options with units. (Certain features are not applicable when the
features designated * are specified. For assistance in amending the specifications, your
local Carrier Sales Office should be contacted.)
a. Roof Curb:
1) Formed galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and capable of supporting entire
unit weight.
b. Integrated Economizer:
1) Integrated type capable of simultaneous economizer and compressor operation.
2) Includes all hardware and controls to provide cooling with outside air.
3) Equipped with a single sliding plate low leakage type damper.
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
4) Capable of introducing up to 100% outside air.
5) Equipped with a gravity relief damper.
c. Manual Damper:
1) Manual damper package shall consist of damper, bird screen and rain hood which
can be preset to admit up to 50% outdoor air for year round ventilation.
d. Two Position Damper:
I) Two -position damper package shall include single blade damper and motor.
Admits up to 50% outdoor air.
2) Damper shall close upon indoor fan shutoff.
e. Optional Compressor Cycle Delay:
1) Compressor shall be prevented from restarting for a minimum of 5 minutes after
shutdown.
f. Solid State Enthalpy Control:
I) For use with economizer package only.
2) Capable of sensing outdoor air heat content (temperature and humidity) and
control economizer cut -in point to have minimum heat content air passing over
the evaporator coil for most efficient system operation.
g. Differential Enthalpy Sensor:
1) For use with economizer only.
2) Capable of comparing heat content (temperature and humidity) of outdoor air and
return air and controlling economizer cut -in point at the most economical level.
h. Head Pressure Control Package:
I) Consists of solid-state control and condenser coil temperature sensor to maintain
condensing temperature between 90° F and 110° F at outdoor ambient
temperatures down to -20° F by either condenser fan speed modulation or
condenser fan cycling.
i. Remote Control Panel: Panel shall be a decorative, indoor, wall mounted panel
consisting of:
1) Two stage heat/two stage cool thermostat.
2) Automatic changeover.
3) System switch with HEAT - COOL - AUTO - OFF settings.
4) Fan switch with ON - AUTO settings.
5) Indicator lights for HEAT - COOL - FAN operation.
6) Three unused indicator lights for field use.
j. LP Gas Kit:
1) Package shall contain all the necessary hardware and instructions to convert a
standard natural gas unit for use with liquefied propane gas.
k. Electronic Programmable Thermostat:
1) Capable of using deluxe full featured electronic thermostat.
1. Thermostat and Subbase:
1) Provides staged cooling and heating automatic (or manual) changeover, fan
control and indicator light.
D. Manufacturer: Carrier Model (48DJD)(48DJE) or approved equal by Trane, McQuay or
Lennox.
2.2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING/COOLING UNIT (GAS/ELECTRIC 7-1/2 TO 12-1/2
TONS)
A. General:
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413-6
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Outdoor rooftop mounted, electrically controlled heating and cooling unit utilizing a
reciprocating compressor for cooling duty and gas combustion for heating duty. Unit
shall discharge supply air downward or horizontally as shown on contract drawings.
2. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standards 210/240 or 360 and 270. Designed
in accordance with UL Standard 465.
3. Unit shall be designed to conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1978.
4. Unit shall be UL tested and certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 Standards and
CSA certified as a total package.
5. Roof curb shall be designed to conform to NRCA Standards.
6. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
B. Equipment (Standard):
1. General:
a. Factory assembled, single piece heating and cooling unit. contained within the unit
enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-22) and
special features required prior to field start-up.
2. Unit Cabinet:
a. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a
prepainted baked enamel finish on all externally exposed surfaces.
b. Indoor blower compartment interior cabinet surfaces shall be insulated with a
minimum 1/2" thick, flexible glass fiber insulation, coated on the air side. Aluminum
foil faced glass fiber insulation shall be used in the furnace compartment.
c. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing.
d. Filters will be accessible through a hinged access door, and will require no panel or
screw removal.
e. Holes shall be provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to facilitate
maneuvering and overhead rigging.
f. Unit shall have a factory installed internally trapped condensate drain made of a non-
corrosive material, providing a minimum 3/4" connection.
3. Fans:
a. Indoor blower (evaporator fan):
1) Fan shall be belt driven as shown on the equipment drawings. Belt drive shall
include an adjustable pitch motor pulley.
2) Fan wheel shall be double inlet type with forward curved blades.
3) Bearings shall be sealed, permanently lubricated ball bearing type for longer life
and lower maintenance.
b. Indoor blower shall be made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish and shall be
dynamically balanced.
c. Outdoor (condenser) fan shall be of the direct driven propeller type and shall
discharge air vertically upward.
d. Outdoor fan shall have aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel spiders
and shall be dynamically balanced.
e. Induced draft blower shall be of the direct driven single inlet forward curved
centrifugal type, made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish and dynamically
balanced.
4. Compressor:
a. Fully hermetic type, on independent circuits and internally protected.
b. Factory rubber shock mounted and internally spring mounted for vibration isolation.
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
c. Equipped with a factory installed crankcase heater to minimize liquid refrigerant
accumulation in compressor during shutdown and prevent refrigerant dilution of oil.
5. Coils:
a. Evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded
to seamless copper tubes with all joints brazed and degreased at the factory.
b. Tube sheet openings shall be belled to prevent tube wear.
6. Heating Section:
a. Induced draft combustion type with energy saving direct spark ignition system and
redundant main gas valve.
b. The heat exchanger shall be of the tubular section type constructed of a minimum of
20 -gauge steel coated with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum silicone alloy for corrosion
resistance.
c. Burners shall be of the in -shot type constructed of aluminum coated steel.
d. All gas piping shall enter the unit cabinet at a single location.
7. Refrigerant Components:
a. Refrigerant circuit components shall include:
1) Acutrol feed system.
2) Filter drier.
3) Service gauge connections on suction, discharge and liquid lines.
8. Filter Section:
a. Standard filter section shall consist of factory installed low velocity, disposable 2"
thick glass fiber filters of commercially available sizes.
b. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 320 fpm at nominal airflows.
9. Controls and Safeties:
a. Unit Controls:
1) Unit shall be complete with self-contained low voltage control circuit protected
by a manually resettable circuit breaker.
b. Safeties:
1) Unit shall incorporate a solid state compressor protector which provides reset
capability at the space thermostat, should any of the following safety devices trip
and shut off compressor:
a) Compressor overtemperature, overcurrent.
b) Loss of charge/low pressure switch.
c) Freezestat, evaporator coil.
d) High-pressure switch.
2) Heating section shall be provided with the following minimum protections:
a) High temperature limit switch.
b) Induced draft motor centrifugal switch.
c) Flame rollout switch (manual reset).
d) Flame proving controls.
10. Operating Characteristics:
a. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 115° F ambient outdoor temperature
per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210/240 or 360.
b. Compressor with standard controls shall be capable of operation down to 25° F
ambient outdoor temperature.
o Unit provided with fan time delay of 55 seconds to prevent cold air delivery before
heat exchanger warms up.
11.. Electrical Requirements:
a. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single factory predrilled location.
12. Motors:
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Giumac
237413 - 8
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a. Compressor motors shall be cooled by suction gas passing through motor windings
and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection.
b. Indoor blower motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings and inherent
automatic reset thermal overload protection.
c. Outdoor totally enclosed motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings, and
inherent automatic reset thermal overload protection.
d. Induced draft motor shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and inherent
automatic reset thermal overload protection.
C. Special Features and Options:
1. Provide the following options with units. (Certain features are not applicable when the
features designated * are specified. For assistance in amending the specifications, your
local Carrier Sales Office should be contacted.)
a. Roof Curb:
1) Formed galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and capable of supporting entire
unit weight.
b. Integrated Economizer:
1) Integrated type capable of simultaneous economizer and compressor operation.
2) Includes all hardware and controls to provide cooling with outside air.
3) Equipped with low leakage dampers not to exceed 3% leakage, at 1.0" wg
pressure differential.
4) Capable of introducing up to 100% outside air.
5) Equipped with a gravity relief damper.
c. Manual Damper: Manual damper package shall consist of damper, bird screen and
rain hood which can be preset to admit up to 50% outdoor air for year round
ventilation.
d. Two Position Damper:
1) Two -position damper package shall include single blade damper and motor.
Admits up to 100% outdoor air.
2) Damper shall close upon indoor fan shutoff.
e. Optional Compressor Cycle Delay: Compressor shall be prevented from restarting
for a minimum of 5 minutes after shutdown.
f. Solid State Enthalpy Control:
1) For use with economizer package only.
2) Capable of sensing outdoor air heat content (temperature and humidity) and
control economizer cut -in point to have minimum heat content air passing over
the evaporator coil for most efficient system operation.
g. Differential Enthalpy Sensor:
1) For use with economizer only.
2) Capable of comparing heat content (temperature and humidity) of outdoor air and
return air and controlling economizer cut -in point at the most economical level.
h. Head Pressure Control Package:
1) Consists of solid-state control and condenser temperature sensor for head
pressure control.
2) Capable of controlling outdoor fan motor cycling to maintain condensing
temperature between 90° F and 110° F at outdoor ambient temperatures down to
-20° F.
i. Remote Control Panel: Penal shall be a decorative, indoor, wall mounted panel
consisting of;
1) Two stage heat/two stage cool thermostat.
PACKAGE:D HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Giumac
237413 - 9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2) Automatic changeover.
3) System switch with HEAT - COOL - AUTO - OFF settings.
4) Fan switch with ON - AUTO settings.
5) Indicator lights for HEAT - COOL - FAN operation.
6) Three unused indicator lights for field use.
j. LP Gas Kit: Package shall contain all the necessary hardware and instructions to
convert a standard natural gas unit for use with liquefied propane gas.
k. Electronic Programmable Thermostat: Capable of using deluxe full featured
electronic thermostat.
1. Thermostat and Subbase: Provides staged cooling and heating automatic (or manual)
changeover, fan control and indicator light.
D. Manufacturer: Carrier Model (48DJD)(48DJE) or approved equal by Trane, McQuay or
Lennox.
2.3 SPRING ISOLATING ROOF CURB
A. Curb mounted rooftop packaged air conditioning air handlers shall be flexibly ducted, provided
with double arch EPDM Expansion Joints, and electrical lines with flexible conduits. The units
shall be supported by a spring isolation curb, the lower member of which is a rigid steel tube or
a specially formed steel section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support
the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment
and must remain captive when resiliently resisting wind and seismic forces. All directional
neoprene snubber bushings must be a minimum of 1/2" thick. Steel springs shall rest on 1/4"
neoprene acoustical pads. Minimum spring deflection shall be 1 1/2". Hardware must be
cadmium or zinc electroplated and the springs similarly plated or provided with an approved
rust resistant finish.
B. The curb's waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counterflashing
nailed over the lower curb's waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All
spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers.
C. The floating member of the roof curb shall have perimeter angle and cross members to support
two layers of 5/8" waterproof sheetrock laid on with stagered joints. Sheetrock must surround
ducts to provide a continuous sound break. This acoustical barrier shall be caulked to minimize
sound transmission. Where the mechanical arrangement makes attachment to the floating
member unfeasible, the barrier shall be attached at the highest practical elevation of the fixed
curb with provision for 1" thick closed cell neoprene flexible seals around the ductwork. A four
inch layer of 1.5 density fiberglass shall cover the entire solid roof surface under the unit.
Ductwork shall be lined with sound absorbent material.
D. Curbs shall be Mason Industries Type RSC -dB or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mounting surface, e.g. roof, is ready to receive work.
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 10
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. 'Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide layout drawings of units, locations and power requirements to electrical installer.
C. Install minimum 30% efficiency air filters in unit during installation phase. Do not operate the
unit without filters in place.
D. Mount rooftop unit on factory built roof mounting frame. Install roof mounting frame level.
E. Install 3" flexible duct connection at inlets and outlets of units.
F. Install condensate drain piping and traps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as
shown on the Drawings.
G. Control installers shall install thermostat and all wiring associated with control signals into the
units.
H. Electrical installer shall install all line voltage power wiring and conduit. Coordinate with
Division 16 work.
I. Install a new set of filters prior to final air balance and substantial completion.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S START-UP SERVICES
A. The manufacturer shall provide start-up service in the form of a factory trained service
technician. The service technician shall verify correct installation, verify unit mounting, verify
fin rotation, verify spring isolator adjustments, verify control wiring, verify power wiring, start-
up the fans, and check for proper operation. The service technician shall provide final
adjustments to meet the specified performance requirements. Fully staffed parts and service
personnel shall be within four hours travel from the job site.
END OF SECTION 237413
PACKAGE:D HVAC UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
237413 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 238125 - MINI -SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements
of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section
230500 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 23 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Split air conditioning unit.
2. Controls and control connections.
3. Electrical power connections.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 230500: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 230593: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
C. Section 230700: Mechanical Insulation
D. Section 230900: Controls and Instrumentation
E. Section 232123: Pumps and Hydronic Specialties
F. Section 232300: Refrigerant Piping Systems
G. Section 233113: Air Distribution
H. Division 26: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide packaged units that are the standard product of an
equipment manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such units who issues complete
catalog information on such products. Units shall not be fabricated by the Contractor.
B. Codes and Standards: Provide air handling units conforming to the requirements of the latest
addition of the following:
1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):
a. 99 Standards Handbook
b. 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating [Unit shall bear AMCA
Certified Rating Seal]
2. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
MINI-SPLTT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
Copyright 2003 Glumac
238125-1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a. 210 Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment
b. 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Except for motors, provide
electrical components required as part of air handling units, which comply with NEMA
Standards.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Provide unit internal insulation having
flame spread rating not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50:
a. 70 National Electrical Code
b. 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
c. 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems
5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA):
Comply with applicable SMACNA standards including "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Except for motors, provide electrical components
required as part of units, which have been listed and labeled by UL.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for systems with air handler units,
evaporator coils, and outdoor condensing units showing dimensions, weights, capacities,
ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics,
finishes of materials, installation instructions, sound and vibration test report, and bearing life
calculations.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product
data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in operating and maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division 01.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters
are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 01. Deliver units to the site in containers
with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store/protect products under provisions of Division 01. Protect units against dirt, water,
chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged units - remove from project site.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide, general one year (12 months) warranty from date of installation and five (5) year
warranty on compressors under provisions of Division 01. The warranty shall include parts,
labor, travel costs, and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory
authorized service.
MINI -SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
238125- 2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT WITH INDOOR FAN COIL
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mitsubishi, Sanyo, or approved equal.
B. ]Indoor Fan Coil Unit
I. General:
a. Factory fabricated fan coil units of the size, type configuration and capacity as
scheduled on the drawings. Units shall be self-contained, factory assembled and pre-
wired with condensate pump.
b. All pressure drops, horsepowers and dimensions shown are maximum allowable. All
capacities shown are minimum allowable. All units must have AMCA certified
performance data for fans tested in the unit casings. Bare fan certification without
casing is not acceptable.
c. Manufacturers unable to meet this criteria will only be considered as an alternate to
specified and as a deduct to base bid. Manufacturers listed by name do not imply that
their standard construction meets the specifications nor that they are approved. All
manufacturers are required to meet all details of this specification without exception.
2. Unit cabinet shall be galvanized steel with powder coated baked enamel finish.
3. Fan Assembly
a. Direct -drive, double -inlet fan wheels shall have forward -curved blades, and be
statically and dynamically balanced, with scrolls and fans constructed of galvanized
steel.
b. Rotating assembly shall provide a rigid support for motor and fan assembly.
Assembly shall be accessible and entire assembly shall be removable for
maintenance.
c. Motor shall be minimum two speed permanent split capacitor type.
4. Coils shall be ARI certified. All coil shall constructed of non-ferrous seamless copper
and pressure tested in the factory.
5. Filter shall be one inch thick pleated.
6. Unit Suspension: Units shall be provided with factory welded mounting clips for
mounting of units.
7. Electrical: The unit electrical power shall be 115 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz.
8. Controls
a. Unit shall have a wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the
system.
b. The controller shall consist of an On -Off switch, Cool/Dry-Fan selector, Thermostat
setting, Timer Mode, High -Low fan speed, Auto Vane selector, Test Run switching
and Check Mode switching.
c. Temperature changes shall be by 2°F increments with a range of 65 - 87°F.
d. The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessors interconnected b) a
single non -polar two wire cable.
e. Wiring shall run direct from the indoor unit to the controller with no splices.
f. Manufacturer shall provide 2 conductor 18 Ga. stranded wire for connection to
remote controller.
g. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of sensing
return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing
commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling
the outdoor unit.
MINI -SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
Copyright 2003 Glumac
238125- 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
h. Normal operation of the remote controller provides individual system control in
which one remote controller and one indoor unit are installed in the same room.
i. The control voltage from the controller to the indoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC.
j. The control voltage between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be 12 volts,
DC.
k. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power
interruption.
1. The system shall include self -diagnostics including total hours of compressor run
time.
m. The microprocessor within the wall mounted remote controller shall provide
automatic cooling, display set point and room temperature, 24 hour on/off timer so
that automatic operation function display, check mode for memory of most recent
problem.
C. Outdoor Condensing Unit:
1. General: Provide remote outdoor compressor units consisting of hermetic compressor
with overload protection, direct drive condenser fan, aluminum fin/seamless copper tube
coil, strainer, high and low pressure switches, accumulator, and thermostatic expansion
valve.
2. Low Ambient Control: System shall be capable of operating at 0°F ambient temperature.
3. Unit Cabinet: Galvanized steel with powder coat enamel finish.
4. Condenser Fans: Direct drive propeller type. Motors to be totally enclosed, single phase,
with Class B insulation and permanently lubricated bearings. Fan shall be mounted for
low noise. Fan blades to be statically and dynamically balanced.
5. Coil: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes.
6. Refrigerant Components: Liquid tube shutoff valve with sweat connection, suction tube
shutoff valves with sweat connection, R-22 refrigerant, and accumulator.
7. Compressor: Hermetically sealed two -speed compressor mounted on rubber mountings.
Protection to include internal thermal overloads. An internal pressure relief valve to
provide high-pressure protection to the refrigerant system. Provide external service
valves for the refrigerant circuit. A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on the
outside of the compressor.
8. Electrical: Unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The outdoor
unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. The control
voltage between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide layout drawings of units, locations and power requirements to electrical installer.
MINI -SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
238125-4
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Install air filters in unit during installation phase. Do not operate the unit without filters in
place.
D. In the case of suspended units, mount the fan coil units on springs or from spring hangers as
required and as shown on Drawings. Provide Mason #DNHS combination isolator hangers to
fully support horizontal units hung from building framing.
E. Provide 4" high concrete pad extending 6" beyond edge of condensing unit on all sides. Attach
condensing unit to concrete pad with concrete anchors and angle brackets.
F. Install condensate drain piping and traps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as
shown on the Drawings.
G. Install copper refrigerant piping and insulate lines.
H. Install controller and all wiring associated with control signals between air handling unit and
condensing unit. Conceal low voltage wiring in building structure, or inside the refrigerant pipe
insulation, or in conduit.
I. Electrical installer shall install all line voltage power wiring and conduit. Coordinate with
Division 26 work.
J. Install a new set of filters prior to final air balance and substantial completion.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S START-UP SERVICES
A. The manufacturer shall provide start-up service in the form of a factory trained service
technician. The service technician shall verify correct installation, verify unit mounting, verify
fan rotation, verify spring isolator adjustments, verify control wiring, verify power wiring, start-
up the fans, and check for proper operation. The service technician shall provide final
adjustments to meet the specified performance requirements. Fully staffed parts and service
personnel shall be within four hours travel from the job site.
END OF SECTION 238125
MINI -SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
Copyright 2008'3lumac
238125-5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions,
Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and
shall include all Mechanical Sections specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE OF THIS SECTION
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements
of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Compliance with all codes and standards applicable to this jurisdiction.
2.. Shop Drawings for Equipment
3. Coordination Documents
4. Record Drawings
5. Start-up Service and Building Commissioning
6. Instruction, Maintenance, and 0 & M Manuals
7. Work associated with Delivery, Storage, and Handling of products
8. Work associated with provision of Temporary Facilities
9. Preparation of Posted Operating Instructions
10. Meeting Project Safety and Indemnity requirements
11. Proper Cleaning and Closing
12. Supplying proper Warranty information
13. Supply specified Guarantee documentation
14. Design and provision of Supports and Anchors
15. Pipe Portals
16. Equipment Rails
17. Access Panels and Doors
18. Identification Markers
19. Coordination of Electrical requirements for equipment provided
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Building Utility Electrical Service and Service Entrance rated Main Panelboard: The building
electrical service is fed from a utility transformer located on site, then underground at 120/208
three phase system. The building power is fed from a 600 amp Service Entrance rated panel
"A". Panel 'A' is located in the NER room. This panel serves as distribution power panel to the
building.
B. 600A for Panel 'A', 600A Main Breaker Service Entrance rated.
C. 100A for Panel `B', 100A Main Lug Only Panel.
D. 225A for Panel "C", 225A Main Lug Only Panel.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. 225A for Panel "D", 225A Main Lug Only Panel.
F. TVSS
G. General lighting is typically fluorescent, reasonably efficient and normal luminance levels are
generally acceptable. No change is anticipated with the exiting lighting, except in the areas of
renovation.
H. BUILDING EGRESS LIGHTING
1. Code required emergency battery ballasts in certain fluorescent luminaries accomplish
egress lighting. Battery ballasts should be checked and replaced if they are over three
years old. Test system prior to substantial completion. Correct any deficiency in
operation prior to Certificate of Occupancy.
BUILDING LIGHTING CONTOL
1. Install lighting control system compliant with the Washington Non-residential Energy
Code controls and power allowance provisions will be required Several spaces will
utilize occupancy sensors for automatic control. Test lighting control system prior to
substantial completion. Correct any deficiencies in operation prior to Certificate of
Occupancy.
J. FIRE ALARM
1. Test system prior to substantial completion. Correct any deficiency in operation prior to
Certificate of Occupancy.
K. SECURITY
1. The building has no electronic security system.
L. TELEPHONE/CATV
1. The building telephone backboard and CATV connections will be located in NER room.
Contractor responsible to test each telephone/data/CATV device outlet for proper
function prior to substantial completion. Correct any outlet that does not have proper
connectivity prior to Certificate of Occupancy.
M. LIGHTING
1. Egress lighting in all areas should be checked to confirm that code minimums are
satisfied.
N. The Contract Documents, including Specifications and Construction Drawings, are intended to
provide all material and labor to install complete heating, ventilating, air conditioning systems
for the building and shall interface with all existing building systems affected by new
construction.
O. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior details, floor plans, elevations, and the
structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other
trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of
the fixtures, equipment, and pipe lines and are not to be scaled; all dimensions and existing
conditions shall be checked at the building.
P. The Contractor shall comply with the project closeout requirements as detailed in General
Requirements of Division 01.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
Q.
Where project involves interface with existing building and site systems, every effort has been
made to note existing utilities and services. However, the Contractor should thoroughly
(familiarize themselves with existing conditions and be aware that in some cases information is
not available as to concealed conditions, which exist in portions of the existing building affected
by this work.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.
2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.
B. Drawings:
1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to
equipment and methods of installation.
Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions.
3. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of
equipment and structure.
4. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested, in order to resolve space problems,
preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of
other trades.
5. Where existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts prevent installation of new work as
indicated, relocate, or arrange for relocation, of existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts.
Verify exact location and elevation of existing piping prior to any construction.
6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to
Architect or Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible, including
during bidding period.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. "Above Grade": Not buried in the ground and not embedded in concrete slab on ground.
B. "Accessible": Ability to perform recommended maintenance without removal of services or
equipment and requiring no special platforms.
C. "Actuating" or "Control" Devices: Automatic sensing and switching devices such as
thermostats, pressure, float, electro -pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling operation of
equipment.
D. "]Below Grade": Buried in the ground or embedded in concrete slab on ground.
E. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within
double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in enclosures. In general, any
item not visible or directly accessible.
F. "Connect": Complete hook-up of item with required service.
G. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed."
H. "Furnish": To supply equipment and products as specified.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 3
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
I. "Indicated," "Shown" or " "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on Drawings or
Specifications.
J. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
K. "Motor Controllers": Manual or magnetic starters (with or without switches), individual push
buttons or hand -off -automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
L. "Piping": Pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, strainers, hangers, supports, unions,
traps, drains, insulation, and related items.
M. "Provide": To supply, install and connect as specified for a complete, safe and operationally
ready system.
N. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory" or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, or directed by or to
Architect/Engineer/Owner.
O. "Rough -In": Provide all indicated services in the necessary arrangement suitable for making
final connections to fixture or equipment.
P. "Shall": An exhortation or command to complete the specified task.
Q. "Similar" or "Equal": Of base bid manufacture, equal in materials, weight, size, design, and
efficiency of specified products.
R. "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
S. "Typical" or "Typ": Exhibiting the qualities, traits, or characteristics that identify a kind, class,
number, group or category. Of or relating to a representative specimen. Application shall apply
to all other similarly identified on plan or detail.
T. "Will": A desire to complete the specified task. Allows some flexibility in application as
opposed to "Shall."
U. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
V. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items required
for proper and complete installation.
1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements not explicitly detailed in these specifications
or drawings, but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the
project, must be provided as part of the contract.
B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 26 Sections.
Provide written reports on all tests
C. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be
UL listed and labeled.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. All electrical work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
E. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all
owners of underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10 business
days, before commencing an excavation.
F. Provide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following:
11. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Washington:.
a. 2006 Seattle Building Code
b. 2003 International Building Code (IBC) with State Amendments.
c. 2003 International Electrical Code (IEC) with State Amendments.
d. 2003 International Fire Code (IFC) with State Amendments
e. 2003 National Electrical Code (NEC)
f. 2006 Seattle Washington Energy Code
g. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
h. 2005 National Electrical Code.
i. Local, city, county and state codes and ordinances
j. Local Bureau of Buildings
k. Local Health Department.
1. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts
m. State Administrative Codes.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum or Type 304
stainless steel sheet, not less than 20 USG (0.0375"), riveted or bolted to the manufactured item,
with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non -erasable record of equipment data.
B. Current Models. All work shall be as follows:
1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer.
2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA.
C. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 23,
manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation or
repair, on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project.
1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all existing conditions at building site.
B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided.
C. Provide and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections.
D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final
location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that
require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access
doors required for mechanical access.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 02 through
16 for rough -in requirements.
F. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components.
G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
1. Arrange for chases, sleeves, and openings in other building components to allow for
electrical installations.
H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured -in-
place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing -in the building.
J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of
electrical equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching required
for installation of his work unless otherwise noted.
K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
L. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, without interference with other
installations.
M. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork,
piping, suspension system, sprinkler piping and heads, and other installations.
N. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule shutdown of existing systems to make new
connections.
1.9 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangements of all mechanical work and
requirements to be performed. It is not intended to show or indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories which will be required as a part of the work of this Section.
B. The Contractor shall review the structural and architectural conditions affecting his work. It is
the specific intention of this section that the contractor's scope of work shall include
1. Proper code complying support systems for all equipment whether or not scheduled or
detailed on drawings or in these specifications
2. Minor deviations from the mechanical plans required by architectural and structural
coordination.
C. The Contractor shall study the operational requirements of each system, and shall arrange his
work accordingly, and shall furnish such fittings, offsets, supports, accessories, as are required
for the proper and efficient installation of all systems from the physical space available for use
by this section. This requirement extends to the Contractor's coordination of this section's work
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 6
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Minor deviations in order to avoid conflict shall be permitted where the design intent is not
altered.
E. Advise the Architect, in writing, in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of
equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly
coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict.
1.10 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products
other than those scheduled or shown on the drawings as a basis of design:
1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design,
detailing, structural supports, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution.
3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed
substitute.
B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are
equivalent or superior to specified item.
C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in
the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution.
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for review all materials and equipment in accordance with Division
01 requirements.
B. After approval of preliminary list of materials, the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's Certified Drawings to the Architect for approval.
C. The Contractor shall submit approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's equipment cuts, of all
equipment requiring connection by Division 22/23, to the Mechanical Contractor for final
coordination of mechanical requirements. Contractor shall bear all additional costs for failure to
coordinate with Division 22/23.
D. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a complete package bound in a 3 -ring
binder with tabs for each specification section. The approved submittals shall be converted into
Operations & Maintenance Manuals at the completion of the project. Submit six (6) typed
copies of submittals. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing installation, obtain an extra set of prints from Architect, marked "Record."
Keep this set of Drawings at the job site at all times, and use it for no other purpose but to mark
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 7
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
on it all the changes and revisions to the Contract Drawings resulting from coordination with
other trades. At the completion of the project, edit project AutoCAD files to incorporate all site
markups, changes, and revisions to the Contract Drawings. Submit plots of Record Drawings
and six copies CD Roms labeled with all record AutoCAD drawing files.
B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit, wiring devices and lighting, size and location
both exterior and interior devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment
locations, dimensioned from column lines; concealed conduit & equipment, dimensioned to
column lines; and with Change Orders; concealed control system devices.
C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and
materials used.
D. Refer also to Special Conditions in Division 01 for full scope of requirements.
1.13 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING
A. Prior to start-up, be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper
equipment rotation, proper wiring, auxiliary connections, lubrication, venting, controls, and
installed and properly set relief and safety valves.
B. Provide services of factory -trained technicians for start-up of emergency generator and
automatic transfer switch and other major pieces of equipment. Certify in writing compliance
with this Paragraph, stating names of personnel involved and the date work was performed.
C. Provide certificates of proper startup and operation of generator, transfer switch, remote
generator panel and all other accessories to meet Level 1 equipment installation.
D. Provide certificate of operation for lighting controls which include daylight or occupancy
sensing automatic controls, automatic shut-off controls, occupancy sensors, or automatic time
switches, automatic lighting on controls, the lighting controls shall be tested to ensure that
control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in
accordance with approved plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be
functionally tested to ensure they operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications.
A complete report of test procedures and results shall be prepared and filed with the owner.
E. Refer to other Division 26 Sections for additional requirements.
1.14 INSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE, AND O&M MANUALS
A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work, and prior to training of Owner's personnel, the
Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of operating instructions, maintenance
instructions, part lists, and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and
maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section, bound in a
durable binder. Refer to Division 01.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper instruction of the of Owner's personnel for
operation and maintenance of equipment, and apparatus installed as specified in Division 23 to
be no less than two hours for each piece of equipment. The Contractor shall develop and submit
training materials prior to this training. These materials shall include qualifications of the
trainer, training agenda, learning objectives, and a written test to be administered at the end of
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 8
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
the training session. Operation and Maintenance manuals must present, incorporated and
referenced in the training sessions.
1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately
packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site, unless off-site
storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.
C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site
congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed
for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
1.16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 for the requirements of temporary power and connectivity for construction
and safety. Provide temporary power and lighting services as necessary during the construction
period and as required to maintain operation of existing systems.
1.17 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical
sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring
diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic.
Post instructions where directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each
principal system and equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and
procedure in the event of equipment failure. Provide weather -resistant materials or
weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating
instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy
removal.
1.18 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY
A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site
including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement
will apply continuously and not be limited to normal hours of work.
B. No act, service, Drawing, review, or Construction Review by the Owner, Architect, the
Engineers or their consultants, is intended to include the review of the adequacy of the
Contractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site.
C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless,
indemnify and defend the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers and their consultants, and each of
their officers, employees and agents from any and all liability claim, losses or damage arising,
or alleged to arise from bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons, and for all
damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of,
or in connection with, the performance of the work under the Division of the Specifications, and
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of the work described in the Construction
Contract Documents; but not including the sole negligence of the Owner, the Architect, the
Engineers, and their consultants or their officers, employees and agents.
1.19 CLEANING AND CLOSING
A. All work shall be inspected, tested, and approved before being concealed or placed in operation.
B. Upon completion of the work, all equipment installed as specified in this section, and all areas
where work was performed, shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the
Architect.
C. All lamps will be replaced with new lamps prior to Substantial Completion.
1.20 WARRANTIES
A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor
from the day of Final Acceptance. Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended
or longer-term warranty requirements.
B. Provide complete warranty information for each item, to include product or equipment, date of
beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone
numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
C. Service during warranty period: Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere
during the 12 -month warranty period.
1.21 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented
by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which
may become defective within the period of one (1) year after the Date of Final Acceptance,
ordinary wear and tear excepted.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects
in his work.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL
A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen and shall result in an installation
consistent with the best practices of trades.
B. Install work uniform, level and plumb, in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any
diagonal, or otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by
Architect.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 10
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of
articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or
covered in these Specifications.
1. If the contractor must deviate from the manufacturer's recommendations provide a letter
from the manufacturer indicating the clearance to be provided is acceptable for scheduled
performance and maintenance.
2.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the work between the various Electrical Sections and with the work specified under
other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or
failure to make proper and timely provisions, the altemations shall be made to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and at the Contractor's cost. Coordinate wall and ceiling work with the General
Contractor, and his subcontractors in locating ceiling air outlets, wall registers, etc.
B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or
defected materials.
END OF SECTION 230500
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
230500 - 11
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260519 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Medium -Voltage Cables" for single -conductor and multiconductor
cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to
35,000 V.
2. Division 26 Section "Undercarpet Electrical Power Cables" for flat cables for undercarpet
installations.
3. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice
and data circuits.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Field quality -control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast -in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they
are constructed.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
3. General Cable Corporation.
4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
5. Southwire Company.
C. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN and
XHHW.
E. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for [armored cable, Type AC] [metal -
clad cable, Type MC] [mineral -insulated, metal -sheathed cable, Type MI] [nonmetallic -
sheathed cable, Type NM] [Type SO] [and] [Type USE] with ground wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
B. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138 -inch
(1.3- or 3.5 -mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
2.4 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Elasis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex Co.
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Plastic and/or carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders
No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
Vv'IRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW, single
conductors in raceway.
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
.507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, " Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-
THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-
steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
M. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
N. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
F. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tiightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with. selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16
inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or
more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch
(3.5 mm).
E. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable
unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
J. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
K. Fire -Rated -Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
L. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot -type flashing
units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Aboveground Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch (25 -mm) annular clear space between pipe and
sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1 -inch (25 -mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior -wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and
size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular
space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire -resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following
critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 6
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 7
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 :SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-
5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260526 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) 5/8 by 96
inches (16 by 2400 mm) in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned -copper conductor, No.2/0 AWG
minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green -colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1 Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal -clad cable runs.
8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GFN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
9. Computer and Rack -Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment
grounding conductor in branch -circuit runs from equipment -area power panels and
power -distribution units.
10. X -Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits
supplying x-ray equipment.
B. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -
mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
clampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to
air duct and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat -tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Lsolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4 -by -2 -by -12 -inch (6 -by -50 -by -300 -mm) grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 min) below finished floor or final grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260526 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems,"
and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush
with finished grade or floor.
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,
connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test
wells.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel?
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260529 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
3. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP -58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without
exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit clamps.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2 -inch (38 -mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition .to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 2001b (90 kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS DI.1/D1.IM, with lock washers
and nuts.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic -restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site -
fabricated metal supports.
13. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in
both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters
from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000 -psi (20.7-MPa), 28 -day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials,
reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2.. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. See Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
ductbanks and manholes, and underground handholes, boxes, and utility construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
D. FMC: Zinc -coated steel. Reduced wall or thin wall FMC shall not be used.
E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2. Fittings for EMT: Steel type.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260533 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC -40 -PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper B -Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type [1] [12] [3R], unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap -on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap -on covers. Manufacturer's standard
enamel fmish in color selected by Architect.
1.. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with
texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.
b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e. Panduit Corp.
f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, rectangular.
E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed
cover.
H. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio -frequency -resistant paint.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260533 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit, RNC, Type EPC-40PVC
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, EMT
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMP, ENT or RNC.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes
raceways in the following locations:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet -handling units.
c. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT, ENT
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT.
8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless
steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 -inch (16 -mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
I. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Giumac
260533 - 4
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 -degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch (27 -mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising
above the floor.
I. R.aceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-1b (90 -kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end
of pull wire.
K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:
1., 3/4 -Inch (19 -mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50
feet (15 m).
2. 1 -Inch (25 -mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet
(23 m).
3. Install with a maximum of two 90 -degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. • Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260533 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
M. Expansion -Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located
where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has
straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).
I. Install expansion joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)
temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature
change.
c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125
deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)
of temperature change.
3. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission,
or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct -Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches
(150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end
of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12
inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and
complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth
Moving."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or
foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct -
buried conduits, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and
along the centerline of conduit.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire -resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Spring isolators.
3. Restrained spring isolators.
4. Channel support systems.
5. Restraint cables.
6. Hanger rod stiffeners.
7. Anchorage bushings and washers.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic -Restraint Loading:
1 Site Class as Defined in the IBC: [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F].
2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: [I] [II] [III].
a. Component Importance Factor: [1.0] [1.5] <Insert value>.
b. Component Response Modification Factor: [1.5] [2.5] [3.5] [5.0] <Insert value>.
c. Component Amplification Factor: [1.0] [2.5] <Insert value>.
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): <Insert percent>.
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0 -Second Period: <Insert percent>.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2,. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic -restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
3. Restrained -Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined
loads.
B. Delegated -Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic -restraint details indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 1
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind -load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and
anchorage devices.
3. Field -fabricated supports.
4. Seismic -Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and
values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.
c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the
basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality -control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic -restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Seismic -restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC -ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic -restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic -
restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that
match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open -spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2.. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm-)
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic or limit -stop
restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed; factory -drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm-) thick,
neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit -stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
2.2 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. California Dynamics Corporation.
3. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Hilti Inc.
5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.
6. Mason Industries.
7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.
8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 3
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application
requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field -fabricated support assembly made of slotted
steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion -resistant coating;
and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;
and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted -support -system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.
F. Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices.
H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type in zinc -coated steel for
interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength
required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times
diameter.
J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled -in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate -based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc -coated steel for interior applications and stainless
steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Strength of Support and Seismic -Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.2 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.
2. Install resilient, bolt -isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
Install seismic -restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall -mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment -mounting channels are attached to wall.
C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
D. Drilled -in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc -coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to
a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load -spreading members.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 5
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
3. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
4. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
5. Measure isolator deflection.
6. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
7. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION 260548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260548 - 6
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground -line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
PART 2- FRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage.
C. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,
flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical -resistant coating and matching
wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260553 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Snap -Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway
or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized
to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL -CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage.
C. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
D. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm)
wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
D. Snap -Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2
inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and
to stay in place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08
mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
D. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2 -inch- (50 -mm-) wide, 5 -mil (0.125 -mm) pressure -sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white
stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.6 UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red -Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3. Inscriptions for Orange -Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
C. Tag: Type I:
1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright -colored, continuous -printed on one side with the inscription
of the utility, compounded for direct -burial service.
2. Thickness: 4 mils (0.1 mm).
3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9.0 kg/100 sq. m).
4. 3 -Inch (75 -mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf (133.4 N), and 2500 psi
(17.2 MPa).
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260553 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Tag: Type ID:
1. Detectable three -layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid
aluminum -foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of
the conductive core, bright -colored, continuous -printed on one side with the inscription
of the utility, compounded for direct -burial service.
2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).
3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
4. Weight: 28 Ib/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).
5. 3 -Inch (75 -mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi
(31.7 MPa).
2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self -Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory -printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Baked -Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 114 -inch (6.4 -mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
D. Metal -Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1. Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 -
inch (1 -mm) galvanized -steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for
application.
2. 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES
(915 MM)."
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs
up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260553 - 4
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV -resistant seal for label.
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV -resistant seal for label.
B. Self -Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be
1 inch (25 mm).
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
E. System Identification Color -Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color -coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50 -foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals
in congested areas.
F. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below
finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench
or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260553 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Accessible Raceways and Metal -Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 10 -foot (3-m) maximum
intervals.
B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and
pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend
and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Emergency Power.
2. Power.
3. UPS.
C. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color -coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors
listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch -circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Field -Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where
splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D. Install instructional sign including the color -code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive -film -type labels.
E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write -on tags to conductors and list source.
F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory -installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground -line warning tape to direct -buried cables.
2. Install underground -line warning tape for both direct -buried cables and cables in
raceway.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
H. Workspace Indication: •Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush -mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a
single line of text with 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) high letters on 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm-)
high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
END OF SECTION•260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260553 - 7
•
•
0
SITE LIGHTING LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
Mounting
Flag Pole
Flush in -grade
Flush in -grade
Wall mount
co
0
m
Manufacturer/ Catalog Number
The Flag Company
ORN-FPB-IH-6.5-D-12V
Hydrel
9100 series
9100 -A -175M -208-W WD-FLC-34B-
GEB-LP
Hydrel
9100 series
9100-A-70M-208-NFL-FLC-34B-GEB-LP
j N
N N
co
co
N
C
N
0
N
0.
E
co
-J
LED
supplied
with pole
1-175W
Metal Halide
E17
1-70W
Metal Halide
E17
c
0
a
.5
m
0
Flag pole light with LED lamp option
Fixture to mount on topo of flag pole. Refer to detail 12 Sheet A09.24
for mounting information.
Metal halide in -grade luminaire with cast aluminum door and wall wash optic.
UL listed for wet location.
(Metal halide in -grade luminaire with cast alumium door and narrow flood
optics.
Outdoor emergency light with integral battery back-up. UL Listed for wet
loctions.
Illuminated bollard
F
0
0
0
0
0
ai
v
N
.c
v
tQ o
�
p .c
E C
7 C
H O
C
o
-02
0. c
o
.c v
N C
L_ la
0
To"
O
3
0 f)
o C
O
m y
o t
o. a)
o a=
0. 2
o m
T
co
N
N y
2 a1
C C
O
Oc
w >^
W
C E
a •
U
>. .c
-9
C 4
c. w
-o d
2 '-g.
c 2
rn N
c
`m o
o. v
E v
26 06 51-1
Revised: 5/1/2008
Site Lighting Luminaire Schedule.xls
e
•
•
EDULE
Notes
- 1
(0
CO
(n
(D
(D
U
.-
0)
(O
CD
(O
(O
CO
(ri
.-
(D
(0
N
co
N
co
N
Lamps
F-F32T8
1-C32DT
H
O
M
1-F032/835/ECO
1-T8 Length as required
1-T8 Length as required
2-F32T8
2-F32T8
co
I-
N
VIN
2-F32T8
2-F32T8
2-F32T8 1
C7111
tt
sT
VIM
N.
.-O
CV
(0
01
CV
(0
N
(o
N
((0
CVv-
CO
MINAIRE SCH
O
r
�
�
01
�
�
�
�
�
.-
�
�
0)
C
C'0)
o
O
Recessed
0)
N
O:
Recessed
Recessed
Under Cabinet
Under Cabinet
Recessed
Recessed
Recessed
Recessed
7
Surface 1
INTERIOR LU
Description
Lithonia•
2GT8-4-32-A19-120
Same as type A except emergency
Juno
C6V-32T & C600 -CL -WH
Juno
C6V 32T -BN $ C600 -CI -WH -BN
Neoray Linear
79PFIT8-4-120WR
Lithonia Finess
N2S-Length as required
Lithonia Finess
N2S- Length as required
Lithonia Avante
2AVG232MDR 120 GEB
Lithonia Avante
2AVG232MDR 120 GEB-EL
Lithonia
GT-232-A12125-120-GEB
Lithonia
GT-232-A12125-120-GEB-EL
Lithonia
C232 -120 -ES -WG
(0
c
O
L_
J
ID
= 1.<
¢ I°°
CO
U
CI
0
W
W
LL
LL
I
26 06 52-1
Revised: 5/1/2008
Interior Luminaire Schedule.xls
.r
v
0
9
a
26 06 52-2
Revised: 5/1/2008
•
v
co
r.
a
if;
1-100w Metal Halide l
2-F26DTT
1-175W Metal Halide
Supplied with fixture
CI CD
N
2-F32T8/ECO
2-F32T8/ECO
1-
1_
L.
Supplied with fixture
C")
(D
(NO
CON
CON
(N7
O—
N
N
w
0
r
0
0
N
N
N
N
Recessed
Recessed
Recessed
Surface
L>
to
Recessed
Recessed
0
Recessed
C232 -120 -ES -WG -EL
Gotham
AHZ-100M-8AR-120-TRW
Gotham
AF-226DTT-8AR-EL
Lithonia
G2V-175M-RW-T73-120
Open/Closed Sign supplied by drive-thru vendor
Guardco
101 EM-MT-226QF-120
Lightolier
QVS-1-G-PF-OS-232-12050 W/FK91X4 Frame kit
Lightolier
QVS-1-G-PF-0S-232-12050-N W/FK91X4 Frame kit
'Lithonia
Emergi-Lite
LXN-RC-U
—.
W
Y
J
2
Z
X I
9
a
26 06 52-2
Revised: 5/1/2008
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1. Time switches.
2. Outdoor photoelectric switches.
3. Indoor occupancy sensors.
4. Outdoor motion sensors.
5. Lighting contactors.
6. Emergency shunt relay.
B. See Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for low -voltage, manual and
programmable lighting control systems.
C. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall -box dimmers, wall -switch occupancy
sensors, and manual light switches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Hubbell Lighting.
2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260923 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
4. Novitas, Inc.
5. RAB Lighting, Inc.
6. Sensor Switch, Inc.
7. TORK.
8. Watt Stopper (The).
D. General Description: Wall- or ceiling -mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.
1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and
off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum
range of 1 to 15 minutes.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
4. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1 /2 -inch (13 -mm) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure.
c. Time -Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
7. Automatic Light -Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lx); keep
lighting off when selected lighting level is present.
E. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and
movement in area of coverage.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) minimum movement of
any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq.
ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96 -inch- (2440 -mm-) high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted
on a 10 -foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.
2.2 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
referenced on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Products.
4. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control.
5. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company.
6. Hubbell Lighting.
7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
8. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems.
9. Square D; Schneider Electric.
10. Touch -Plate, Inc.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
11. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Description: Electrically operated and [mechanically] [electrically] held, combination type
with [fusible switch] [nonfused disconnect], complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high -inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings or scheduled, matching
the NEMA type specified for the enclosure.
2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote -Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded -copper conductors not
smaller than No. [18] [22] [24] AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low -
Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded -copper conductors not smaller than
No. [14] [16] [18] AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance
in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to [two] <Insert number>
visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure -
borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory -installed vibration
isolators.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
260923 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power -limited and nonpower -
limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time
delays.
B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.
END OF SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4.. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5.. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6„ Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7.. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8.. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.”
D. Fiield quality -control reports.
E. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
F. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
PANELBOARDS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262416 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Tin-plated aluminum.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
4. Feed -Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one
or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
H. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series -connected system with integral or
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type
of allowable upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series -connected short-
circuit rating by an NRTL.
PANELBOARDS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262416 - 2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
• I. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals.
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED PANELBOARDS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt -on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device
requires mechanical release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D. Mains: Lugs only.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device
requires mechanical release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
PANELBOARDS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262416 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review . New Southcenter Branch
2.4 . LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type.
C. Mains: lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
F. Column -Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box
equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -
mounted, field -adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field -replaceable rating plug or field -
replicable electronic trip; and the following field -adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short -time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short -time time adjustments.
d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let -through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK -5.
5. . GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault
protection (6-mA trip).
6. Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground -fault
protection (30-mA trip).
7. Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-
V, single -pole configuration.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
8. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit -breaker handle
in off position.
e. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit -breaker handle in on
position.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1. Fuses, and Spare -Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26
Section "Fuses."
2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407..
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field -adjustable, circuit -breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Stub four 1 -inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1 -inch (27-GRC) empty conduits
into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
I. Comply with NECA 1.
PANELBOARDS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262416 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
B. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Wall -box motion sensors.
3. Snap switches and wall -box dimmers.
4. Solid-state fan speed controls.
5. Wall -switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
6. Communications outlets.
13. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, [feed] [non -feed] -through type. Comply with
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is
lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
2.4 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224
(four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC 1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4 (four way).
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b. Hubbell; HPL 1221 PL for 120 V and 277 V.
c. Leviton; 1221 -PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS2OAC1-PLR for 120 V.
3. Description: Single pole, with neon -lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Key -Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
11. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 L.
b. Hubbell; HBL 1221 L.
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS2OAC1-L.
3. Description: Single pole, with factory -supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
E. Single -Pole, Double -Throw, Momentary Contact, Center -Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for
use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557.
c. Leviton; 1257.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
F. Key -Operated, Single -Pole, Double -Throw, Momentary Contact, Center -Off Switches,
120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory -supplied key
in lieu of switch handle.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.
c. Leviton; 1257L.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.
2.5 FAN SPEED CONTROLS
A. Modular, 120-V, full -wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible
frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.
1. Continuously adjustable [slider] [toggle switch] [rotary knob], [5 A] [1.5 A].
2. Three -speed adjustable [slider] [rotary knob], 1.5 A.
2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall -Switch Sensors:
1„ Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V.
b. Hubbell; WS1277.
c. Leviton; ODS 10 -ID.
d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000.
e. Watt Stopper (The); WS -200.
3. Description: Passive -infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes,
180 -degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Wall -Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V.
b. Leviton; ODS 15 -ID.
3. Description: Adaptive -technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20
minutes, 180 -degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq.
m).
C. Long -Range Wall -Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATP 1600 WRP.
b. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW.
c. Pass & Seymour; WA1001.
d. Watt Stopper (The); CX -100.
e. <Insert manufacturer's name; catalog number.>
3. Description: Passive -infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes,
110 -degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).
D. Long -Range Wall -Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP.
b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW.
c. Watt Stopper (The); DT -200.
3. Description: Dual technology, with both passive -infrared- and ultrasonic -type sensing,
120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110 -degree field of view, and a
minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).
E. Wide -Range Wall -Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATP 120HBRP.
b. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW.
c. Pass & Seymour; HS 1001.
d. Watt Stopper (The); CX -100-3.
3. Description: Passive -infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes,
150 -degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).
F. Exterior Occupancy Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Leviton; PS200-10.
b. Watt Stopper (The); EW -100-120.
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 4
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3.
Description: Passive -infrared type, 120/277 V, weatherproof, adjustable time delay up to
15 minutes, 180 -degree field of view, and 110 -foot (34-m) detection range. Minimum
switch rating: 1000-W incandescent, 500 -VA fluorescent.
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A. Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2'.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 3560-6.
b. Leviton; 40649.
3. Description: Single RJ -45 jack for terminating 100 -ohm, balanced, four -pair UTP;
TIA/EIA-568-B.1 complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.
B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 3562.
b. Leviton; 40595.
c. <Insert manufacturer's name; catalog number.>
3. Description: Single RJ -45 jack for 100 -ohm, balanced, four -pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-
B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.
2.8 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: [Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field
painting] [Smooth, high -impact thermoplastic] [0.035 -inch- (1 -mm-) thick, satin -
finished stainless steel] [0.04 -inch- (1 -mm-) thick, brushed brass with factory
polymer finish] [0.05 -inch- (1.2 -mm-) thick anodized aluminum] [0.04 -inch- (1 -mm-)
thick steel with chrome -plated finish].
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: [Galvanized steel] [Smooth, high -impact
thermoplastic].
4. Material for Damp Locations: [Thermoplastic] [Cast aluminum] with spring-loaded
lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather -
resistant [, die-cast aluminum] [thermoplastic] with lockable cover.
2.9 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, [flush -type] [flap -type] [above -floor], dual -service units suitable for wiring
method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: [Rectangular] [Round], [die-cast aluminum] [solid brass] with satin finish.
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: [Blank cover with bushed cable opening] [Two
modular, keyed, color -coded, RJ -45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable].
2.10 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: [Almond] [Black] [Brown]
[Gray] [Ivory] [White] [As selected by Architect] <Insert color>, unless otherwise
indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: [Red] <Insert color>.
3. TVSS Devices: Blue.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes. •
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use duringconstruction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 6
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles [up] [down], and on horizontally
mounted receptacles to the [right] [left].
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1„ Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with [black] [white] [red] -filled lettering on face
of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new,
and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262726 - 8
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
4. Enclosures.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
D. Field quality -control reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
ENCLOSE]) SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262816 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
F. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
5. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262816 - 2
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
F. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.3 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field -replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following
field -adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short -time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short -time time adjustments.
4. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
E. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let -through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK -5.
F. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262816 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,
to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
I. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
B. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262816-4
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262816 - 5
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid-state, pulse -width modulated (PWM), variable frequency controllers
(VFCs) for speed control of three-phase, squirrel -cage induction motors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of VFC.
B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC.
1. Include wiring diagrams.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that VFCs, accessories,
and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Field quality -control test reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Load -current and overload -relay heater list.
G. Load -current and list of settings of adjustable overload relays.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,
minimum clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full
load without derating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1., Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C.
2.. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (noncondensing).
3.. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1005 m).
4. <Insert unusual service conditions.>
VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262923 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and
control circuits to which they connect.
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings
and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor
and load.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.
2. Baldor Electric Company (Graham).
3. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Electronic Drives Div.
4. Eaton Corporation; Cutler -Hammer Products.
5. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems.
6. Rockwell Automation; Allen-Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group.
7. Siemens Energy and Automation; Industrial Products Division.
8. Square D.
9. Toshiba International Corporation.
10. <Insert manufacturer's name.
2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS
A Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and
arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by
adjusting output voltage and frequency.
1. Provide unit suitable for operation of [standard] [premium] -efficiency motor as defined
by NEMA MG 1.
B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection
used between motor and load such as direct or through a power -transmission connection.
C. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to [60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout
voltage range] [66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes] [120 Hz, with horsepower
constant throughout speed range].
D. Unit Operating Requirements:
1. Input ac voltage tolerance of [208 V, plus or minus 5] [380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10]
[525 to 575 V, plus or minus 10] percent.
2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
3. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
4. Minimum Displacement Primary -Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262923 - 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base
load current for 3 seconds.
6. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
7. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
E. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.
1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V.
2. Pneumatic Signal: 3 to 15 psig (20 to 104 kPa).
F. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
2.. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
G. Self -Protection and Reliability Features:
1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.
2. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and overcurrent trips.
3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class [10] [20] [30]
performance.
4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller -motor -load combination at a natural
frequency of the combination.
5. Instantaneous line -to -line and line -to -ground overcurrent trips.
6. Loss -of -phase protection.
7. Reverse -phase protection.
8. Short-circuit protection.
9. Motor overtemperature fault.
H. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power
after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction.
Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either
direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller,
motor, or load.
I. Rower -Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re -energizing after a power interruption
until motor has stopped.
J. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the
minimum torque to ensure high -starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
K. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall -back based on
output frequency for temperature protection of self -cooled, fan -ventilated motors at slow
speeds.
L. Input Line Conditioning: <Insert requirements.>
M. VFC Output Filtering: <Insert requirements.>
N. Status Lights: Door -mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:
1. Power on.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262923 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Run.
3. Overvoltage.
4. Line fault.
5. Overcurrent.
6. External fault.
O. Panel -Mounted Operator Station: Start -stop and auto -manual selector switches with manual
speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
P. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in
controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
2. Motor speed (rpm).
3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
4. Motor current (amperes).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Fault or alarming status (code).
7. PID feedback signal (percent).
8. DC -link voltage (VDC).
9. Set -point frequency (Hz).
10. Motor output voltage (V).
Q.
Control Signal Interface:
1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA)
and 6 programmable digital inputs.
2. Pneumatic Input Signal Interface: 3 to 15 psig (20 to 104 kPa).
3. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed -setting input
signals from the BMS or other control systems:
a. 0 to 10-V dc.
b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA.
c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
e. RS485.
f. Keypad display for local hand operation.
4. Output Signal Interface:
a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be programmed to
any of the following:
1) Output frequency (Hz).
2) Output current (load).
3) DC -link voltage (VDC).
4) Motor torque (percent).
5) Motor speed (rpm).
6) Set -point frequency (Hz).
5. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A)
for remote indication of the following:
a. Motor running.
b. Set -point speed reached.
c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
d. PID high- or low -speed limits reached.
VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
R. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing VFC to be used with an external system
within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be
programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the
nonvolatile memory.
S. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to safely transfer motor between controller output
and bypass controller circuit when motor is at zero speed. Controller -off -bypass selector switch
sets mode, and indicator lights give indication of mode selected. Unit shall be capable of stable
operation (starting, stopping, and running), with motor completely disconnected from controller
(no load).
T. Bypass Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full -voltage, nonreversing enclosed controller with across -
the -line starting capability in manual -bypass mode. Provide motor overload protection under
both modes of operation with control logic that allows common start -stop capability in either
mode.
U. Integral Disconnecting Means: [NEMA AB 1, instantaneous -trip circuit breaker]
[NEMA AB 1, molded -case switch] [NEMA KS 1, nonfusible switch] [NEMA KS 1, fusible
switch] with lockable handle.
V. Isolating Switch: Non -load -break switch arranged to isolate VFC and permit safe
troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de -energized, while motor is operating in
bypass mode.
W. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. <:Insert enclosure requirements.>
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push -Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push -Button Station: Momentary -break, push-button station with a factory -
applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with
control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time -delay relays.
E. Standard Displays:
1, Output frequency (Hz).
1 Set -point frequency (Hz).
3.. Motor current (amperes).
4.. DC -link voltage (VDC).
5.. Motor torque (percent).
6.. Motor speed (rpm).
7.. Motor output voltage (V).
VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262923 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
F. Historical Logging Information and Displays:
1. Real-time clock with current time and date.
2. Running log of total power versus time.
3. Total run time.
4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.
G. Current -Sensing, Phase -Failure Relays for Bypass Controller: Solid-state sensing circuit with
isolated output contacts for hard -wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase
reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with adjustable
response delay.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard <Insert color> paint applied to VFCs before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and
motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install VFCs on concrete bases.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 26
Section "Fuses."
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control
sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions
with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 26 Section "Low -
Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262923 - 6
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Connect hand -off -automatic switch and other automatic -control devices where applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic -control devices that
have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for
safety -type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature
cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform the
following:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.[ Test
and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.]
2. Assist in field testing of equipment[ including pretesting and adjusting of solid-state
controllers].
3. Report results in writing.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests,
stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges.
END OF SECTION 262923
VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
262923 - 7
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes field -mounted TVSS for low -voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and
control equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 26 Section "Branch/Panelboards" for factory -installed TVSS.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also, transient voltage
surge suppression.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Must have fifteen days prior approval to bid on project. Request for submittal must be in
writing and attached with independent documentation of the following items.
B. Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer which
show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection notes, wire size and wiring
diagram.
C. Equipment Manual: The manufacturer shall furnish an installation manual with installation
notes, start-up and operating instructions for the specified system. Installation instructions shall
clearly state whether the system requires an external overcurrent device to maintain the system's
UL 1449 listing.
D. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights,
electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
F. Product Certificates: For TVSS devices, from manufacturer.
TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
264313 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
G. UL 1449 stipulation for fused TVSS — The manufacturer's authorized representative is required
to submit the following:
1. Certify that the TVSS system is UL 1449 listed (UL Card) with UL Card.
2. Indicate the type of internal or external fusing that is incorporated in the TVSS system
and what impact the fusing has on the performance of the device with respect to surge
capacity and clamping levels.
H. Independent Testing:
1. High exposure with the 10 x 1,000µs tests per IEEE C62.41.2 Section 7.2
2. Life Cycle/Repetitive Testing per C62.45-2002 section B.38 minimum of 1,000 to 2,000
times.
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. National Electrical Code 2005 rev. - (NEC Article 285 TVSS Installation practice/NEC Article
250.56 Grounding)
NFPA-78 and CSA - (National Fire Protection Association and Canadian Standards
Associations)
ISO 9001:2000 - Quality standard / Military Standards (MIL -STD 220A)
D. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering Inc.) C62.41.1 and C62.41.2 — 2002
rev. — (System shall be designed to meet C62.41). IEEE C62.41.2 — 2002 Section 7.2 long
duration 10 x 1,000 µSEC test. IEEE C62.45 — 2002 rev. — (System shall be tested to meet the
C62.45).
E. Category A & B — (0.5 µs x 100 kHz Ring Wave). Category B3 Biwave — (8 x 20 µs at 3,000
Amperes and 1.2 x 50 µs at 6,000 Volts). Category C3 Biwave — (8 x 20 in at 10,000 Amperes
and 1.2 x 50 µs at 20,000 Volts).
F. Underwriters Laboratories 1449 — (UL 1449 2nd edition or current safety standard for Transient
Voltage Surge Suppressors). Underwriters Laboratories 1283 — (UL 1283 listed as an
electromagnetic interference filter that provides noise attenuation). Underwriters Laboratories
67 — (UL 67 internal integration of TVSS in panel board). Canadian Standards Association
(CSA, CUL)
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. CBEMA (ITIC) and IEC — (Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Association or
Information Technology Industry Council and International Electrotechnical Commission define
clamping voltage tolerance guidelines for sensitive equipment). SVRs must meet voltage
tolerance guidelines:
TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
264313 - 2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. SVR clamp levels for wye and single phase (L -N, L -G and N -G): 400-600V for 120V
systems, 800-1200V for 277V systems and 1200-1500V for 347V systems.
2. SVR clamp levels for delta circuits (L -L and L -G): 1000-1200V for 240V systems,
1500-1800V for 480V systems and 1800-2000V for 600V systems.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed electrical service
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written
permission.
B. Service Conditions: Rate TVSS devices for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system
operating voltage.
2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).
3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.
4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6096 m) above sea level.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field -mounted TVSS devices to allow adequate clearances for
maintenance.
B. Coordinate TVSS devices with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:
1. Current Technology — CGP 100
2. LEA International Inc. — PV200
3. Liebert — SI -020-C
No other Manufacturers will be accepted.
TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
264313 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. The equipment's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200 kA per phase (L -N plus L -G)
and 100 kA per mode (L -N, L -G, L -L and N -G).
C. The system protection modules shall contain a technology that utilizes a symmetrical array of
balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV). Each MOV will be individually coordinated to pass UL
1449.
D. All primary transient paths shall utilize copper wire, aluminum bus bar and lugs of equivalent
capacity to provide equal impedance interconnection between phases. No plug-in module or
components shall be used in surge carrying paths.
E. Each protection module shall have a visual indicator that signifies that the protection circuitry is
on line. The unit shall not be taken off line to verify integrity of system. Redundant status
indicators shall be mounted on the front of the door that monitors the system protection
circuitry.
F. The system shall be modular with field replaceable modules. Modular units shall contain a
minimum of one module per phase.
G. Each protection module shall have a capacitive filtering system connected in each Line to
Neutral (L—*N)(Wye) mode or Line to Line (L-*L)(Delta) mode to provide EMURFI noise
attenuation (UL 1283).
H. Protection modes: The TVSS shall provide Line to Neutral (L—>N)(Wye), Line to Ground
(L-+G)(Wye or Delta), Line to Line (L-+L)(Delta) and Neutral to Ground (N-+G)(Wye)
protection.
I. Equipment shall provide the following monitoring features: dry contacts, digital surge counter
and audible alarm with alarm disable switch. Equipment shall utilize a NEMA 4 enclosure.
2.2 BRANCH/PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:
1. Current Technology — CG60-LA
2. LEA International Inc. - SP
3. Liebert - ACV
No other Manufacturers will be accepted.
B. Device shall meet all specification requirements in section 2.1 except as follows:
1. The equipment's minimum surge current capacity shall be 120 kA per phase (L -N plus L-
G) and 60 kA per mode (L -N, L -G, L -L and N -G).
2. The system protection modules shall contain a technology that utilizes a symmetrical
array of balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV) in a non -modular configuration. Each
MOV will be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449.
3. Equipment shall provide the following monitoring features: dry contacts, digital surge
counter, audible alarm with alarm disable switch, disconnect switch, remote status
monitor and spare module. Equipment shall utilize a NEMA 4X enclosure.
TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
264313 - 4
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
B. The specified service entrance/switchboard/switchgear system shall be installed with the
shortest lead length possible not to exceed five (5') electrical feet from the power conductor(s) it
is protecting, must have a grounding of 25 Ohms (NEC Article 250.56) or less and shall avoid
any unnecessary or sharp bends. Utilize a 3 pole 60 amp breaker for connection means.
C. The specified branch panelboard system shall be installed with the shortest lead length possible
not to exceed a foot and half (1.5') electrical feet from the power conductor(s) it is protecting,
must have a grounding of 25 Ohms (NEC Article 250.56) or less and shall avoid any
unnecessary or sharp bends. Utilize a 3 pole 30 amp breaker for connection means.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation
requirements.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1, Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
"Surge Arresters, Low -Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance
with test parameters.
2. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. T'VSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment or panelboards to their sources until
TVSS devices are installed and connected.
B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS
installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately
after the testing is over.
TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 264313 - 5
POWER CIRCUITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
maintain TVSS devices.
END OF SECTION 264313
TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
264313 - 6
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Emergency lighting units.
3. Exit signs.
4. Lighting fixture supports.
5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
B. See Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control
systems employing low -voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
C. See Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multiple lighting relays and
contactors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer -controlled fixtures,
signed by product manufacturer.
D. Field quality -control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that
introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265100 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
3. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular. Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different
thickness is indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Air -Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat
extraction and for attaching an air -diffuser -boot assembly specified in Division 23 Section
"Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
1. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air -diffuser -boot assemblies.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Giumac
265100 - 2
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity.
3. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity
at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units.
4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return -air volume.
5. Static Fixture: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active
units.
2.3 BALLASTS
A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant -start
type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts
shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.
1. Sound Rating: A.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
6. BF: 0.85 or higher.
7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
B. Electromagnetic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy
saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic -reset thermal protection.
1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
C. Ballasts for Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher for Linear Fluorescent
Lamps: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.
D. Ballasts for Bi -Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic
type.
1.. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output
of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a. High -Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.
b. Low -Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.
3.. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system
and lamp type indicated.
E. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid -start type, complying
with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be
designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265100 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
F. Internal -Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter
unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with
UL 924.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100
lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to
fixture ballast.
2. Night -Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type.
5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
G. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.
Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single -lamp
ballasts.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
4. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
5. Low -Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy -encapsulated models designed to
minimize audible fixture noise.
H. Electronic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Sound Rating: A.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.
4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
6. Power Factor: .90 or higher.
7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and
lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp
life.
2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265100 - 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type.
2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops
to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep -discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
4. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.6 LAMPS
A. Low -Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching
procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to
NEMA LL 1.
B. 1'8 Rapid -Start low -mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 32 W maximum, nominal length 48
inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
C. T8 Rapid -Start low -mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24
inches (610 mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4 -Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500
K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6.. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
E. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
F. Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
G. Ceramic, Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel -
and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265100 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount
a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16 -inch (5 -mm) minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.
C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D. Air -Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265100 - 6
•
•
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.
2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
3. Poles and accessories.
B. See Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on
exterior surfaces of buildings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting
unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by
manufacturer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2- FRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Iri Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that
introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is
based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the
named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265600 - 1
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet
locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with IESNA RP -8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for
luminaires.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion -resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or
replacing Lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,
and UV radiation.
I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging -resistant resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested
luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.
M. Factory -Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Color as selected by Architect. Comply with
NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
N. Factory -Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Color shall be as specified. Comply with
NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265600 - 2
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
23 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS
A. Low -Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and
operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) minus 20 deg F (minus
29 deg C) and higher.
B. Ballast Characteristics:
1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
2. Sound Rating: A.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,
Class P, automatic -reset thermal protection.
5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.
6. Transient -Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better.
C. Low -Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast
provided at temperatures 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) and
higher.
D. Fluorescent Lamps: Low -mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching
procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to
NEMA LL 1.
2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open -circuit operation without reduction
average life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C).
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
B. Haigh -Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and
capable of open -circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall
have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90
deg C.
1. Instant -Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory
installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to
150 W.
a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac.
b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C).
2.5 HID LAMPS
A. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
B. Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
C. Ceramic, Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 .Glumac
265600 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric
device to prevent false operation of relayby artificial light sources.
3.2 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.
B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches (100 mm) above finished grade or surface at bollard
location. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by
troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND -MOUNTING LUMINAIRES
A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches (100 mm) above finished grade or surface at luminaire
location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete
materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010 -inch- (0.254 -mm-) thick, pipe -wrapping
plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265600 - 4
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
END OF SECTION 265600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Copyright 2008 Glumac
265600 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008. Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire -alarm control unit.
2. Manual fire -alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Heat detectors.
5. Notification appliances.
6. Magnetic door holders.
7. Remote annunciator.
8. Addressable interface device.
9.. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
a. Provide Remote Supervising Station connection.
1) Coordinate with Owner for star of service (contract for service in place)
2) Provide that the correct numbers of dedicated communication lines are
installed and functioning for service. Typically this requires two dedicated
telephone lines (contract for lines in Owner's name). Verify with Owner's
Representative and remote supervising station service what is required.
3) Refer to NFPA 72, 2007 Edition; Annex A, Table A.8.6.1 for Digital Alarm
Communicator Systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light -emitting diode.
B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Digital, addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire -alarm
service only.
1. Refer to NFPA 72, 2007 Edition; Annex A, Table A.8.1 for Fire Alarm Performance
Criteria for a Remote Supervising Station Fire Alarm System.
2. Class B, Style 4 system, per NFPA 72, 2007 Edition and/or approved by AHJ.
1.5 SYSTEM APPROVED DESIGN DRAWINGS
A. As defined by this section, the "Approved Drawings", are those documents that have been
approved in writing by the AHJ and meet the requirements of Part 1 and Part 2 of this
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
specification. This to include, but not limited to, all drawings, shop drawings, calculations,
software and cut sheets.
B. The Project Owner has ownership of the design of this project, including but not limited to all
drawings, shop drawings, calculations, software (Operating Programs for Fire Alarm and
Detection System), and AutoCAD drawings/files.
1. Prior to Final Payment on Project Closeout, contractor will provide compact discs:
a. For the AutoCAD files for all drawings, shop drawings and calculations.
b. For the Operating System with all access codes and source documentation so as to
be able to manipulate and reprogram operating system.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Fire -alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system
continues to function."
B. System Performance:
1. Meet or exceed National, Local and State Codes and Ordinances.
2. Meet or exceed requirements of this document, which in some cases will exceed Local,
State or National requirements.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them
to Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire -alarm system design.
b. NICET-certified fire -alarm technician, Level III minimum.
c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire -alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Provide drawings and documentation as required per Delegated Design Submittal below.
2. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
4. Include battery -size calculations.
5. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that
each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity
possible when air -handling system is operating.
6. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them.
Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector
housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 -2
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For Fire Alarm and Detection System to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Drawings showing the location of each device, ratings of each, and installation details as
needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.
a. Contractor may use a "Performance Based Design", coordinate design with AHJ.
b. Fire Alarm and Detection initiating devices, notification devices, control units,
power supplies, interconnection & systems operation, circuits & wiring, and off -
premises signaling per NFPA 72.
c. Coordinate design with Architect, Owner and Fire Marshall for location of all Fire
Alarm and Detection System Devices.
d. Coordinate with Mechanical for Duct Smoke Detectors and Fire Smoke Damper.
1) Confirm that Pendant -Mounted and Inlet Tube Devices are located correctly
and at proper orientation. Refer to NFPA 72, 2007 Edition, Annex A,
Figure A.5.16.4.2.2(a), (b), (c) and A.5.16.5.2(a) & (b).
2) Tamper and Flow Switch locations for Wet, Dry, Pre -action & Deluge, as
may be required on project.
e. Coordinate Elevator Recall with Elevator Contractor for Elevator Recall. Refer to
Annex A, NFPA 72, 2007 Edition.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of
each device, complying with NFPA 72.
a. NO initiating device (except beam detection) shall be permitted to be mounted on
walls, as this location does not allow for contact with the smoke or heat in the
ceiling jet of a fire.
b. Audible notification shall be designed to be 10dBA over Average Ambient Sound
Levels, per NFPA 72, 2007 Edition, Annex A, Table A.7.4.2
1) Maintain spacing for units at 10'.
a) Corridor notification WILL NOT provide notification in
offices/restrooms or other enclosed spaces, not directly open to
corridor.
b) Provide notification in each enclosed space.
2) In high ambient sound levels locations, reduce spacing of units to keep
sound level below 105dBA and to improve distribution of signal at a lower
sound level.
3) Audible notification over 105dBA shall not be permitted and an alternate
means of notification will be required. Coordinate this means of notification
with AHJ and Owner.
c. Visual notification shall be designed to not exceed 1000 cd (effective intensity) per
NFPA 72.
1) For room spacing refer to Tables 7.5.4.3.1(a), 7.5.4.3.1(b), 7.5.4.3.1,
7.5.4.6.2 and Annex A figure A.7.5.3(a) & A.7.5.3(b) NFPA 2007 Edition.
2) No single device shall produce a maximum light output of more than 100cd
(effective intensity).
a) Additional devices shall be provided in design to achieve minimum
required light output.
d. Fire Alarm Control Panel (Control Units):
1) Provide a unit that has sufficient capacity to meet the requirements for the
size and scope of the project plus 20% spare capacity.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 - 3
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a) Each Building will be a primary zone with each floor comprising a
secondary zone within the building (projects with multiple buildings
will have multiple primary zones and multiple secondary zones with
each addressable unit displayable).
2) Control Unit Interface
a) Coordinate with Owner for a "Standard Emergency Services
Interface" that matches other existing facilities interface (Alarm
Event Display).
b) Coordinate with AHJ for standard emergency services interface
requirements.
e. Interconnections:
1) Interconnected control units will conform to NFPA 72::
a) Operate as a single system
b) Be listed for Fire Alarm Service
c) Reset only from the protected premises, unless permitted by the AHJ.
f. Power Supplies: Comply with NFPA 72.
1) Battery Calculations to include Notification Appliances at 130% of design
load.
g. Circuits and Wiring: Comply with NFPA 72
1) Provide 2 hour rated cable system.
a) Coordinate locations of Plenums and Environmental Air Spaces for
installation of cable system rated for these areas.
b) Wiring from Control Unit to Notification Appliances to be sized at
130% of design load.
2) With written approval of AHJ:
a) Metal raceways in fully sprinklered buildings.
b) Performance alternative.
3) Circuit Analysis:
a) Maximum resistance per leg = 50 Ohms.
b) Maximum Voltage Drop = 3.0%.
h. Input/Output Matrix:
1) Provide on the design drawings an Input/Output Matrix as per NFPA 2007
Edition, Annex A, Figure A.10.6.2.3(9).
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire -alarm control unit, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
F. Field quality -control reports.
G. Pre -Testing and Inspection:
1. Within 30 Days of the approval of the design build documents by the AHJ contractor will
provide:
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 4
Copyright 2008 Glumac
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
a. An "Inspection and Testing Form" completed as to pertinent project information,
initiating devices, notification devices, supervisory signal -initiating devices,
1) Refer to NFPA 72, 2007 Edition, Annex A, Figure A.10.6.2.3.
2) Provide this report monthly as to progress on the project and visual and
functional tests performed.
b. A schedule for Visual Inspection Frequencies.
1) List each component and it's address
2) Inspection frequencies, as per NFPA 72, 2007 Edition, Annex A, Table
A.10.3.1.
c. A schedule/matrix for Testing Methods:
1) List each component and it's address/location
2) Method of test as per NFPA 72, 2007 Edition, Annex A, Table A.10.4.2.2.
2. Forms and Schedules will be reviewed by Electrical Consulting Engineering firm.
Design Build Contractor and Engineer will review Engineer's edit notes and comments.
Contractor will incorporate these edit notes and comments into the forms and schedules.
Upon completion of this process Contractor will provide Engineer with revised
forms/schedules. (All forms to be provided a one time).
a. Engineer will review, edit and comment within 15 day of receipt of documents.
b. Contractor will revise documents within 15 days of receipt of comments and
provide Engineer with revised set.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire -alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1 „ Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
2.. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
3. Record copy of site-specific software.
4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of
the same name and include the following:
a. Frequency of testing of installed components.
b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.
c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.
5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire -alarm control unit.
7. Copy of NFPA 25.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data
files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 - 5
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire -alarm
Level II technician.
C. Source Limitations for Fire -Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire -alarm system from
single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as,
an extension of existing system.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Comply with UL 864.
B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.
C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised
licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow
Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount
installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer
than 1 unit.
3. Smoke Detectors and Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each
type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no
fewer than 1 unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable
product by one of the following:
1. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 6
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2,. No substitutions.
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire -alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Flame detectors.
4. Smoke detectors.
5. Duct smoke detectors.
6. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
7. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
8. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.
9. Fire -extinguishing system operation.
10. Fire standpipe system.
B. Fire -alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm at fire -alarm control unit and remote annunciators.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote'alarm receiving station.
4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
6. Activate alarm communication system.
7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire -alarm mode.
8.. Activate smoke -control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke -control system
panel.
9. Activate stairwell and elevator -shaft pressurization systems.
10. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
1 l . Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
12. Activate emergency lighting control.
1:3. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
14. Record events in the system memory.
15. Record events by the system printer.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Low -air -pressure switch of a dry -pipe sprinkler system.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm -initiating and supervisory signal -initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at fire -alarm control unit.
4. Ground or a single break in fire -alarm control unit internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire -alarm control unit.
6. Break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire -alarm control unit or annunciator.
9. Fire -pump power failure, including a dead -phase or phase -reversal condition.
10. Low -air -pressure switch operation on a dry -pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 ,Glumac
283111 - 7
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate
at fire -alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.
2.3 FIRE -ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General Requirements for Fire -Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field -programmable, microprocessor -based, modular, power -limited design with
electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.
a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through
failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for
adjustment of sensitivity at fire -alarm control unit.
b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity
range of the device.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire -alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid -crystal type, 1 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke -detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72,
Class A.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D.
b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z.
c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 2.
d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
2. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72,
Class B.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style A.
b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style W.
c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 0.5.
d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
3. Serial Interfaces: Two RS -232 ports for printers.
D. Stairwell Pressurization: Provide an output signal using an addressable relay to start the
stairwell pressurization system. Signal shall remain on until alarm conditions are cleared and
fire -alarm system is reset. Signal shall not stop in response to alarm acknowledge or signal
silence commands.
1. Pressurization starts when any alarm is received at fire -alarm control unit.
2. Alarm signals from smoke detectors at pressurization air supplies have a higher priority
than other alarm signals that start the system.
E. Smoke -Alarm Verification:
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 8
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm -verification" signal at fire -alarm
control unit.
2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm -verification" sequence at fire -alarm
control unit and detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancel fire -alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
F. IDoor Controls: Door hold -open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in
smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire -alarm system.
G. Remote Smoke -Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable
smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change
those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time -scheduled, and automated
changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and
sensitivity -adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted
values on system printer.
H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,
and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
I. Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant
microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in a separate cabinet
located in the fire command center.
1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different
announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of
the central -control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by
an NRTL.
a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and,
at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any
combination.
b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.
c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."
d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by
NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance
circuits of fire -alarm control unit.
2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the
status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.
3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup
units, on primary equipment failure.
J. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power -supply module.
Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals
shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire -alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power -
supply module rating.
K. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 -9
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
L. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or
glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the
system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.4 MANUAL FIRE -ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire -Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded, raised -letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Single-action mechanism, breaking -glass or plastic -rod type; with integral addressable
module arranged to communicate manual -station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to
fire -alarm control unit.
2. Double -action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking -glass or
plastic -rod type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual -
station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit.
3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench -operated switch.
4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to
permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral
battery -powered audible horn intended to discourage false -alarm operation.
5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Detectors shall be four -wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist -lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
5. Self -Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual -Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power -
on status.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog -addressable type,
individually monitored at fire -alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire -alarm control unit.
a. Rate -of -rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire -alarm control unit
for 15 or 20 deg F (8 or 11 deg C) per minute.
b. Fixed -temperature sensing shall be independent of rate -of -rise sensing and shall be
settable at fire -alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F (57 or 68 deg C).
e. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire -alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 10
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
C. Ionization Smoke Detector:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire -alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire -alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3.. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with
the supplied detector.
4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor -control circuit.
2.6 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature oft135 deg F (57
deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed -Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C).
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 - 11
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit.
D. Continuous Linear Heat -Detector System:
1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F (68 deg C). NRTL listed for
"regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires
twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with
PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat -sensitive material that reacts
with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location of
elevated temperature.
2. Control Unit: Two -zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power
supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire -alarm control unit.
3. Signals to Fire -Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to
fire -alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone
shall be individually reported to central fire -alarm control unit as separately identified
zones.
4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit.
2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a
signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal
circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory -integrated audible and visible devices in a single -
mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
C. Chimes, Low -Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.
D. Chimes, High -Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.
E. Horns: Electric -vibrating -polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound -pressure level
of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464
test protocol.
F. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 1 -inch- (25 -mm-) high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output:
a. 15 cd.
b. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 12
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.
G. Tone Notification Appliances:
1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
2. High -Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.
3. Low -Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.
4. Mounting: Flush.
5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker
location.
2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire -alarm control unit for alarm,
supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire -
alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights
shall match those of fire -alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset,
and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system
• address for alarm -initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
•
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator
recall.
2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and
shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire -
alarm control unit and automatically capture one] telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for
a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be
transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall
initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the
remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report
telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines,
transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the
following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.
2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire -alarm control unit.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 - 13
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm -initiating device.
2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble -initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.
5. Low battery.
6. Abnormal test signal.
7. Communication bus failure.
E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
F. Self -Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
2.11 DEVICE GUARDS
A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong,
or other device requiring protection.
I . Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.
2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire -alarm equipment.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install fife -alarm control unit on concrete base with tops of cabinets not
more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. Comply with requirements for
concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1. Install seismic bracing. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18 -inch (450 -mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
3. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire -alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not
more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.
1. Comply with requirements for seismic -restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
2. Comply with requirements for seismic -restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Smoke- or Heat -Detector Spacing:
1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke -Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating
Devices" Chapter, for smoke -detector spacing.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 14
Copyright 2008 Glumac
•
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat -Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"
Chapter, for heat -detector spacing.
3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m).
4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high
ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.
5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air -supply diffuser or return -
air opening.
6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part of
a lighting fixture.
E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct.
F. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler
rating and location.
G. Single -Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a
dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the
alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water -
flow switch and valve -tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
I. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
Install bells and horns on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille.
J. Visible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least
6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
K. Device Location -Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
L. Fire -Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches
(1830 mm) above the finished floor.
M. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished
floor.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire -protection systems related to doors in fire -rated walls and partitions and to doors in
smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect
hardware and devices to fire -alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire -alarm system in this
Section before making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 - 15
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
1. Alarm -initiating connection to smoke -control system (smoke management) at firefighter
smoke -control system panel.
2. Alarm -initiating connection to stairwell and elevator -shaft pressurization systems.
3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
4. Alarm -initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
5. Alarm -initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.
6. Alarm -initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
8. Supervisory connections at low -air -pressure switch of each dry -pipe sprinkler system.
9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
10. Supervisory connections at fire -pump power failure including a dead -phase or phase -
reversal condition.
11. Supervisory connections at fire -pump engine control panel.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire -alarm control unit.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire -alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a
ground wire from main service ground to fire -alarm control unit.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,
Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire
Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 - 16
•
•
Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound -level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Factory -authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm
Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"
Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
F. Fire -alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire -alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain fire -alarm system.
END OF SECTION 283111
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM
Copyright 2008 Glumac
283111 - 17
1,1
• •
COFFMAN
NGINEERS
October 20. 2008
Mr. Barry Zimmerman
Gensler
1200 Sixth Avenue
Seattle, 'Washington 98101
Project: Bank of America
Southcenter Branch
Tukwila, Washington
Subject: City of Tukwila Slab on Grade
Building Division Review September 9. 2008 Memorandum
Dear Barry:
Structural
Mechanical
Clear cal
(Ivd
taunting Control
Program and
Construction
Management
VD
CITY OF
OCT 212008
PERMIT CENTER
This letter is in response to Item 2 contained in the document provided by plans examiner. Dave
Larson. Item 2 states the concern of "the potential settlement of the slab -on -grade of 6 to 11
inches during a design level earthquake. They suggest using a structurally supported slab. The
submitted plans show a non-structural slab supported on grade."
Coffman Engineers has reviewed this comment as well as the geotechnical report. provided by
Shannon & Wilson dated July 26°' 2007. Section 7.4, entitled Floor Slabs. states, "A slab -on -
grade could be considered as a floor slab for the proposed building. The magnitude of slab -on -
grade settlement will depend on the amount of new fill that will be placed on the site to achieve
the floor slab elevation of the proposed building. If the floor elevation is at or lower than the
previous ground elevation at the site, the slab -on -grade would likely settle less than 1/4 inch under
static conditions." Section 7.4 also states. "Following a design -level earthquake (2,500 -year -
return period), a slab -on -grade could experience 6 to 11 inches of liquefaction -induced
settlement. as discussed in Section 7.2.2."
The code requires that the structure is to be designed for Collapse -Prevention performance
objective for the 2500 -year event and Life -Safety performance objective for the 500 year event.
Since the: building structure is founded on deep foundations, the settlement in the slab -on -grade
does not significantly affect the structural performance of the building. The settlement can he
considered a serviceability issue. It should be noted that the 6 to 11 inches of settlement may
occur during a 2.500 -year return period seismic event. but a lesser magnitude earthquake may
produce significantly less settlements. The geotechnical engineer, Jeremy Butkovich, confirmed
that other buildings around the Southcenter area have similar slab -on -grade floors with the same
potential for liquefaction -induced settlements. On this particular site. the floors will be
constructed on two feet of structural fill. The geotechnical engineer believes that this fill will not
affect the performance of the building
1601 fifth Avenue, Suitt 900
Seattle, Washington 98101.1620
206 623 0717 • las 206 624 3715
www.coffman com
Anchorage, Alaska
907 216 6664
los Angeles, California
818 2952650
Spokane, Washington
509 328 2994
CORRECTION
LTR# 2-
Apti
•
Mr. Barry Zimmerman
Gensler
October 20, 2008
Page 2
In summary, both Coffman Engineers and the geotechnical engineers believe that a slab -on -grade
floor is acceptable.
Contact us if you have any further comments or questions regarding this matter.
Sincerely,
Coffman Engineers. Inc.
Arvind K. Nerurkar. S.E.
Principal, Structural Engineer
akn:gr
.I V181obsvr8rr4G [2 of A Srwth Center Q, HrhVt o(A letter 122.doe
•
QUI SHANNON toWILSON, INC.
NNW GEOTECHNICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTS
October 7, 2008
Mr. Pat Burns
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
633 Southcenter Parkway
Tukwila, WA 98188
RE: METHANE GAS MITIGATION, BANK OF AMERICA,
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Dear Mr. Burns:
ALASKA
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
FLORIDA
MISSOURI
OREGON
WASHINGTON
EED
CITY OF TU LA
OCT 212008
PERMIT CEMER
Based on correspondence with Barry Zimmerman of Gensler, we understand that the City of
Tukwila has requested that we comment on methane gas mitigation for the proposed Bank of
America building in Tukwila, Washington.
As stated in our Geotechnical Report, dated July 26, 2007, methane gas may be generated in the
soils beneath the proposed building. In our opinion, the plastic vapor barrier, which will be
placed under the slab -on -grade, should help mitigate the transmission of methane gas through the
slab.
We understand that the building mechanical engineer does not anticipate any dead air zones in
the building. Because of the air flow, as well as the building's relatively small footprint, we do
not anticipate that a methane venting system will be needed for this project.
If you have any questions or need additional information, please contact us at (206) 632-8020.
Sincerely,
SHANNON & WILSON, INC.
Jerem N., utkovich
Engineer
JNB/jnb
c: Barry Zimmerman, Gensler (electronic mail)
21-1-207 50-002-L3. doc/wp/CLP
400 NORTH 34TH STREET • SLATE 100
P.O. BOF 300303
SEATTLE. WASHINGTON SBI03
206.832.6020 FA.K.206.605.6777
?t O: 1..a,^.0 •S3?•52 3S
«:w si,nrNIViiiso:;mnT.
21-1-20780-002
CORRECTION
!_T13#
•
®III GEOTECHNICAL 6WILSOL NsINC.
September '16, 2008
Mr. Pat Burns
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
633 Southcenter Parkway
Tukwila, WA 98188
RE: INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2006 SEISMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS,
BANK OF AMERICA, TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
ALASKA
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
FLORIDA
MISSOURI
OREGON
WASHINGTON
CIN OF TU iviL
OCT 212008
PERMIT CENTER
Dear Mr. Burns:
Based on correspondence with Barry Zimmerman of Gensler, we understand that the City of
Tukwila has requested that we provide International Building Code (IBC) 2006 seismic design
parameters for the proposed Bank of America building in Tukwila, Washington.
The 2006 IBC seismological inputs are short -period spectral acceleration, Ss, and spectral
acceleration at the 1 -second period, SI. Ss and Si are for a maximum considered earthquake,
which corresponds to ground motions with a 2 percent probability of exceedance in 50 years, or
about a 2,500 -year return period (with a deterministic maximum cap in some regions). The
mapped spectral response acceleration (SRA) values, Ss and S1 at the project site are 1.424
gravity (g) and 0.488g, respectively.
As presented in Section 7.2.1 of our Geotechnical Report, dated July 26, 2007, a site class SE
adequately characterizes the site subsurface conditions. Based on the site classification and SRA
values, we recommend a site coefficient, Fe, of 0.9, and a site coefficient, F, of 2.4.
If you have any questions or need additional information, please contact us at (206) 632-8020.
Sincerely,
SHANNON & WILSON, INC.
Jer I y N
Engineer
utkovich
JNB:MWP/jnb
c: Barry Zimmerman, Gensler (electronic mail)
21-1-20780-002-L2.doc/wp/CLP
400 NORTH 34TH STREET • SUITE 100
P.O. BOX 300303
SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98103
206.632.8020 FAX 206.695.6777
TDD: 1.800.833.6388
www.shannonwilson.com
Martin W. Page, P.E., L.E.G.
Associate
CORRECTION
LTR#
21-1-20780-002
S(t1;
•
STRUCTURAL DESIGiN
identified by the building official and that are the mini-
mum necessary to assure safe living conditions.
2. Any alteration of a historic structure provided that the
alteration will not preclude the structure's continued des-
ignation as a historic structure.
1612.3 Establishment of flood hazard areas. To establish
flood hazard areas, the governing body shall adopt a flood haz-
ard map and supporting data. The flood hazard map shall
include, at a minimum. areas of special flood hazard as identi-
fied by the Federal Emergency Management Agency in an
engineering report entitled "The Flood Insurance Study for
[INSERT NAME OF JURISDICTION]," dated [INSERT DATE OF ISSU-
ANCE], as amended or revised with the accompanying Flood
Insurance Rate Map (FIRM) and Flood Boundary and Floodway
Map (FBFM) and related supporting data along with any revi-
sions thereto. The adopted flood hazard map and supporting data
are hereby adopted by reference and declared to be part of this
section.
1612.4 Design and construction. The design and construction
of buildings and structures located in flood hazard areas,
including flood hazard areas subject to high velocity wave
action, shall be in accordance with ASCE 24.
1612.5 Flood hazard documentation. The following docu-
mentation shall be prepared and sealed by a registered design
professional and submitted to the building official:
1. For construction in flood hazard areas not subject to
high -velocity wave action:
1.1. The elevation of the lowest floor, including the
basement. as required by the lowest floor eleva-
tion inspection in Section 109.3.3.
1.2. For fully enclosed areas below the design flood
elevation where provisions to allow for the auto-
matic entry and exit of floodwaters do not meet
1 the minimum requirements in Section 2.6.2.1 of
ASCE 24, construction documents shall include
a statement that the design will provide for eq
ization of hydrostatic flood forces in accord
1 with Section 2.6.2.2 of ASCE 24.
1.3. For dry floodproofed nonresidential build]
construction documents shall include astatem
that the dry floodproofing is designed in a
dance with ASCE 24.
2. For construction in flood hazard areas subjec
high -velocity wave action:
2.1. The elevation of the bottom of the lowest hori
zontal structural member as required by the low-
est floor elevation inspection in Section 109.3.3.
2.2. Construction documents shall include a state-
ment that the building is designed in accordance
with ASCE 24. including that the pile or column
foundation and building or structure to be
attached thereto is designed to be anchored to
resist flotation. collapse and lateral movement
due to the effects of wind and flood loads acting
simultaneously on all building components, and
other load requirements of Chapter 16.
ID, l't-rwi Cbz
2.3. For breakaway walls designed to resist a nominal
load of less than 10 psf (0.48 kN/m2) or more than
20 psf (0.96 kN/m2), construction documen ECEIVED
shall include a statement that the breakaway. TUKWn14
is designed in accordance with ASCE 24. „ T
SECTION 1613
EARTHQUAKE LOADS
OC« 212008
PERMIT CENTER
1613.1 Scope. Every structure, and portion thereof, including
nonstructural components that are permanently attached to
structures and their supports and attachments, shall be
designed and constructed to resist the effects of earthquake
motions in accordance with ASCE 7, excluding Chapter 14 and
Appendix 11A. The seismic design category for a structure is
permitted to be determined in accordance with Section 1613 or
ASCE 7.
Exceptions:
1. Detached one- and two-family dwellings, assigned to
Seismic Design Category A. B or C, or located where
the mapped short -period spectral response accelera-
tion, SS, is less than 0.4 g.
2. The seismic -force -resisting system of wood -frame
buildings that conform to the provisions of Section
2308 are not required to be analyzed as specified in
this section.
3. Agricultural
dental human
4. Structures th
respon
addre
regu . tions p
bri s es, el
st ctures, bu
a d nuclear reactors.
DE - 500 yr event
10% exceedence in 50 yrs
Note "Structures are
specifically proportioned to
resist.
rr
of
er
lar
c
es
302
► ; �ns. Th• owing •: ds an s .. s shat ,
the u es ohis sectio have the Ings sh > n herein.
DESIGN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION. The earth-
quake ground motion that buildings and structures are specifi-
cally proportioned to resist in Section 1613.
MAXIMUM CONSIDERED EARTHQUAKE GROUND
MOTION. The most severe earthquake effects considered by
th' ode.
ORT
degre
SEIS
to a structure
of the design
ANICA SYSTE t.. For the purposes o •etermin-
ic loan SCE 7 ` . chanictems s 'nclude
ing s ems as Si' died e"rn.
OGONt •h•
(1.57
IC D
tions, at 90
n assigned
the severity
MCE - 2500 yr event
2% exceedence in 50 yrs
SEISMIC -FO - 1 r • G ' S . hat part of the
structural system that has been considered in the design to pro-
vide the required resistance to the prescribed seismic forces.
uuiiHECTION
LTR# Z'
2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE®
34p3
SEISMIC REHABILITATION OF EXISTING BUILDINGS
performance and seismic hazard levels. It should be
noted that not all combinations constitute reasonable
or cost-effective Rehabilitation Objectives. This stan-
dard is written under the premise that greater flexibil-
ity is required in seismic rehabilitation than in the
design of new buildings. However, given that flexibil-
ity, once a Rehabilitation Objective is selected, this
standard provides internally consistent procedures wi
the necessary specificity to perform a rehabilitation
analysis and dlesign.
Building (performance can be described qualita-
tively in terms of the safety afforded building occupants
during and after the event; the cost and feasibility of
restoring the building to its pre -earthquake condition;
the length of time the building is removed from service
to effect repairs; and economic, architectural, or historic
impacts on the larger community. These performance
characteristics are directly related to the extent of dam-
age that wouldbe sustained by the building.
In this standard, the extent of damage to a building
is categorized as a Building Performance Level. A
broad range of target Building Performance Levels may
be selected when determining Rehabilitation Objectives.
Probabilistic Earthquake Hazard Levels frequently
used in this standard and their corresponding mean
retu
0
Table C1-1. Rehabilitation Objectives
Consistent with ASCE 41
Seismic rehabilitations of
existing buildings
ev of simior sevent are as f.` ows:
Earthquake Having
Probability of Exceedance
Mean Return
Period (years)
50%/50 year
20%/50 year
I0%/50 year
2%/50 year
72
225
474
2,475
These mean return periods are typically rounded
to 75, 225, 500, and 2,500 years, respectively.
The ' ehabilita on Object've selecte, as a basi
r desig + ill dete ' e, to _ - at ex - e c
an "' sibility o any reha•tlitation project, as well as
the benefit to be obtained in terms of improved safety,
reduction in property damage, and interruption of use
in the event of future earthquakes. Table C1-1 indi-
cates the range of Rehabilitation Objectives that may
be used in this standard.
1.4.1 Basic Safety Objective
The Basic Safety Objective (BSO) is a Rehabili-
tation Objective that achieves the dual rehabilitation
goals of Life Safety Building Performance Level (3-C)
for the BSE -1 Earthquake Hazard Level and Collapse
Prevention Building Performance Level (5-E) for the
BSE -2 Earthquake Hazard Level.
8
Target Building
Performance Levels
0.
en
w
50%/50 year
20%/50 year
BSE -1
(- 10%/50 year)
BSE -2
(— 2%/50 year)
a
e
m
b
f
J
n
c
g
d
h
1
'Each cell in the above matrix represents a discrete Rehabili
Objective.
2The Rehabilitation Objectives in the matrix above may be used to
represent the three specific Rehabilitation Objectives defined in
Sections 1.4.1, 1.4.2, and 1.4.3, as follows:
Basic Safety Objective (BSO) k and p
Enhanced Objectives k and m, n, or
pand iorj
k and p and a, b, e, or f
m n, or o alone
Limited Objectives k alone
p alone
c, d, g, h, or I alone
1.4.1 Basic Safety Objective (BSO)
The BSO is intended to approximate the earth-
uake risk to life safety traditionally considered
acceptable in the United States. Buildings meeting
the BSO are expected to experience little damage
from relatively frequent, moderate earthquakes, but
significantly more damage and potential economic
loss from the most severe and infrequent earthquakes
that could affect them. The level of damage and
potential economic loss experienced by buildings
rehabilitated to the BSO may be greater than that
expected in properly designed and constructed new
buildings.
1.4.2 Enhanced Rehabilitation Objectives
Rehabilitation that provides building performance
exceeding that of the BSO is termed an Enhanced
Objective. Enhanced Rehabilitation Objectives shall
II
•
The IBC is based on the 2003 HEHRP Provisions
Chapter C11
SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
C11 GENERAL
In preparing the seismic provisions contained within this stan-
dard, the Seismic Task Committee of ASCE 7 formed established
a Scope and Forrnat Subcommittee to review the layout and pre-
sentation of the seismic provisions and to make recommendations
to improve the clarity and use of the standard. As a result of the ef-
forts of this subcommittee, the seismic provisions of ASCE 7-05
are presented in Chapters 11 through 23 and Appendices 11 A and
11B. as opposed to prior editions wherein the seismic provisions
were presented in a single section (Section 9). The increase in
number of sections has greatly reduced the depth of paragraph
numbering. The goal was to keep the section numbering to four
deep or less and, except for a few isolated sections. the goal was
achieved. Users will also note that the major subject areas are now
identified as "chapters" whereas in ASCE 7-02 they were called
sections. Individual provisions within a chapter are referred to
herein as "sections."
Of foremost concem in the reformat effort. was to organize the
seismic provisions in a logical sequence for the general structural
design community and to clarify the various headings to more
accurately reflect their content. Accomplishing these two primary
goals led to the decision to create 13 separate sections and to
relocate provisions into their most logical new section.
The provision:; for buildings and nonbuilding structures are
now distinctly separate as are the provisions for nonstructural
components. Less commonly used provisions. such as those for
seismically isolated structures. have also been located in their own
distinct section. We hope that the users of ASCE 7-05 will find the
reformatted seismic provisions to be a significant improvement
in .. anizatio . u. prese • '. over • editiowill be
quick ate app i e prow '.• s. Table
has been p .vided to a .ist users in ocating pr .> isions bet een
the two editions.
In addition to reorganizing Section 9 of ASCE 7-02, technical
changes were also made to the requirements of the standard pri-
e 2003 edition of the NEHRP Recomrttende
Provisions fo the Development of Seismic Regulations for New
Buildings and Other Structures, which is prepared by the Build-
ing Seismic Safety Council (BSSC) under sponsorship of the
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA). The Nationa
Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP) is managed by
FEMA. Since 1985. the NEHRP Provisions have been updated
every years. In .st cases. re 'cions inco orated into e 2005
editio ' f ASCE 7 , ctly refl changes = ... a to th 'h: t edi-
Pro • ' ' • s that ' - - e bast i 9 of A
7-02. Where ASCE 7 revisions vary significantly from those made
to the NEHRP Provisions. new commentary has generally been
provided.
The efforts by BSSC to produce the NEHRP Provisions
was preceded by work performed by the Applied Technology
Council (ATC) that originated after the 1971 San Fernando valley
earthquake that demonstrated the design rules of that time for
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
•
seismic resistance had some serious shortcomings. Each subse-
quent major earthquake has taught new lessons. ATC. BSSC. and
ASCE have endeavored to work individually and collectively to
improve each succeeding document to provide the best earthquake
engineering design and construction provisions as possible and
that the provisions would have nationwide applicability.
Content of Commentary. The commentary of Chapters 11
through 23 does not attempt to explain the earthquake loading
provisions in great detail. The reader is referred to two excellent
resources:
• Part 2, Commentary, of the NEHRP Recommended Provi-
sions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for New
Buildings and Other Structures, Building Seismic Safety
Council, Federal Emergency Management Agency, 2003
edition
• Recormnended Lateral Force Requirements and Conunen-
tarv. Seismology Committee, Structural Engineers Associa-
tion of California, 1999
With the reorganization of Chapter 9 into the multiple sections
contained in ASCE 7-05, there is no longer a direct correlation
between the numbering of the sections of ASCE 7 and the 2003
NEHRP Provisions. Table Cl 1-1 provides a correlation between
the sections of the two documents to facilitate the use of the
commentary of the 2003 NEHRP Provisions. Most of this com-
mentary contained herein is devoted to noting and explaining the
differences of major substance between ASCE 7-05 and the 2003
edition of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions.
Nature of Earthquake "Loads." The 1988 edition of ASCE 7
and the 1982 edition of ANSI A58.1 contained seismic provi-
sions based upon those in the Uniform Building Code (UBC) of
985 and earlier. The UBC provisions for seismic safety have
een based upon recommendations of the Structural Engineers
Association of California (SEAOC) and predecessor organiza-
tions. Until 1988. the UBC and SEAOC provisions had not yet
been fully influenced by the ATC and BSSC efforts. The 1972 and
1955 editions of A58.1 contained seismic provisions based upon
much earlier versions of SEAOC and UBC recommendations.
The two most far-reaching differences among the 1993. 1995,
1998.2002. and 2005 editions of ASCE 7 and these prior editions
are that the newer editions are based upon a strength -level limit
state rather than an equivalent loading for use with allowable stress
design and that it contains a much larger set of provisions that are
not directly statements of loading. The intent is to provide a more
reliable and consistent level of seismic safety in new building
construction.
Earthquakes "load" structures indirectly. As the ground dis-
places. a building will follow and vibrate. The vibration produces
deformations with associated strains and stresses in the structure.
Computation of dynamic response to earthquake ground shak-
ing is complex. As a simplification, this standard is based upon
351
NEI-
Rec
Provisi ns
for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings
and Other Structures
FEMA 450-2/2003 Edition
Part 2: Commentary
FEMA
ded
• •
2003 Commentary, Chapter 1
stiffness and all mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and other systems necessary for the normal operation
of the structure are expected to be functional. If repairs are required, these can be conducted at the
convenience of the occupants.
The risk to life safety during an earthquake in a structure meeting this performance level is negligible.
Note, that in order for a structure to meet this level, all utilities required for normal operation must be
available, either through standard public service or emergency sources maintained for that purpose.
Except for very low levels of ground motion, it is generally not practical to design structures to meet
this performance level.
The immediate occupancy level is similar to the operational level although somewhat more damage to
nonstructural systems is anticipated. Damage to the structural systems is very slight and the structure
retains all of its pre -earthquake strength and nearly all of its stiffness. Nonstructural elements, including
ceilings, cladding, and mechanical and electrical components, remain secured and do not represent
hazards. Exterior nonstructural wall elements and roof elements continue to provide a weather barrier,
and to be otherwise serviceable. The structure remains safe to occupy; however, some repair and
clean-up is probably required before the structure can be restored to normal service. In particular, it is
expected that utilities necessary for normal function of all systems will not be available, although those
necessary for life safety systems would be provided. Some equipment and systems used in normal
function of the structure may experience internal damage due to shaking of the structure, but most
would be expected to operate if the necessary utility service was available. Similar to the operational
level, the risk to life safety during an earthquake in a structure meeting this performance level is
negligible. Structural repair may be completed at the occupants' convenience, however, significant
nonstructural repair and cleanup is probably required before normal function of the structure can be
restored.
At the life safety level, significant structural and nonstructural damage has occurred. The structure may
have lost a substantial amount of its original lateral stiffness and strength but still retains a significant
margin against collapse. The structure may have permanent lateral offset and some elements of the
seismic -force -resisting system may exhibit substantial cracking, spalling, yielding, and buckling.
Nonstructural elements of the structure, while secured and not presenting falling hazards, are severely
damaged and cannot function. The structure is not safe for continued occupancy until repairs are
instituted as strong ground motion from aftershocks could result in life threatening damage. Repair of
the structure is expected to be feasible, however, it may not be economically attractive to do so. The
risk to life during an earthquake, in a structure meeting this performance level is very low.
At the collapse prevention level a structure has sustained nearly complete damage. The seismic -force -
resisting system has lost most of its original stiffness and strength and little margin remains against
collapse. Substantial degradation of the structural elements has occurred including extensive cracking
and spalling of masonry and concrete elements and buckling and fracture of steel elements. The
structure may have significant permanent lateral offset. Nonstructural elements of the structure have
e eerier . su.s •.ial .gea • . ay :'e .ec. dis e. cr•: 'ngf = 'g a ..ss. c
is un : fe for occupan as even relati K; y moderate gr. v d motion fro :'tershocks cou ,- induce
collap -. Repair of the .tructure and res oration to servic is probably not;.ractically achiable.
The design ground motion contained in the Provisions is taken as two-thirds of the maximum
considered earthquake ground motion. Such ground motion may have a return period varying from a
few hundred years to a few thousand years, depending on the regional seismicity. It is expected that
structures designed in accordance with the requirements for Group I would achieve the life safety or
better performance level for these ground motions. Structures designed in accordance with the
requirements for Group III should be able to achieve the Immediate Occupancy or better performance
level for this ground motion. Structures designed to the requirements for Group II would be expected to
achieve perfoimance better than the life safety level but perhaps less than the immediate occupancy
level for this ground motion.
•
General Provisions
While the design ground motion represents a rare earthquake event, it may not be the most severe event
that could ever affect a site. In zones of moderate seismicity, it has been common practice in the past to
consider ground motion with a 98 percent chance of non-exceedance in 50 years, or an average return
period of 2,500 years, as being reasonably representative of the most severe ground motion ever likely
to affect a site. This earthquake has been variously termed a maximum credible earthquake, maximum
capable event and, most recently, a maximum considered earthquake. The recent terminology is
adopted here in recognition that ground motion of this probability level is not the most severe motion
that could ever effect the site, but is considered sufficiently improbable that more severe ground motions
need not practically be considered. In regions near major active faults, such as coastal California,
estimates of ground motion at this probability of exceedance can produce structural demands much
larger than has typically been recorded in past earthquakes. Consequently, in these zones, the maximum
considered earthquake is now commonly taken based on conservative estimates of the ground motion
from a deterministic event, representing the largest magnitude event that the nearby faults are believed
capable of producing.
It is expected that structures designed to the requirements for Group I would be capable of responding to
e maximum considered earthquake at a near collapse or better performance level. Structures designed
to the requirements for Group III should be capable of responding to such ground motions at the life
safety level. Structures designed and constructed to the requirements for Group II structures should be
capable of responding to maximum considered earthquake ground motions with a performance
intermediate to the near collapse and life safety levels.
Baling Perimmence Levels
tmrdad
piano aeoslisnr.
lA
SM
NSW
Figure 1.2-1 Expected building performance.
In zones of high seismicity, structures may experience strong motion earthquakes several times during
their lives. It is also important to consider the performance expected of structures for these somewhat
less severe, but much more frequent, events. For this purpose, earthquake ground shaking with a 50
percent probability of non-exceedance in 50 years may be considered. Sometimes termed a maximum
probable event (MPE), such ground motion would be expected to recur at a site, one time, every 72
years. Structures designed to the requirements for Group I would be expected to respond to such ground
motion at the Immediate Occupancy level. Structures designed and constructed to either the Group II or
Group III requirements would be expected to perform to the Operational level for these events. This
performance is summarized in Figure C1.2-1.
It is important to note that while the performance indicated in Figure C1.2-1 is generally indicative of
that expected for structures designed in accordance with the Provisions, there can be significant
variation in the performance of individual structures from these expectations. This variation results
7
•
G1umac
507048GEN
June 20, 2008
Permit/Bid Set
SECTION 2.1 10 00 — WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
• (1'rn4Z
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of
General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 210500
- Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 21 specified herein.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) specified in inches.
B. Working plans as used in this Section refer to documents (including drawings and calculations) pre-
pared pursuant to requirements in NFPA 13 for obtaining approval of authority having jurisdiction.
C. NICET - National Institute For Certification In Engineering Technologies
D. Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes modifying, providing and installing a complete and fully operable automatic
sprinkler system as described in this Section of the Specification and as shown on the contract con-
struction drawings and shall be in accordance with rules, regulations and standards as required by
the following authorities having jurisdiction.
1. State of Washington
2. City of Tukwilla.
3. Building Department.
4. Fire Prevention Division, Fire Marshal's Office.
B. Work to be in accordance with criteria of the following design and installation standards:
1. State of Washington Structural Specialty Code.
2. National Fire Protection Association.
a. No. 13 - Sprinkler Systems
b. No. 14 - Standpipes & Hose Systems.
c. No. 70 - National Electrical Code.
d. No. 101 -Life Safety Code.
3. International Fire Code (IFC) with city & state amendments.
4. International Building Code (IBC) with city & state amendments.
5. Factory Mutual Approval Guide (Product listing, only).
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
7. Industrial Risk Insurance Underwriters.
8. Owner's insurance agency.
C.
Work includes but is not limited to the following:
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
CIIYOF ThK1�AALA
OCT 212008
PERMIT CENTER
CORRECTION.
LTR#
21 10 00-1
36#
1
Glumac June 20, 2008 Bank of America
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set New Southcenter Branch
1. Automatic Wet Type Sprinkler System: Provide & replace existing sprinkler heads in the
remodeled areas on 4th & 5th floors.
2. Remodeling of existing systems.
3. All cutting and patching.
4. Provide all pipe, fittings, sprinklers, valves, signs, flow switches, tamper switches, pro-
tective painting, test connections, drains and tests necessary to make the entire system
complete and operative.
5. Coordinate with plumbing contractor for capacity of all sprinkler main, test, and auxiliary
drain connections.
6. Valve tags and instruction plates shall be mounted and/or hung per local fire department
requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit six copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for
fire protection materials and products.
1. Thirty days after the awarding of contract, contractor shall submit list of manufacturer's
names and model numbers for approval to architect. This list shall identify any prior ap-
proved substituted items contractor wishes to use. Do not submit technical data until list
has been approved. This is mandatory.
2. Prior to construction submit for approval items including but not be limited to the follow-
ing:
a. Coordinated layout drawings. Lettering shall be minimum 1/8" high.
b. Sprinklers and escutcheons - designating area of use.
c. Valves, valve boxes, flow switches, and tamper switches.
d. Pipe, fittings, sway bracing, inserts, anchors and hangers.
e. Inspector's test and drain station.
f. Fire extinguishers.
B. Working Plans: Prepare scaled working plans for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not
necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, and elevations and slopes of horizontal runs,
wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Indicate interface between and spatial relationship to
piping and adjacent equipment. Lettering shall be minimum 1/8" high.
1. Spacing of fire sprinklers shall be coordinated with lights, air conditioning outlets, sound
speakers, architectural reflected ceiling plan; obstruction from light fixtures and other
architectural features; and sprinkler piping shall be coordinated with HVAC ductwork &
piping, plumbing, electrical conduit, cable trays and structure prior to the installation.
Drawings shall be composite type including mechanical, plumbing and lighting equip-
ment with sprinkler and sprinkler drain piping. See architectural ceiling plan.
C. Submittal Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Agency having jurisdiction for approval. Submit six
approved copies, bearing stamp and/or signature of authority having jurisdiction to the Engineer for
approval.
1. Contractor shall submit sprinkler head locations to architect for approval.
2. Each calculation shall include legible schematic of system showing all hydraulic refer-
ence points.
D. Hydraulic Calculations: Prepare hydraulic calculations of fire protection systems. Submit to author-
ity having jurisdiction for approval. Submit six approved copies, bearing stamp, and/or signature of
Agency having jurisdiction to Owner's representative for approval.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-2
1
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
1. Contractor shall submit published piping friction loss data from manufacturer with hy-
draulic calculations.
E. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which
indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13, and also that system is operation-
al, complete, and has no defects.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and prod-
ucts. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculation, certif-
icate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements
of the General Conditions and of Division 01.
G. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide the Owner with three sets of operating and main-
tenance instructions covering completely the operation and maintenance of sprinkler equipment and
controls. Manual shall be assembled in a 3 -ring binder and arranged in following sections:
1. Site Utilities: Drawings showing location, size, depth of all connections, valve boxes,
manholes, etc., as installed.
2. Section No. 1: A chart tabulating all types of pipefittings, valves, and piping specialties
installed in each system.
3. Section No. 3: Manufacturer's brochures of all sprinkler heads.
4. Section No. 9: Reproducible copies of approved working drawings prepared to facilitate
the actual installation of ductwork and piping. Drawings shall indicate location of all
concealed valves, and other apparatus.
5. Section No. 10: 2 copies of NFPA 25 "Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance
of Water Based Fire Protection Systems."
6. Section No. 11: Approval Calculations.
7. Section No. 12: Certificate of Installation.
8. Section No. 13: Guarantees.
9. The Contractor is responsible for proper instruction of Owner's personnel for operation
and maintenance of all material, equipment and apparatus provided.
1.5 DESIGN DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specification combined with any of the contract drawings are intended as a guide
to establish a basis of design for the systems required.
B. Contractor shall examine the existing installation, the Architectural, Interior Design, Structural, Me-
chanical and Electrical drawings, layout and install a completely hydraulically sized sprinkler sys-
tem for all modified areas. Space shall be provided for any valving and equipment to be used.
1. Contractor shall contact Owner's insurance agency to incorporate insurer's design re-
quirements in this layout document.
C. Pressure restricting devices shall be installed on any branch outlet exceeding 100 PSI.
D. All electrical devices used for this system shall be compatible with the fire alarm system, refer to
Division 26.
E. Seismic Requirement: All automatic sprinkler systems to be seismically braced.
1. Do not use NFPA Earthquake Zone Chart.
1.6 HYDRAULIC DESIGN
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-3
•
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
A. System shall be a straight line or gridded system per NFPA No. 13 with the following exceptions:
1 For all systems the design area shall be the hydraulically most demanding rectangular
area.
2. Minimum pressure for any sprinkler head shall not be less than 7 psi.
B. Light Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.10 GPM per square foot calculated for an area of 1500
square feet in the most remote location.
C. Ordinary Group I Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.15 GPM per square foot calculated for an area
of 1500 square feet in the most remote locations.
D. Ordinary Group II Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.20 GPM per square foot calculated for an area
of 1500 square feet in the most remote locations.
E. Extra Group I Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.30 GPM per square foot calculated for an area of
2500 square feet in the most remote locations.
F. Head spacing shall not exceed the limits described in NFPA Pamphlet No. 13.
1. Light Hazard: 225 sq.ft. (for smooth ceiling).
2. Ordinary Hazard: 130 sq. ft.
3. Extra Hazard: 100 sq. ft.
G. Maximum floor areas protected by any one sprinkler system riser:
1. Light Hazard: 52,000 sq.ft.
2. Ordinary Hazard: 52,000 sq.ft.
3. Extra Hazard: 40,000 sq. ft.
H. Flow Data: Contractor is to verify flow data (static pressure, residual pressure and GPM flowing)
available at site and provide design for available pressure and flow.
1.7 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 09: Finishes.
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor for the fire protection installation shall be duly qualified Fire Protection Contractor,
experienced and regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems with a license classi-
fication of C-16. Where local authorities require additional licensing of the Fire Protection Contrac-
tor, and/or workmen, such a license shall be mandatory for a prospective Contractor.
1. Contractor is to verify flow data (static pressure, residual pressure and GPM flowing)
available at site and provide design for available pressure and flow.
2. Permits - The Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain permits for the installation or con-
struction as required for approval and installation of the fire protection system. The Fire
Protection Contractor shall submit working plans to the authorities having jurisdiction to
obtain approval.
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-4
•
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 01. Handle components carefully to prevent
damage, denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged components. Damaged components shall be
replaced with new components.
B. Store/protect products under provisions of Division 01. Store components in clean, dry place. Pro-
tect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
1.3 GUARANTEE
A. Provide a one-year (12 months) guarantee under provisions of Division 01. The guarantee shall in-
clude parts, shipping, labor, travel costs, living expenses, required fees, and any other associated
cost or expense to repair or replace products or systems. The guarantee period is to begin on the
date of acceptance of the fire protection installation by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All products to be commercial grade, new and of the manufacturer's latest design model. Products
manufacturers outside of North America will not be accepted without written approval from engi-
neer prior to submission of bid.
B. All products to be UL listed and/or FM approved, except for items, which are not required to be
listed by code.
C. All products shall be delivered and stored in original containers. Containers shall be clearly marked
or stamped with manufacturer's name and rating.
D. The following items to be included but specified under Section 15050: Basic Materials and Me-
thods.
1. Hangers and supports.
2. Escutcheons plates, flashings and sleeves.
3. Access panel and doors.
4. Identification markers and signs.
5. Expansion compensators and flexible connectors.
6. Anchors, and seismic restraints.
7. Excavation and backfill.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS - ABOVE GROUND
A. General: The piping products listed below by manufacturer's name and model numbers are the only
acceptable materials listed for this project. Substitutions of pipe must be submitted and approved in
writing by the architect prior to bid. No copper pipe shall be allowed in the wet fire sprinkler sys-
tem.
B. Piping or fittings that show substantial rust or breaks in coating will be removed and replaced.
C. Allied Tube & Conduit: Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A-135 or ASTM A-795 stamped on pipe,
UV cured acrylic finish; Stockham, Grinnell or Warwick Class 150 threaded malleable, ASTM
A197, ASTM A126, or Victaulic roll -grooved fittings and couplings, only.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-5
•
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
D. Plenum Rated CPVC pipe listed for fire protection use. Blazemaster.
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
E. Shop -weld thread -o -lets may be used in lieu of tee fittings, but field (site) welding will not be per-
mitted.
F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic grooved couplings style 07, 75 or 77, or equal by Gruvlok.
G. Mechanical Tees: Victaulic style 920, Gruvlok. U -bolt mechanical tees are not acceptable.
H. Flexible sprinkler connector for ductwork sprinkler application: Flexhead or equal Factory Mutual
approved system.
I. Use rigid couplings where flexibility is not required or provide necessary sway bracing.
J. Prohibited Piping and Fittings: Copper pipe, CPVC pipe, schedule 5, 10, 20, 30, Super 40, "Dyna -
Flow", "Dyna-Thead", "Fireflow", XL, Thinwall, "Eddylite" by Bullmoose and Threadable
Lightwall pipe are not allowed. POZ-LOK, U -bolt Victaulic style 921 mechanical tees, Victaulic
style 99 Roust -A -Bout, Victaulic style 90 Plainlock, Hooker style fitting, quick disconnect, boltless,
snap joint, field drilling or welding of any main or branch lines, and any device specifically prohi-
bited by the local authority having jurisdiction is not allowed. No unions shall be permitted for any
size pipe. Plain end fittings are not allowed.
2.3 RODS AND CLAMPS
A. Socket clamps shall be stainless steel; four bolt type, equipped with stainless steel socket clamp
washers and nuts Grinnell Fig. 595 and 594, Elcen Fig. 37 and 37X, or equal.
B. Rods shall be stainless steel, 3/4" diameter.
2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS - GENERAL
A. Sprinkler heads shall be regular automatic closed -type heads of ordinary degree temperature rating
except that sprinkler heads installed in the vicinity of heating equipment or in special occupancy
areas shall be of the temperature rating as described in NFPA No. 13.
B. Provide quick response heads in all new light hazard occupancies. For existing sprinkler systems,
response type to match existing type unless otherwise noted.
C. Provide corrosion -resistant sprinkler heads where they are exposed to weather, moisture or corro-
sive vapors.
D. The Contractor shall furnish spare heads. The heads shall be packed in a suitable container and
shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating head
installed. In addition to the spare heads, the contractor shall furnish not less than two special sprink-
ler head wrenches. Refer to NFPA 13 section; "Stock of Spare Heads".
E. Provide 1" clearance with escutcheon around penetrations through suspended ceilings per ASCE re-
quirements.
2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS AND ESCUTCHEONS
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-6
•
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
A. Sprinkler heads installed shall be upright or pendent, as conditions require, and shall be of the fol-
lowing type and finish for the areas designated. Unless otherwise specified, sprinklers shall be
small frame type, center bulb capsule for finished areas, fusible link for unfinished areas, and 1/4"
orifice.
Sprinkler Escutcheon Temp.
Building Area Sprinkler Head Finish Finish Deg.
Unfinished Retail, &
Office, Garage & Upright/Pendant Brass None 165° F
Mechanical Rooms
Electrical, Telephone Upright Brass None 286° F
& Switchgear Rooms
Finished Ceilings Semi -recessed Pendant White White 165° F
Soffit Flush Sidewall White White 165°F
Sidewall Horizontal Sidewall Brass None 165°F
Balconies Dry Sidewall Brass Chrome 155°F
B. Manufacturer: Reliable, Star or Viking.
2.6 VALVING
A. 2" or Smaller:
1. Control Valve: OS&Y rising stem type gate valve bronze body, bonnet and disc, copper
alloy stem, threaded ends, 175 PSI WOG min. Provide with tamper switch.
2. Check Valve: Swing check type with bronze body, cap and disc, threaded ends, 175 PSI
WOG min.
3. Drip Valve: 3/4", cast brass automatic ball drip type, threaded ends, 175 PSI WOG min.
4. Testing Valve: 1-1/4", test and drain, sight glass, 1/4" test orifice, lever operated, 300 psi
WOG. Drain to mop sink or drain riser.
5. Main Drain Valve: 2", angle gate valve, bronze body, copper alloy stem, threaded ends,
175 psi WOG. Drain to mop sink or drain riser.
B. 2-1/2" or Larger:
1. Control Valve: Lug type wafer valve with tamper switch, ductile iron body, nickel plated
ductile iron disc, stainless steel stem and Buna-N seat, 175 PSI WOG min.
2. Control Valve: OS&Y rising stem type gate valve, cast iron body and bonnet, bronze
stem, seat and disc, flanged ends, 175 PSI WOG min. Provide with tamper switch.
3. Check Valve: Swing check type with cast iron body, bolted cap and disc, flanged ends,
175 PSI WOG min.
4. Manufacturer: Grinnell, Stockham, Milwaukee, Mueller, Kennedy, Elkart or AGF.
2.7 THRUST F31..,OCKS
A. Provide thrust blocks at changes in pipe direction, changes in pipe sizes, dead-end stops and at
valves.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-7
G1umac
507048GEN
• •
June 20, 2008
Permit/Bid Set
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
B. Calculate area of undisturbed earth of thrust block based on actual soil conditions and water test
pressure of 200 Psi.
C. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 03 and 05. All concrete shall be
Class A. unless specified otherwise.
D. Miscellaneous nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This system to be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of automatic
sprinkler system as specified by the requirements of the Specifications.
3.2 PERFORMANCE OF WORK
A. Examine areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed. Layout the system to suit
the different types of construction and equipment as indicated on the drawings and in accordance
with NFPA Pamphlet No. 13, 14, 20 and 24.
B. Work to start immediately after authorization has been given to proceed so that the overall progress
of the construction is not delayed.
C. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to properly interface components of the sprinkler system.
D. Follow manufacturer's directions and recommendations in all cases.
E. The ornission from the drawings or Specifications of any details of construction, installation, mate-
rials, or essential specialties shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing the same in place for a
complete system.
3.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide all temporary valving, piping, Siamese connections and other components as directed by the
fire agency office during all phases of construction.
3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Fire protection system shall be installed in accordance with the approved Drawings. The finished
ceiling is not to be erected until all fire protection piping has been installed, tested, and inspected.
Sprinkler heads located in the electrical equipment, elevator, or similar rooms shall be furnished
with deflectors to prevent water spray on equipment.
B. The arrangement of all pipes shall conform to all architectural requirements and field conditions,
shall be as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls
and other pipes, and shall be neatly spaced. Offsets will be permitted only where required to permit
the pipes to follow the walls. Standard fittings shall be used for offsets. All risers shall be erected
plumb and true, shall be parallel with the walls and other pipes, and shall be neatly spaced. All
work shall be coordinated with HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical and Structural work in order to avoid
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-8
• •
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
interference and unnecessary cutting of floors or walls. All underground or concealed work shall be
insepcted before the construction is closed up.
C. All sprinkler heads to be installed in ceilings throughout the scope of work building as listed in Sec-
tion 2.6. All areas without ceilings shall have rough brass upright or pendent heads as shown on
drawings.
D. Sprinkler heads in all finished areas are to be installed on a true axis line in both directions, with
maximum deviation from the axis line of 1 inch plus or minus and shall be plus or minus 1" within
center of tile. At the completion of the installation, if any heads are found to exceed the above-
mentioned tolerance, they shall be removed and reinstalled.
E. No pipes or other apparatus shall be installed so as to interfere in any way with full swing of doors.
F. The arrangement, positions, and connections of pipes, drains, valves, etc., shall be as required by
NFPA Pamphlet #13 for all areas to be sprinklered. However, the right is reserved by the Architect
to change the location of any item to accommodate conditions, which may arise during progress of
the work, without additional compensation for such changes provided that no additional heads are
required prior to the installation of the work.
G. Where required, piping shall be installed concealed in building construction, or though steel beams,
to obtain adequate head room.
H. All pipe throughout the job shall be reamed smooth before being installed. Pipe shall not be split,
bent, flattened, or otherwise injured either before or during installation.
I. Provide protective pans under pipes passing over high voltage electrical bus duct or switchgear
equipment. The pan shall be constructed of 12 gauge black iron with a 6 inch lip, the corners being
welded to make the pans watertight. Each pan shall be given three coats of Rust-Oleum paint and
shall be supported by pipe hangers. The pan shall drain clear of the bus duct or switchgear.
J. All pipe interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before installation, and shall be kept
clean during installation by plugging or other approved means. Piping shall be covered with vis -
queen during storage. Piping that shows signs of rusting will be removed from job site and re-
placed.
K. Field Connections: Any modifications to system required by field conditions, physical equipment
changes or compliance with code regulations shall be made promptly without cost to Owner.
L. Interference: No piping or sprinkler devices shall interfere with the operations of any door, window
or mechanical and electrical systems. No part of this system shall visibly be installed in the physi-
cal parameter of any window.
M. Threaded Pipe: Threads shall be clean cut, standard and tapered. Threads shall be made up using
flaked graphite and lubricating oil, piping compound or Teflon tape applied to the male threads on-
ly.
N. Grooved Pipe: Installation shall be as prescribed in the Victaulic Piping Manual only. Holes in the
piping are to be made in the fabrication shop, not at the job site. Contractor shall provide at the
project site a sample of each type of coupling (threaded, standard grooved coupling and mechanical
type), showing complete assembly with pipe connections.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-9
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
•
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
O. Keep all pipe and other openings closed to prevent entry of foreign matter. Cover all equipment and
apparatus to protect against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage, before and during con-
struction period. Restore to original condition all apparatus and equipment damaged prior to final
acceptance, including restoration of damaged shop coats of paint.
P. Location of sprinkler piping is critical.
1. Where ceiling space is at a minimum under beams location of ductwork takes prece-
dence, coordinate accordingly.
2. Include in base bid (3) two-hour coordination meetings with Owner, Architect, and Engi-
neer for coordination of sprinkler pipe routing.
3. Coordinate beam and shear wall penetrations with Structural Engineer. Obtain written
approval for all beam penetrations from Structural Engineer.
3.5 SLEEVES AND FLASHINGS
A. Wherever pipes are exposed and pass through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings, they shall be fitted
with chromium plated steel escutcheons held in place with setscrews. Care shall be taken to protect
the escutcheons during the course of construction.
B. Penetrations through fire rated walls and floors shall be sealed with listed mastic of similar fire rat-
ing.
3.6 HANGERS, INSERTS, SUPPORTS, AND SWAY BRACING
A. Hangers and supports shall be installed per NFPA #13 sections on Hangers and Protection of Piping
Against Damage Where Subject to Earthquake. Provide restraint from movement at end sprinkler
on branch line per NFPA 13.
B. Bending of threaded hanger rod is not allowed. All powder driven anchor pins in concrete are not
allowed.
3.7 SAFETY TESTING & VERIFICATION
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems according to NFPA 13 Chapter "System Accep-
tance."
B. Provide NFPA 13 Contractor's Material & Test Certificate Form 85A for above ground piping.
C. Provide manpower to test the function and performance of all Life Safety System components and
devices per floor and per zone basis in accordance with the local requirements.
3.8 AS -BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS AND CERTIFICATION
A. As -built Record Drawings are to be kept up-to-date and the Master Copy kept at the job site. Prior
to final acceptance of work being approved, these drawings are to be turned over to the Owner's
Representative for approval.
B. Written certification from the insuring agents, and authorities having jurisdiction that the tests were
satisfactory.
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 Glumac
21 10 00-10
• •
Glumac June 20, 2008
507048GEN Permit/Bid Set
Bank of America
New Southcenter Branch
C. After installation is complete and tests satisfactorily approved, deliver test certificates and approval
by the local Fire Authorities and the FMA to the architect. Final acceptance of sprinkler/standpipe
system by Owner's Representative shall be contingent upon receipt of certificate and approval from
authorities having jurisdiction and for the delivery of final As -Built Drawings.
END OF SECTION 21 10 00
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Copyright 2008 (ilumac
21 10 00-11
1
CZOf Tukwila
•
•
Jim Haggerton, Mayor
Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director
September 9, 2008
Brian Van Stipdonk
1200 Sixth Avenue, Suite 500
Seattle, WA 98101
RE: CORRECTION LETTER #2
Development Application Number D08-363
Bank of America — 320 Strander BI
Dear Mr. Van Stipdonk:
This letter is 10 inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be
approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and
reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building Department. At this time the
Fire, Planning and Public Works Departments have no comments.
Building Department: Dave Larson at 206 431-3678 if you have questions regarding the
attached comments.
Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans,
specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised
plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision
block
In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every
resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person
and will not be accepted throuj'h the mail or by a messenger service.
If you have an.y questions, please contact me at (206) 431-3670.
Sincerely,
0/20. -
Brenda Holt
Permit Coordinator
encl
File No. D08-363
P:\Pennit Center\Correction Letters\2008\D08-363 Correction Ltr #2.DOC
wer
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665
Tukwila Building Division
Dave Larson, 1Senior Plan
Examiner
Building Division Review Memo
Date: September 9, 2008
Project Name: Bank of America
Permit #: D08-363
Plan Review: Dave Larson, Senior Plans Examiner
The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the
following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable
documentation.
(GENERAL NOTE)
PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size).
(If applicabltJ Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet
stamped, not copied.)
1. The second Geo -tech report provided was based on requirements of the 2003 IBC. This
project is under the 2006 IBC. Please have Shannon & Wilson, Inc. revise their report as
necessary.
2. There are two issues in the geo-tech report that have not been addressed. The first is a
potential need for a methane venting system. The second is the potential settlement of the
slab on grade of 6 to 11 inches during a design level earthquake. They suggest using a
structurally supported slab. The submitted plans show a non-structural slab supported on
grade. Please address both of these concerns.
3. The occupant load counts provided in the response to correction letter #1 show no occupants
in rooms 100A and 100B. There is 599 sq. ft. in these rooms which should show as 6
occupants. Assuming that the movable partitions will be open during normal business hours,
the total occupant load for the area from grid 3.3 to 6 will be 51. This means that the
emergency lighted egress path will need to be extended from the shaded path shown in
corridor 108 to the front entry doors 100A and B.
4. Hardware sets are not listed in the door schedule for doors 100A and 100B. Other proposed
door hardware lists electronic locks. All hardware must be openable from the inside without
any special knowledge or effort and with a single movement. Please add hardware to door
schedule for 100A and 100B and confirm that all door hardware will be openable from inside
as noted above.
/ 5. Detail 2 on SO4.01 shows the vapor barrier below the capillary break. Typically, the vapor
barrier is on the top. If water accumulated in the capillary break area, how would it dissipate?
Please comment.
6. Detail 6 on S05.01 calls for a CMST 72. I could not find this strap in the Simpson Catalog.
How and where is it to be installed?
•
Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206-431-
3670. No further comments at this time.
August 5, 2008
Jim Haggerton, Mayor
epartment of Community Development Jack Pace, Director
Brian Van Stipdonk
1200 Sixth Avenue, Suite 500
Seattle, WA 98101
RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1
Development Application Number D08-363
Bank of America — 320 Strander BI
Dear Mr. Vara Stipdonk:
This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be
approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and
reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building and Planning Departments. At
this time the Fire and Public Works Departments have no comments.
Building Department: Dave Larson at 206 431-3678 if you have questions regarding the
attached comments.
Planning Department: Stacy MacGregor at 206-433-7166 if you have questions regarding
the attached comments.
Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans,
specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised
plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision
block.
In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every
resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person
and will not be accepted throujih the mail or by a messenjer service.
If you have an.y questions, please contact me at (206) 431-3670.
Sincerely,
Brenda Holt
Permit Coordinator
encl
File No. D08-363
P:\Pennit Center\Correction Letters\2008\D08-363 Correction Ltr fl1.DOC
wer
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665
Tukwila Building Division
Dave Larson, (Senior Plan
Examiner
Building Division Review Memo
Date: August 5, 2008
Project Name: Bank of America
Permit #: D08-363
Plan Review: Dave Larson, Senior Plans Examiner
The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the
following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable
documentation.
(GENERAL NOTE)
PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size).
(If applicabl, Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet
stamped, not copied.)
1. Please provide a means of egress plan. Refer to section 106.1.2 of the 2006 IBC. We prefer to see the
means of egress depicted as a shaded path through the space connecting at least two exits when two
or more exits are required. The common paths leading to the means of egress should not be shaded.
The maximum distance a person can travel from a most remote point to the means of egress is per
section 1014.3 IBC, 1014.4.2 IBC and 1025.8 IBC. Once a person reaches the means of egress
pathway, they need to be able to travel in at least two distinct directions to an exit. The means of
egress path is required to have emergency lighting along its entire length at intensity levels per
section 1006.4 IBC. Please show compliance with this requirement on plans. This plan is also a good
place to show placement of lighted exit signage. The width of the means of egress path shall be per
section 1005.1 IBC and shall be indicated on the plan.
2. The construction type was shown as V A . This would require exterior walls to be fire rated with
protected openings do to proximity of property line, or in this case, the outer edge of the no -build
easement. As discussed, V B may also be appropriate and would not require exterior fire rating with
a 10 foot setback. Please revise construction type or revise plans to meet construction requirements
of table 602 IBC.
3. A geotechnical report was submitted with this application that appears to be the same report used for
the main mall and parking garage structures and not specific to the site proposed for the Bank of
America. In the back of the structural calculations book a partial geotechnical report was provided
that appears to be different than the mall report. It starts with page 4 and ends with page 9 and
appears to be missing pages at both ends. Please submit a complete geotechnical report specific to
this site and show that recommendations in the report have been coordinated between structural
design and existing soil conditions. All references to the International Building Code will need to be
based on the current 2006 code.
4. Please include a total occupant load count and on a floor plan show the occupant count in each room
or space.
Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206-431-
3670. No further comments at this time.
PLANNING DIVISION COMMENTS
DATE: July 15, 2008
APPLICANT: Brian Van Stipdonk
RE: D08-363
ADDRESS: Bank of America 106 Southcenter Mall (320 Strander Blvd)
Please review the following comments listed below and submit your revisions accordingly. If
you have any questions on the requested revision, Stacy MacGregor is the planner assigned to
the file and can be reached at 206-433-7166.
1. As a condition of design review (L08-001), the sidewalk fronting Strander Blvd needs to
be increased to 8' in depth and continue to the eastern limits of the construction. Revise
plan set accordingly.
2. The existing mature landscaping along Strander Blvd (street trees, photinia, juniper
bushes) are to be retained although photinia and juniper will be pruned back to
accommodate the sidewalk depth. Describe tree and landscape preservation measures
on the plan set.
3. Sheet A09.02 South Elevation: the white panel system should extend upwards beyond
the red panel system. Revise plan set.
4. Sheet L.01: Correct labeling of line 2 on plant material list to say "wickwar flame
heather"
5. Sheet Al2.11 Trash Enclosure: provide finish details (materials and color) for brick
work and gates.
6. Per Design Review L08-001: A bond for 150% of the value of the demolition permit for
the existing Bank of America will be a condition of CofO.
r PERMIT COORD COPY ,
PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-363
PROJECT NAME: BANK OF AMERICA
DATE: 05-28-09
SITE ADDRESS: 320 STRANDER BL.
Original Plan Submittal
Response to Correction Letter #
Response to Incomplete Letter #
X Revision # 1 After Permit Issued
DEPARTMENTS:
Building Division
Public Works
Fire Prevention
Structural
Planning Division
Permit Coordinator
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Complete ❑
Comments:
Incomplete
DUE DATE: 06-02-09
Not Applicable
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED:
Departments deterrnined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW 0 Staff Initials:
LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
TUES/THURS OUTING:
Please Route 1 Structural Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
No further Review Required
DATE:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
DUE DATE: 06-30-09
Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments)
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE:
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
Documents/routing slip,doc
2-28-02
A PERMIT COORD COPY.
PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-363 DATE: 10-21-08
PROJECT NAME: : BANK OF AMERICA
SITE ADDRESS: 320 STRANDER BL
Original Plan Submittal
X Response to Correction Letter # 2
Response to Incomplete Letter #
Revision # after Permit Issued
DEPARTMENTS:
v�
BuIYdTg Division
Public Works
n
-co
Fire Prevention
Structural
n
Planning Division
Permit Coordinator
n
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 10-23-08
Complete CA
Comments:
Incomplete n Not Applicable
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials:
TUES/THURS ROUTING:
Please Route Structural Review Required 111 No further Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 11-20-08
Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
Not Approved (attach comments) n
DATE:
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping ❑ PW 0 Staff Initials:
Documents/routing slip.doc
2-28-02
PERMIT COORD COPY
PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-363 DATE: 08-26-08
PROJECT NAME: BANK OF AMERICA
SITE ADDRESS: 320 STRANDER BL
Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter #
X Response to Correction Letter # 1
Revision # after Permit Issued
DEPARTMENTS: qd 41t'
ilding 'vision
Public Works
n
Fire Prevention
Structural
n
n
Plarfriing ivision
Permit Coordinator
DETERMINAIfI N OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Complete C Incomplete
Comments:
n
DUE DATE: 08-28-08
Not Applicable ❑
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg D Fire ❑ Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials:
TUES/THURS ROU ING:
Please Route Structural Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
No further Review Required
DATE:
n
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
DUE DATE: 09-25-08
Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments)
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE:
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections: Bldg 31 Fire 0 Ping ❑ PW 0 Staff Initials.
Documents/routing slip.doc
2-28-02
PERMIT COORD COPY •
PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08-363
PROJECT NAME: BANK OF AMERICA
SITE ADDRESS: 320 STRANDER BL
X Original Plan Submittal
Response to Correction Letter #
DATE: 07-08-08
Response to Incomplete Letter #
Revision # After Permit Issued
DEPARTMENTS: 6.4v)
Btking vision
Public Work
1- P97-05
I IIttAX1 141°5
Fire Prevention Imp
Structural
IL.
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Complete
Comments:
Incomplete
n
de'vta
*4'oPlanning Division
Permit Coordinator
DUE DATE: 07-10-08
Not Applicable
n
Permit Center Use Only •
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESSMAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg 0 Fire ❑ Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials:
TUES/THURS ROUTING:
Please Route
Structural Review Required
❑ No further Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
Approved Approved with Conditions
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
DUE DATE: 08-07-08
Not Approved (attach comments) d
DATE:
Permit Center Use Only I �� Ci -
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: �% /
Departments issued corrections: Bldg Ild Fire 0 Ping L1 PW 0
Staff Initials:
Documents/routing slip.doc
2-28-02
•
PROJECT NAME: 60k41\1, Di- Ayr eN�
SITE ADDRESS: 1jti c--AYN &eN 'e1j1
PERMIT NO: -a#
ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: 10123 Io'9
REVISION LOG
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INIT S
I
o�1 L1
(42-l(o-0c
Summ: of Revision: GIA Mk t ADC ok 0 DSi---e Atv414,i ywviv. e
v c.,0 , plain
Received by: 6Le C.n e_
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
S • of Revision:
Received by:
(please print)
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
S • • : of Revision:
Received by:
(please print)
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
S • • : of Revision:
Received by:
(please print)
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
S • • • • : of Revision:
Received by:
Received by:
(please print)
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
Summ : of Revision,
Received by:
(please print)
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206-431-3670
Fax: 206-431-3665
Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
REVISION SUBMITTAL
Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through
the mail, fax, etc.
Date: May 28, 2009
Plan Check/Permit Number: D08-363
❑ Response to Incomplete Letter #
❑ Response to Correction Letter #
0 Revision # after Permit is Issued
t=riv Or rF u
MAY 2 8 2009
▪ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner PERMIT CENTEh
Project Name:
Bank of America, Southcenter
Project Address: 320 Strander Boulevard
Contact Person: Brian van Stipdonk Phone Number: (206) 654-2100
Summary of Revision:
Change of composite aluminum panel color.
Change involves a portion of the South edge of the drive-through canopy. Portions of B of A Red panels
were substituted for white panels to accommodate slight construction variation. Change was to reinforce
design intent of the approved BAR documentation as presented, maintaining visual integrity.
Sheet Number(s): A09.02
"Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision
Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by:
Entered in Permits Plus on
oSl2�ls�
\applications\forms-applications on linc\revision submittal
Created: 8-13-2004
Revised: 1-2009
s
City of Tukwila
•
Steven M. Mullet, Mayor
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206-431-3670
Fax: 206-431-3665
Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
:f
•
Steve Lancaster, Director
Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through
the mail, fax, etc.
Date: 6 0
21
Plan Check/Permit Number:
Poe -3‘,5
Response to Incomplete Letter #
Response to Correction Letter # 2 -
Revision # after Permit is Issued
Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner
Project Name: 344 1 Avte4‘4
Project Address: 3Z0 5-41"4-,-,d er'- Pill d •
Contact Person:_ arta, U4ri 64 06h 1 k, Phone Number:
CRnEceiveD
Y oprukwu
OCT 211008
PERS CENTER
Summary of Revision:
e45- ce -4G e) cin %e -tip . 0-1' cf 1 cocr''e(--s 4'A
Sheet Number(s): 0 Mo 1 3d d 1 �d � 01
"Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of r
Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by:
kEntered in Permits Plus on
‘applications\t'orms-applications on line\revision submittal
Created: 8-13-2004
ion
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206-431-3670
Fax: 206-431-3665
Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
REVISION SUBMITTAL
Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through
the mail,, fax, etc.
Date:
gz_.4,
Plan Check/Permit Number: D08-363
❑ Response to Incomplete Letter #
Response to Correction Letter # 1
❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued
❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner
AUG 26 998
r‘."444 cevre
Project Name: BANK OF AMERICA
Project Address: 320 Strander B1
Contact Person: Brian Van Stipdonk Phone Number: Z06 . V 4 21
Summary of Revision:
liO2 )42 -,IA
46 LIA✓)S/i" V► 1 dat,./1✓1)5109-c Cdl'i0G' iar1S
Cyd r 6-4-4(itid c ap+1 ., e q+ pl4i14)
yymsyr
Sheet Number(s):
"Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision
Received at the City of Tukwila Perm't Center by:
Entered in Permits Plus on t
\applications\forms-applications on line\revision submittal
Created: 8-13-2004
Revised:
King County
Department of Natural Resources and Parks
Wastewater Treatment Division
liv- 3b3
Non -Residential
Sewer Use Certification
• To be completed for all new sewer connections, reconnections or
change of use of existing connections.
• This form does not apply to repairs or replacements of existing
sewer connections within five years of disconnect.
Please Print or Type `
7.0® r4�,�'�- $ v
Prope y t t Addre
City V ! W State `! 8r tt
e 3k-a*Owner's NaIle
Subdivision Name
Subdiv. #
Building Name
ktio- Ato4c.1
(if applicable)
Lot #
Block #
Owner's Phone Number (with Area Code)
Property Contact Phone Number (with Area Code)
Owner's Mailing Address
60til TroltAtibl 1416S
A. Fixture Units
Fixture Units x Number of Fixtures = Total Fixture Units
Kind of Fixture
Fixture Units
No. of Fixtures
Total
Fixture Units
Public
Private
Public
Private
Bathtub and Shower
4
4
Shower, per head
2
2
Dishwasher
2
2
Drinking fountain (each head)
1
.5
1
I
Hose bibb (interior)
2.5
2.5
Clotheswasher or laundry tub
4
2
Sink, bar or lavatory
2
1
•Z
te-4
Sink, Clinic flushing
8
8
Sink, kitchen
3
3
2
1.5
)
(jp 3
Sink, other (service)
Sink, wash fountain, circle spray
4
3
Urinal, flush valve, 1 GPF
5
2
1
Urinal, flush valve, >1 GPF
6
2
Urinal, waterless
0
0
Water closet, tank or valve, 1.6 GPF
6
8
3
4
3
1 I $
Water closet, tank or valve, >1.6 GPF
Total Fixture Units 3 1
Residential Customer Equivalent (RCE)
20 fixture units equal 1.0 RCE
Total No. of Fixture Units _
20
(.�
RCE
Properly Tax ID #
Party to be Billed (if different from owner)
City or Sewer District
Date of Connection
Side Sewer Permit #
Please report any demolitions of pre-existing building on this property.
Credit for a demolition may be given under some circumstances.
Demolition of pre-existing building? 0 Yes 0 No
Was building on Sanitary Sewer? 0 Yes 0 No
Was Sewer connected before 2/1/90? 0 Yes ❑ No
Sewer disconnect date:
Type of building demolished?
Request to apply demolition credit to multiple buildings? 0 Yes 0 No
B. Other Wastewater Flow
(in addition to Fixture Units identified in Section A)
Type of Facility/Process:
Estimated Wastewater Discharge:
Gallons/days
Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE):
187 gallons per day equals 1.0 RCE
Total Discharge (gal/day) =
187
C. Total Residential Customer Equivalents:
(add A & B)•
A
B
i .5S-
RCE
55
RCE
RCE
RECEIVED
ED
JUL 08 2008
PERMIT CENTEF
Pursuant to King County Code 28.84, all sewer customers who establish a new service which uses metropolitan sewage facilities shall be subject to a capacity charge.
The amount of the charge is established annually by the King County Council at a rate per month per residential customer or residential customer equivalent for a
period of fifteen years. The purpose of the charge is to recover costs of providing sewage treatment capacity for new sewer customers. All future billings can be
prepaid at a discounted amount. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount.
Questions regarding the capacity charge or this form should be referred to King County's Wastewater Treatment Division at 206-684-1740.
I certify that the information given is correct. I understand that the capacity charge levied will be based on this information and any
deviation will require resubmission of correc)ed ta for determination of a revised capacity charge. l /l
Date
Signature of Owner/Representative
Print Name of Owner/Representative
1058 (Rev. 9/07)
ellev5 `?
White - Kina County Yellow - Local Sewer Aoercv Pink - Sewe' Customer
Untitled Page
o
0
General/Specialty Contractor
A business registered as a construction contractor with L&tI to perform construction work
within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must
maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance.
Business and Liicensing Information
Name
Phone
Address
Suite/Apt.
City
State
Zip
County
Business Type
Parent
Company
SWINERTON
BUILDERS
4159841248
260 TOWNSEND ST
SAN FRANCISCO
CA
941071790
OUT OF STATE
CORPORATION
UBI No.
Status
License No.
License Type
Effective Date
Expiration Date
Suspend Date
Previous License
Next License
Associated
License
Specialty 1
Specialty 2
409013296
ACTIVE
SWINEB*992DR
CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTOR
3/19/2001
12/28/2008
BUDBACI990DN
SWINTBO997JT
GENERAL
UNUSED
Business Owner Information
Narne
Role
Effective Date
Expiration Date
GILLETE, JAMES R
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
03/19/2001
BRINKHOFF, RANDALL DEAN
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
08/05/2005
SUNDGREN, DONALD ERIC
PRESIDENT
08/05/2005
CHAPMAN, JOHN BRYAN
SECRETARY
08/05/2005
GRAY, LYN M
SECRETARY
12/15/2002
MOY, RODNEY R
SECRETARY
01/07/2003
HADLER, STANISILAW WACLAW
VICE PRESIDENT
08/05/2005
RE, MICHAEL
VICE PRESIDENT
01/01/1988
VANDERBERG, ROBERT P
VICE PRESIDENT
01/11/2000
BLANKE, EDWARD E
VICE PRESIDENT
01/11/2000
MARKS, GORDON W
VICE PRESIDENT
03/19/2001
ARGILLA, LUKE P
VICE PRESIDENT
05/30/1991
KUFFNER, CHARLES P
VICE PRESIDENT
09/05/1996
EHARA, GEORGE 5
VICE PRESIDENT
08/05/2005
MONTOYA, RONALD ANTHONY
VICE PRESIDENT
08/05/2005
SCHOWALTER, LINDA G
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
04/12/2000
08/05/2005
CATEL, MARKS
SECRETARY
09/21/1999
08/05/2005
SCHNELL, KEITH T
VICE PRESIDENT
10/10/2000
08/05/2005
HOOPES, JEFFREY C
VICE PRESIDENT
06/12/1996
08/05/2005
https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Detail.aspx?License=SWINEB *992DR
Page 1 of 4
10/28/2008